JP2022000214A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of enhancing interest in a game.SOLUTION: A plurality of kinds of game states exist as game states and a normal section and an advantageous section exist as game sections. The advantageous section is set with setting of SB winning data or establishment of first BB prize winning as an opportunity in the normal section, and shift lottery processing to an RT state is executed when the advantageous section is set. In this case, the shift lottery processing to the RT state is executed in a mode corresponding to a game state at that point of time in a first game started after the advantageous section is set. When the SB winning data is set in a state after a bonus and in a situation of the normal section, a situation that is in a first preparation state and is in the advantageous section can be achieved. Setting of the SB winning data in a situation that is in the RT state and is in the normal section is more advantageous than setting of the SB winning data in another situation.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 9

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

There is a slot machine as a kind of gaming machine. The slot machine is provided with a plurality of reels, and a part of the plurality of symbols given to the outer peripheral portion of each reel can be visually recognized through a display window. Then, when the player bets a game medium such as a medal and operates the start lever, each reel starts rotating, and after each reel starts rotating, each reel is sequentially stopped by operating the stop button. ..

In addition, a lottery is performed inside the slot machine on the condition that the bet of the game medium and the operation of the start lever are performed, and the symbol that the result of the lottery is won and the player is won on the preset valid line is displayed. A predetermined number of gaming media may be paid out on condition that they are stopped (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2014-045989

Here, in a gaming machine such as the above example, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The above problem is not limited to slot machines, but also applies to, for example, a game machine that uses a game ball as a game medium.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-exemplified circumstances and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of gaming.

The invention according to claim 1 in order to solve the above-mentioned problems includes a picture display means for variablely displaying a picture and a picture display means.
The start operation means operated to start the variable display of the pattern in the pattern display means, and the start operation means.
A combination lottery means for executing a combination lottery process based on the operation of the start operation means, and a combination lottery means.
The stop operation means operated to stop the variable display of the picture in the picture display means, and the stop operation means.
The pattern variation display is started based on the operation of the start operation means and the predetermined start condition is satisfied, and the pattern variation display is stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means. The pattern display control means that controls the display means,
When the stop result corresponding to the winning combination in the lottery process of the winning combination is displayed after the variation display of the pattern, the corresponding execution is executed to control the winning combination as the winning combination is established. Means and
Equipped with
The corresponding execution means wins a predetermined corresponding combination in the lottery process of the combination, and based on the stop operation mode of the variation display of the pattern becoming the predetermined mode, the predetermined response execution means executes the corresponding control. In a gaming machine equipped with means
When the game section is an advantageous section, a predetermined mode corresponding to any one of the predetermined mode and the mode for preventing the predetermined mode from becoming the predetermined mode when the predetermined corresponding combination is won in the lottery process of the combination. Notification control means for executing notification and
The restriction setting means for setting the restriction situation in the advantageous section and
Equipped with
The notification control means is characterized in that when the restricted situation is set even in the advantageous section, the predetermined notification is not executed even if the predetermined corresponding combination is won in the lottery process of the combination. ..

According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

It is a front view of the slot machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a perspective view of the slot machine which shows the state which the front door is opened. It is a front view of a housing. It is a figure which shows the symbol arrangement of each reel. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the design which becomes visible from a display window part, and the combination line. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the winning mode and the privilege given. (A) is a front view of a common display area, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the content of information corresponding to the stop order displayed on the combined display unit. (A), (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between the notification content of the stop order in the image display device and the display content of the stop order in the dual-purpose display unit. It is an electric block diagram of a slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the main process which is executed in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing executed in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the normal process which is executed in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the lottery process of a combination executed by the main MPU. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the lottery table for a normal state, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a lottery table for a BB state. It is a flowchart which shows the reel control processing which is executed in the main MPU. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the gaming state existing in this slot machine. (A) It is explanatory drawing for explaining the content of the winning data which is set in the lottery table for a normal state, and (b) is set in the index value = 7 in the lottery table for a post-bonus state. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the winning data, and (c) the description for demonstrating the content of the winning data set in the index value = 7 to 13 in the lottery table for the 1st preparation state. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the content of the winning data (d) in which the index value = 7 to 13 is set in the lottery table for the second preparation state, and (e) the lottery table for the RT state. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the winning data which is set in the index value = 7. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the relationship between the stop order of reels and the winning mode established when the lottery table for the 1st preparation state is selected, and (b) the lottery table for the 2nd preparation state. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the relationship between the stop order of reels and the winning mode established when is selected. (A)-(h) It is a time chart which shows the state that the transition to the RT state occurs in relation to the game section. (A)-(f) It is a time chart which shows the state that the transition lottery process to the RT state is executed. (A) An explanatory diagram for explaining a first table for a normal state, (b) an explanatory diagram for explaining a second table for a normal state, and (c) explaining a table for various states. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining (d) the table for the RT state, and (e) is the explanatory diagram for explaining the table for the first BB state. It is a flowchart which shows the correspondence process at the end of a game executed by the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the normal state processing which is executed in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the bonus post-state processing which is executed in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st preparation state processing which is executed in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd preparation state processing which is executed in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the notification control processing which is executed in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the notification processing which is executed in the production side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the RT state processing which is executed in the main MPU. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the relationship between the point value set for each combination and the set value when the lottery process of a combination is executed in a normal state, and (b) the combination in the 1st BB state. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the relationship between the point value set for each combination and the set value when the lottery process is executed, and (c) when the lottery process of a combination is executed in the 2nd BB state. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the relationship between the point value and the set value set for each combination. It is a flowchart which shows the control process of the game section executed by the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the transition trigger process of the RT state executed by the main MPU. (A) to (i) It is a time chart which shows the state that the transition lottery process to the RT state is executed in a normal state. It is a flowchart which shows the process for BB executed in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for 1st BB executed in the main MPU. (A) to (i) It is a time chart for demonstrating the progress content of the game when the 1st BB state occurs. It is a flowchart which shows the process for 2nd BB executed in the main MPU. (A)-(i) It is a time chart for demonstrating the progress content of the game when the 2nd BB state occurs. It is a flowchart which shows the end processing of the advantageous section executed by the main MPU. (A) to (i) It is a time chart which shows how the advantageous section is forcibly terminated in relation to the number of continuous games of the advantageous section. (A)-(h) A time chart showing how the advantageous section is forcibly terminated due to the transition to the RT state when the number of continuous games in the advantageous section is equal to or greater than the number of trigger games. be. It is a flowchart which shows the management process which is executed in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the lighting process which is executed in the main MPU. (A), (b) is a time chart showing the relationship between the opening angle of the front door and the control state of the lighting device. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the state of the lighting apparatus in the case where the front door is an open state and the opening angle is not more than a predetermined opening angle, and (b) the opening angle of a front door is a predetermined. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the state of the lighting apparatus in the case of the maximum opening angle exceeding the opening angle. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the combination of the winning data and the point value set in each of the index value = 7 to 13 of the 2nd preparation state in 2nd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the relationship between the stop order of reels and the winning mode established in the case of winning in the index value = 8 to 13 in the 2nd preparation state. It is a situation where the advantageous section is in the second preparation state and the transition condition to the RT state is satisfied, and the number of continuous games in the advantageous section is 30 games less than the number of trigger games. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating how the stop order of a reel is notified by an image display apparatus when the index value = 10 is won in the situation where the number of games is less than the trigger game. It is a flowchart which shows the notification control processing which is executed in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the notification processing which is executed in the production side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd preparation state processing which is executed in the main MPU. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the lottery table for a normal state in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the transition trigger process of the RT state executed by the main MPU. (A) An explanatory diagram for explaining a first table for a normal state, (b) an explanatory diagram for explaining a second table for a normal state, and (c) explaining a table for various states. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating (d) the table for RT state. It is a flowchart which shows the end processing of the advantageous section executed by the main MPU in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the transition trigger process of the RT state executed by the main MPU in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the control process of the game section executed by the main MPU in 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the transition trigger process of the RT state executed by the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the end processing of the advantageous section executed by the main MPU in 7th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the correspondence relationship between the combination of the symbol which becomes a prize in 8th Embodiment, and the privilege given when it becomes a prize. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the lottery table for a normal state. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the relationship between the stop order of reels and the winning mode established when the lottery table for a normal state is selected. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the winning data which is set in the lottery table for a normal state, and (b) is set in the index value = 9 in the lottery table for a post-bonus state. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the winning data, and (c) the description for demonstrating the content of the winning data set in the index value = 9 to 15 in the lottery table for the 1st preparation state. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the content of the winning data (d) in which the index value = 9 to 15 is set in the lottery table for the second preparation state, and (e) the lottery table for the RT state. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the winning data which is set in the index value = 9. It is a flowchart which shows the notification control processing which is executed in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the end processing of the advantageous section executed by the main MPU.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment in the case where the present invention is applied to a slot machine which is a kind of gaming machine will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. 1 is a front view of the slot machine 10, FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 with the front door 12 open, and FIG. 3 is a front view of the housing 11.

As shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, the slot machine 10 includes a housing 11 that forms its outer shell. The housing 11 is formed in a box shape that is open to the front as a whole by fixing a plurality of wooden panels.

As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, a front door 12 is attached to the front side of the housing 11. The front door 12 is supported by the housing 11 so as to be able to open and close the internal space of the housing 11 with the shaft portion 12a provided on the left side thereof as a rotating shaft. The front door 12 is locked in an unopenable state by a locking device 13 provided on the back surface thereof, and this locked state is released by an unlocking operation with a predetermined key to the key cylinder 14.

As shown in FIG. 1, a game panel 20 is provided near the center of the front door 12. The game panel 20 is formed so that three vertically long display window portions 21L, 21M, and 21R are arranged side by side. The display window portions 21L, 21M, 21R are made of a transparent or translucent material, and the inside of the slot machine 10 can be visually recognized through the display window portions 21L, 21M, 21R.

As shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, the inside of the housing 11 is divided into upper and lower parts by a partition plate 11a, and a reel unit 31 is attached to the upper part of the partition plate 11a. The reel unit 31 includes a left reel 32L, a middle reel 32M, and a right reel 32R, which are formed in a cylindrical shape, respectively. Each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is rotatably supported so that its central axis is the rotation axis of the reel 32L, 32M, 32R. The rotation axes of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are arranged on the same axis extending in a substantially horizontal direction, and the reels 32L, 32M, 32R correspond one-to-one with the display window portions 21L, 21M, 21R. There is. Therefore, a part of the surface of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is visible through the corresponding display window portions 21L, 21M, 21R, respectively. Further, when the reels 32L, 32M, 32R rotate in the forward direction, the surfaces of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are projected as if they are moving from top to bottom through the display window portions 21L, 21M, 21R.

As shown in FIG. 1, a start lever 41 operated to start rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is provided on the lower left side of the game panel 20. When the start lever 41 is operated while a game medium such as a medal or a virtual medal is bet, the reels 32L, 32M, 32R start to rotate all at once.

On the right side of the start lever 41, stop buttons 42, 43, 44 operated to individually stop the rotating reels 32L, 32M, 32R are provided. The stop buttons 42, 43, 44 are arranged directly below the display window portions 21L, 21M, 21R corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to be stopped, respectively. The stop buttons 42, 43, and 44 are in a state where they can be stopped after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of rotation of the left reel 32L.

The rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is started based on the operation of the start lever 41, and the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped based on the operation of the stop buttons 42, 43, 44, and the game medium. It corresponds to one game (game times) until the execution of various processes such as the granting of the reels and the management of the game state is completed.

On the lower right side of the display window portions 21L, 21M, 21R, a medal insertion slot 45 for inserting a medal as an investment value is provided. As shown in FIG. 2, the medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 45 are guided to the hopper device 53 when reception is permitted by the selector 52 provided on the back surface of the front door 12, and when reception is prohibited. The medal ejection port 58 provided at the lower part of the front surface of the front door 12 leads to the medal tray 59 (see FIG. 1). The hopper device 53 has a function of paying out the medals stored in the storage tank to the medal tray 59 through the medal discharge port 58 when a prize corresponding to the granting of the game medium is established on the effective line. There is.

Below the medal slot 45, as shown in FIG. 1, a return button 46 that is pressed when a medal inserted in the medal slot 45 is jammed in the selector 52 is provided. Further, on the lower left side of the display window portions 21L, 21M, 21R, a first credit insertion button 47 for inserting the maximum number of credited virtual medals that can be bet at one time, and two virtual medals at a time are inserted. A second credit insertion button 48 for inserting a virtual medal and a third credit insertion button 49 for inserting one virtual medal at a time are provided.

A checkout button 51 is provided on the left side of the start lever 41. That is, the slot machine 10 has a credit function of storing and storing surplus inserted medals and payout medals at the time of winning as virtual medals until the predetermined maximum value (50 medals) is reached. When the settlement button 51 is operated under the condition of being stored and stored, the virtual medal is paid out from the medal ejection port 58 as a real medal.

As shown in FIG. 2, a power supply device 54 is provided on the left side of the hopper device 53 inside the housing 11. The power supply device 54 has a power switch 55 that is operated when the power is turned on or off, a reset button 56 for resetting various states of the slot machine 10, and setting states of the slot machine 10 from "setting 1" to "setting 1". A setting key insertion hole 57 that is operated to change within the range of "setting 6" is provided.

Next, the symbols attached to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R will be described.

FIG. 4 shows a design arrangement of the left reel 32L, the middle reel 32M, and the right reel 32R. As shown in the figure, 20 symbols are arranged in a row on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. Further, the numbers are assigned from "0" to "19" corresponding to each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, and these numbers are in a state where the main control device 70 can be visually recognized from the display window portion 21L, 21M, 21R. It is a number for recognizing the symbol, and is not actually attached to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. However, in the following description, the number will be used.

The symbols include a "bell" symbol (for example, the 19th of the left reel 32L), a "watermelon" symbol (for example, the 18th of the left reel 32L), a "cherry" symbol (for example, the 17th of the left reel 32L), and " "Replay" symbol (eg, 16th on the left reel 32L), "BAR" symbol (eg, 15th on the left reel 32L), "LUCKY" symbol (eg, 13th on the left reel 32L), "Red 7" symbol (eg, 13th on the left reel 32L) For example, there are eight types: the 12th of the left reel 32L) and the "white 7" symbol (for example, the 10th of the left reel 32L). And, as shown in FIG. 4, the number and arrangement order of various symbols are completely different in each reel 32L, 32M, 32R.

FIG. 5 is a front view of the display window portions 21L, 21M, 21R. Each display window portion 21L, 21M, 21R is formed so that three of the 20 symbols attached to the corresponding reels 32L, 32M, 32R can be visually recognized. Therefore, when each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped, 3 × 3 = 9 symbols can be visually recognized via the display window portion 21L, 21M, 21R.

In the slot machine 10, one main line ML is set so as to connect the positions where the symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R can be visually recognized. The main line ML is a line connecting the middle symbol of the left reel 32L, the middle symbol of the middle reel 32M, and the middle symbol of the right reel 32R. When the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is started with the specified number of game media bet, and the winning combination corresponding to the winning combination is established on the main line ML, the profit of granting the game medium, Either the benefit of replaying or the transition of the gaming state is granted.

That is, in the slot machine 10, only one main line ML is set as a line on which a prize can be established. The main line ML is set as a line extending in a straight line. Therefore, the subline SL1 connecting the upper symbol of the left reel 32L, the middle symbol of the middle reel 32M and the lower symbol of the right reel 32R, and the upper symbol of the left reel 32L, the upper symbol of the middle reel 32M and the upper symbol of the right reel 32R are combined. Subline SL3 connecting the connected subline SL2 and the lower symbol of the left reel 32L, the lower symbol of the middle reel 32M and the lower symbol of the right reel 32R, and the lower symbol of the left reel 32L, the middle symbol of the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R. Even if a combination of symbols to be won is established on a line extending in a straight line such as the sub line SL4 connecting the upper symbols, the prize is not established.

Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 6, the correspondence relationship between the combination of the symbols to be won and the privilege given when the prize is won will be described. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the correspondence between the combination of the symbols to be won and the privilege given when the prize is won.

Small winning prizes for which game media are given include bell winning, watermelon winning, and cherry winning. Specifically, on the main line ML, the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is the "bell" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "bell" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is the "bell" symbol. If so, you will win a bell. If the bell is won, the number of game media to be granted will be "11". If the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is the "watermelon" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "watermelon" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is the "watermelon" symbol on the main line ML, the watermelon wins. Will be. If the watermelon wins, the number of game media to be granted will be "7". When the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is the "cherry" symbol on the main line ML, the cherry prize is won regardless of whether the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M or the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is. In the case of a cherry prize, the number of game media to be granted is "2".

There are a normal replay prize, a first promotion replay prize, and a second promotion replay prize as prizes to which the privilege of the re-game that enables the game of the next game to be played without betting the game medium is given. Specifically, on the main line ML, the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is the "replay" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "replay" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is the "replay" symbol. In that case, it is usually a replay prize. When the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is the "bell" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "replay" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is the "replay" symbol on the main line ML, or the main. When the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is the "replay" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "replay" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is the "bell" symbol on the line ML, the first promotion is made. It will be a replay prize. When the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is the "replay" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "bell" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is the "replay" symbol on the main line ML, or the main. If the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is the "bell" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "replay" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is the "bell" symbol on the line ML, the second promotion is made. It will be a replay prize.

If any of the above replay prizes are won, the privilege of replay that enables the next game to be played while eliminating the need for betting on the game medium is granted. Specifically, if any of the replay prizes is won in the game in which the game medium of "3" is bet, the bet of the game medium is not required, and the game medium of "3" is bet in the next game. It becomes possible to start the game.

Of the various replay prizes described above, the first promotion replay prize and the second promotion replay prize not only trigger the granting of the replay prize privilege, but also the transition to the gaming state. Specifically, when the first promotion replay prize is established in the first preparation state ST4, the game state is in the second preparation state ST5 where the winning probability of the winning combination that can establish the replay prize is higher than that in the first preparation state ST4. The game state shifts to the RT state ST6 in which the winning probability of the winning combination in which the replay winning can be established is higher than that in the second preparing state ST5 when the second promotion replay winning is established in the second preparing state ST5. The contents of each of these gaming states will be described later.

There are a first BB prize, a second BB prize, and an SB prize as state transition prizes in which only the transition of the gaming state is performed. Specifically, on the main line ML, the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is the "red 7" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "red 7" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is the "red 7" symbol. If it is a symbol, it will be the first BB prize. When the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is the "white 7" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "white 7" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is the "white 7" symbol on the main line ML. , The second BB prize. If the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is the "LUCKY" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "BAR" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is the "BAR" symbol on the main line ML, the SB prize is won. Will be.

When the first BB prize or the second BB prize is established, the gaming state shifts to the BB state ST2. The BB state ST2 is a game state in which the expected number of game media to be granted per unit game number is higher than that in the game states other than the BB state ST2. Specifically, the winning combination that enables the winning of the bell is won with a higher probability (for example, about 1 / 1.5) than in other gaming states, and if the winning combination is won, each reel 32L , 32M, 32R, and the stop operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44 with respect to the rotation position of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, the bell winning is established regardless of the stop operation timing. The BB state ST2 continues over a plurality of games, and ends when the end condition is satisfied based on the occurrence of an event according to the execution content of the game. The end condition is arbitrary, but in this slot machine 10, it is set as an end condition that the total number of game media given after the BB state ST2 is started is equal to or more than the end reference number (for example, "350"). ing. As the BB state ST2, there are a first BB state that shifts when the first BB prize is established and a second BB state that shifts when the second BB prize is established. The difference between the first BB state and the second BB state will be described later.

When the SB winning is established, the gaming state shifts to the SB state. The SB state is the normal state ST1 in which the RAM 74 of the main control device 70, which will be described later, stays when the RAM 74 is initialized, and the replay winning is established although the expected degree of granting the game medium per unit game number is the same. This is a gaming state in which the probability is slightly higher than that in the normal state ST1. Specifically, in the normal state ST1, the probability that the replay winning is established is about 1 / 7.3, whereas in the SB state, the probability that the replay winning is established is about 1 / 7.1. That is, the SB state is a gaming state in which the advantage of the player is substantially the same as that of the normal state ST1. The SB state ends in one game. Although the details will be described later, the transition of the game section or the gaming state occurs when the SB combination is won or the transition to the SB state occurs.

Next, a device for executing various notifications and various effects will be described.

As shown in FIG. 1, an upper lamp 61 and a speaker 62 are provided on the upper part of the front door 12, and an image display device 63 is provided. When an abnormality occurs in the slot machine 10, the upper lamp 61 is controlled to emit light in a manner corresponding to the abnormality and is controlled to emit light in a manner corresponding to the winning result. Further, the upper lamp 61 is controlled to emit light so as to perform a light emitting effect corresponding to the display effect in the image display device 63. The speakers 62 are provided as a pair on the left and right, and when an abnormality occurs in the slot machine 10, the sound output is controlled so that the sound or voice corresponding to the abnormality is output, and the sound or voice corresponding to the winning result is output. Sound output is controlled so that is output. Further, the speaker 62 is controlled in sound output so that the sound output effect corresponding to the display effect in the image display device 63 is performed.

The image display device 63 has a display surface and is configured as a liquid crystal display device provided with a liquid crystal display, but is not limited to the liquid crystal display device, such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT. It may be another display device having a display surface, or it may be a dot matrix display. When an abnormality occurs in the slot machine 10, the display is controlled so that the image corresponding to the abnormality is displayed on the display surface. Further, the image display device 63 is controlled to display an image corresponding to the winning result of the winning combination in the internal lottery and the winning result in each game on the display surface.

The game panel 20 of the front door 12 has a credit display unit 65 that displays the number of virtual medals stored and stored at a position below the display window units 21L, 21M, 21R, and is a target for a small winning combination. When the number of game media is displayed and the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is notified in the image display device 63, the combined display unit 66 and the display corresponding to the notified contents are displayed, and the game section is an advantageous section. There is provided an advantageous section display unit 67 in which the display corresponding to the above is performed. The credit display unit 65 is composed of a 7-segment display, and a monochromatic light emitting type LED such as green is used for each segment.

FIG. 7A is a front view of the common display area 68 provided with the combined display unit 66 and the advantageous section display unit 67. In the common display area 68, as shown in FIG. 7A, two 7-segment displays 66a and 66b are arranged side by side in the horizontal direction to provide a combined display unit 66 and one light emitting unit. The advantageous section display unit 67 and the like are aggregated.

If any of the small winning combination prizes (bell winning, watermelon winning, or cherry winning) corresponding to the grant of the game medium is established, the gaming medium corresponding to the small winning combination winning at the end of the game in which the small winning combination is established. The number of grants is displayed on the combined display unit 66. Specifically, when the bell prize is established, "1" is displayed on each of the left 7-segment display 66a and the right 7-segment display 66b, so that the game medium of "11" is given. Is notified. Further, when the watermelon prize is established, the 7-segment display 66a on the left side is hidden and "7" is displayed on the 7-segment display 66b on the right side, so that the game medium of "7" is given. Is notified. Further, when the cherry prize is established, the 7-segment display 66a on the left side is hidden and "2" is displayed on the 7-segment display 66b on the right side, so that the game medium of "2" is given. Is notified. On the other hand, even if a prize such as one of the replay prizes, one of the BB prizes, and the SB prize that is not given a game medium is established, the display corresponding to the prize is not performed on the combined display unit 66, and in this case. The 7-segment displays 66a and 66b are maintained in a hidden state. The display of the number of game media granted on the combined display unit 66 ends when the game medium is bet to start the next game of the game in which the display is performed, and each 7-segment display is displayed at the bet timing. The vessels 66a and 66b are hidden.

When the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is notified in the image display device 63, the information corresponding to the notified stop order is displayed on the combined display unit 66. FIG. 7B is an explanatory diagram for explaining the content of the information corresponding to the stop order displayed on the combined display unit 66. As shown in FIG. 7B, in the slot machine 10, the first stop is the left reel 32L and the second stop is the middle reel as the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R notified by the image display device 63. The stop order is 32M and the third stop is the right reel 32R, the stop order is the first stop is the left reel 32L, the second stop is the right reel 32R and the third stop is the middle reel 32M, and the first stop. Is the middle reel 32M and the second stop is the left reel 32L and the third stop is the right reel 32R, and the first stop is the middle reel 32M and the second stop is the right reel 32R and the third stop is. The stop order is the left reel 32L, the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the left reel 32L, the third stop is the middle reel 32M, and the first stop is the right reel 32R. There is a stop order in which the second stop is the middle reel 32M and the third stop is the left reel 32L.

The notification of the stop order in the image display device 63 may be executed when the winning combination including the first promotion replay winning data is won or when the winning combination including the second promotion replay winning data is won in the combination lottery process. Specifically, when the winning combination including the first promotion replay winning data is won, the first promotion is performed when the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped in the stop order corresponding to the current winning combination among the above stop orders. Replay winning is established. Then, when the first promotion replay prize is established, the gaming state shifts from the first preparation state ST4 to the second preparation state ST5, which is more advantageous to the player than the first preparation state ST4. In addition, when a winning combination including the second promotion replay winning data is won, the second promotion replay winning is won when the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped in the stop order corresponding to the current winning combination among the above stop orders. To establish. Then, when the second promotion replay prize is established, the gaming state shifts from the second preparation state ST5 to the RT state ST6 which is more advantageous to the player than the second preparation state ST5.

When any of the above stop orders is notified by the image display device 63, the left 7-segment display 66a in the combined display unit 66 is maintained in a hidden state, while the right 7-segment display 66b is maintained. Is displayed according to the stop order of the notification target. This display content is as shown in FIG. 7B, and the display content of the stop order of the dual-purpose display unit 66 is set to correspond one-to-one with the notification content of the stop order in the image display device 63. .. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a configuration in which a plurality of types of display contents of the combined display unit 66 are set to correspond to a part or all of the notification contents of the stop order in the image display device 63. May be good.

The display content of the stop order on the combined display unit 66 is different from the display content to be displayed when the display corresponding to the addition of the game medium is performed on the combined display unit 66. This makes it easy to distinguish whether the content displayed on the combined display unit 66 corresponds to the number of game media to be added or to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R.

8 (a) and 8 (b) are explanatory views for explaining the relationship between the notification content of the stop order in the image display device 63 and the display content of the stop order in the combined display unit 66.

When the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is notified in the image display device 63, as shown in FIG. 8A, the image display device 63 has the same number of stop operations required to end the game. The unit display images G1 to G3 are displayed, and the image display corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is performed in each unit display image G1 to G3. Specifically, the left unit display image G1 corresponding to the left reel 32L, the middle unit display image G2 corresponding to the middle reel 32M, and the right unit display image G3 corresponding to the right reel 32R are displayed. Further, in FIG. 8A, the stop order is notified when the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the right reel 32R. , The image of "2" corresponding to the stop order of the left reel 32L is displayed on the left unit display image G1, and the image of "1" corresponding to the stop order of the middle reel 32M is displayed on the middle unit display image G2. , The image of "3" corresponding to the stop order of the right reel 32R is displayed on the right unit display image G3.

In the image display device 63, an image notifying the stop order itself of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is displayed as described above, whereas in the combined display unit 66, as shown in FIG. 8B, the reel is displayed. "L" corresponding to the stop order of 32L, 32M, 32R is displayed. That is, in the image display device 63, the unit display images G1 to G3 corresponding to the number of reels 32L, 32M, 32R are displayed, and the reels 32L, 32M, 32R corresponding to each unit display image G1 to G3 are stopped in the stop order. While the corresponding image display is performed, the combined display unit 66 displays a display irrelevant to the number of reels 32L, 32M, 32R. As a result, even if the display corresponding to the notification content of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is performed on the combined display unit 66, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the display content on the image display device 63.

The display range of the combined display unit 66 is narrower than the display range of the image display device 63. From this point as well, it is possible to reduce the player's attention to the combined display unit 66 as compared with the image display device 63. Further, the combined display unit 66 exists on the side opposite to the image display device 63 side with the display window units 21L, 21M, 21R that make the reels 32L, 32M, 32R visible. As a result, the combined display unit 66 is arranged at a position separated from the image display device 63, which also makes it possible to reduce the player's attention to the combined display unit 66.

When the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is notified, the display corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R on the combined display unit 66 and the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R on the image display device 63 are supported. The display is started after the winning combination lottery process is performed and before the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is activated. In this case, the display corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the combined display unit 66 is started before the display corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the image display device 63. However, these displays may be started at the same time or substantially at the same time, and the display start order may be reversed. Further, the display corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the combined display unit 66 and the image display device 63 is a stop command for all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the game to which the display is executed. Is terminated when occurs.

The combined display unit 66 is arranged on the center side in the common display area 68, while the advantageous section display unit 67 is arranged on the corner side of the common display area 68. The advantageous section display unit 67 is a display unit for notifying that the game section is an advantageous section among the normal section and the advantageous section. The advantageous section is the stop of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, which enables the player to establish an advantageous prize when the winning combination to be established is different according to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. It is a section corresponding to either a section in which the order is notified or a section in which the transition probability to the RT state ST6, which is an advantageous gaming state for the player, is higher than the normal section. On the other hand, the normal section is the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enable the player to establish a winning prize that is advantageous to the player when the winning combination to be established is different depending on the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. This is a section in which the stop order of is not notified, and the probability of transition to the RT state ST6, which is an advantageous gaming state for the player, is lower than the advantageous section. As will be described in detail later, in this slot machine 10, the normal state ST1, the BB state ST2, the post-bonus state ST3, the first preparation state ST4, the second preparation state ST5, and the RT state ST6 are as gaming states. Existing. Each of these gaming states can stay in the normal section and can stay in the advantageous section. Then, regardless of the gaming state, the progress of the game differs depending on whether the gaming section stays in the normal section or the advantageous section.

When the condition for shifting to the advantageous section is satisfied in the normal section and the section shifts to the advantageous section, the advantageous section display unit 67 is turned on to start notifying that the section is advantageous. Further, when the transition condition to the normal section is satisfied in the advantageous section and the transition to the normal section is established, the advantageous section display unit 67 is turned off to end the notification that the section is advantageous. This makes it possible to notify the manager of the game hall or the like that the section is advantageous. Further, the combined display unit 66 provided collectively in the common display area 68 is turned on when the game medium is added and turned off at the start of the next game, and the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are turned off. When the stop order of is displayed on the image display device 63, it is turned on and turned off at the end of the game. Therefore, in a configuration in which the advantageous section display unit 67 is arranged in the common display area 68 so as not to be too conspicuous for the player, the advantageous section display unit in the common display area 68 is in a situation where the advantageous section is an advantageous section. It is possible to positively cause a situation in which only 67 is lit, and it is possible to facilitate confirmation of the advantageous section display unit 67 for the manager of the game hall. In the advantageous section, instead of the configuration in which the lighting state of the advantageous section display unit 67 is maintained, in the advantageous section, the advantageous section display unit 67 may perform blinking display at a predetermined cycle. Further, other display devices such as a liquid crystal display device may be used as the combined display unit 66 and the advantageous section display unit 67.

The slot machine 10 is provided with various control devices. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 2, a main control device 70 is provided above the reel unit 31. The main control device 70 is attached to a back plate 11b that raises the back surface portion of the housing 11. The main control device 70 is configured such that the main control board 71 is housed in the board box 81.

As shown in FIG. 3, the MPU 72 is mounted on the element mounting surface, which is one of the plate surfaces of the main control board 71. The substrate box 81 is transparently formed so that the MPU 72 housed in the substrate box 81 can be visually recognized from the outside of the substrate box 81. Although the substrate box 81 is formed to be colorless and transparent, it may be formed to be colored and transparent as long as the MPU 72 housed in the substrate box 81 can be visually recognized from the outside of the substrate box 81. The main control device 70 is mounted on the back plate 11b of the housing 11 so that the facing wall portion 82 facing the element mounting surface of the main control board 71 faces the front of the slot machine 10 in the board box 81. Therefore, by opening the front door 12 to the front of the slot machine 10 with respect to the housing 11 to expose the internal space of the housing 11, the facing wall portion 82 of the board box 81 can be visually recognized. It becomes possible to visually check the MPU 72 through the facing wall portion 82.

The substrate box 81 is formed by combining a plurality of case bodies in the front-rear direction, and the plurality of case bodies are for preventing the separation of the case bodies and leaving a trace thereof when the case bodies are separated. A connecting portion 83 is provided. A plurality of connecting portions 83 are arranged side by side on one side of the substrate box 81 having a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape. As a result, even if the case body is separated by destroying the part of the joint portion 83 in a state where the separation of the case body is prevented by using a part of the joint portion 83, another joint portion 83 is subsequently separated. It is possible to prevent the separation of the case body again by putting the case in a bonded state. In addition, when the case body is separated, the joint portion 83 is destroyed and its trace remains, so that it is possible to grasp whether or not the case body is illegally separated by visually checking the joint portion 83. Become. Further, in the substrate box 81, a sealing seal 84 is attached so as to straddle the boundary between the case bodies on one side different from the one side on which the connecting portions 83 are arranged side by side. When the seal 84 is peeled off, an adhesive layer remains on the case body. As a result, when the seal seal 84 is peeled off when the case body is separated, it is possible to leave a trace thereof.

In the main control device 70 having the above configuration, the main control board 71 is provided with a plurality of notification display devices 85 to 87. Specifically, a first notification display device 85, a second notification display device 86, and a third notification display device 87 are provided. The first to third notification display devices 85 to 87 are all segment display devices in which seven LED display segments are arranged, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a single multicolor light emitting type display device is used. It may be a light emitter, a liquid crystal display device, or an organic EL display. The first to third notification display devices 85 to 87 are installed so that their display surfaces face the same direction as the element mounting surface of the main control board 71. This makes it possible to visually check the display surface of the first to third notification display devices 85 to 87 housed in the board box 81 from the outside of the board box 81. Further, as described above, the main control device 70 is mounted on the back plate 11b of the housing 11 so that the facing wall portion 82 facing the element mounting surface of the main control board 71 faces the front of the slot machine 10 in the board box 81. Therefore, when the front door 12 is opened to the front of the slot machine 10 with respect to the housing 11 to expose the internal space of the housing 11 to the front of the slot machine 10, the first to first doors are passed through the facing wall portion 82. 3 It becomes possible to visually check the notification display devices 85 to 87. The management result of the game history is notified by using the first to third notification display devices 85 to 87. This will be described in detail later.

The visual confirmation of the main control device 70 is performed by opening the front door 12 in front of the slot machine 10 with respect to the housing 11. Lighting devices 88a and 88b are provided in the housing 11 in order to improve the visibility of the visual confirmation of the main control device 70 performed by opening the front door 12. The lighting devices 88a and 88b are provided on the back surface of the left side plate 11c and the back surface of the right side plate 11d of the housing 11 so as to form a pair on the left and right sides. The lighting devices 88a and 88b are provided with a high-brightness LED as a light emitting body, and are installed so that the irradiation direction of the light is the main control device 70. The light irradiation range IR by the lighting devices 88a and 88b includes a range facing the MPU 72 in the facing wall portion 82 of the main control device 70. This makes it possible to improve the visibility of the MPU 72. Further, the irradiation range IR includes a range facing the first to third notification display devices 85 to 87 on the facing wall portion 82 of the main control device 70. This makes it possible to improve the visibility of the first to third notification display devices 85 to 87. Further, the irradiation range IR includes a range in which the coupling portion 83 is provided and a range in which the sealing seal 84 is provided in the substrate box 81 of the main control device 70. This makes it possible to improve the visibility of the joint portion 83 and the sealing seal 84.

The irradiation of light from the lighting devices 88a and 88b is performed according to the opening angle of the front door 12 with respect to the housing 11, although the details will be described later. In order to detect the opening angle of the front door 12, an opening angle sensor 89 is provided on the back surface of the front door 12 at a position adjacent to the shaft portion 12a as shown in FIG. The opening angle sensor 89 can detect whether or not the front door 12 is closed with respect to the housing 11, and when the front door 12 is open, the opening angle is a predetermined opening angle. It is possible to detect whether or not it exceeds. The method of detecting the opening angle of the front door 12 by the opening angle sensor 89 is arbitrary, but for example, when the front door 12 is in the closed state, it is in the pressed state and the front door 12 is in the open state. The detection unit that releases the pressed state and the detection unit that does not enter the pressed state until the opening angle of the front door 12 exceeds the predetermined opening angle to enter the pressing state and the opening angle of the front door 12 reaches the predetermined opening angle. A configuration having each of and is conceivable.

The slot machine 10 is provided with an effect control device 90 in addition to the main control device 70. The effect control device 90 is arranged on the front door 12 so as to be overlapped behind the image display device 63. The effect control device 90 executes control of the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 based on the command received from the main control device 70. In the effect control device 90, the control board is housed in the board box as in the main control device 70.

Next, the electrical configuration of the slot machine 10 will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG.

As described above, the MPU 72 is mounted on the main control board 71 of the main control device 70. The MPU 72 is a ROM 73 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 72, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 73 is executed. A RAM 74, a clock circuit that outputs a rectangular wave having a predetermined frequency, an interrupt circuit, a data input / output circuit, a random number generation circuit, and the like are built-in. It is not essential that the ROM 73 and the RAM 74 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 72, and each may be individually chipped.

The MPU 72 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. On the input side of the MPU 72, a reel unit 31, a start detection sensor 41a for detecting the operation of the start lever 41, stop detection sensors 42a, 43a, 44a for individually detecting the operation of each stop button 42, 43, 44, and a medal insertion The insertion medal detection sensor 45a that detects the medals inserted from the mouth 45, the credit insertion detection sensors 47a, 48a, 49a that individually detect the operation of each credit insertion button 47, 48, 49, and the operation of the settlement button 51 are detected. Settlement detection sensor 51a, payout detection sensor of hopper device 53, reset detection sensor that detects the operation of the reset button 56 provided in the power supply device 54, and setting key that detects that the setting key has been inserted into the setting key insertion hole 57. Various sensors such as a detection sensor and an opening angle sensor 89 are connected, and signals from each of these sensors are input to the MPU 72.

On the output side of the MPU 72, the reel unit 31, the selector drive unit 52a provided in the selector 52, the payout motor of the hopper device 53, the combined display unit 66, the advantageous section display unit 67, and the first to third notification display devices 85. -87, lighting devices 88a, 88b, effect control device 90, and the like are connected. In each game, the rotation drive control of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R of the reel unit 31 is performed by the MPU 72. The selector 52 detects the medal inserted from the medal insertion slot 45 by the insertion medal detection sensor 45a when acceptance is permitted, and then guides the medal to the hopper device 53, and when reception is prohibited, the selector 52 is guided to the insertion medal detection sensor 45a. It has a function of discharging to the medal tray 59 without detecting the medal. The selector drive unit 52a has a function for switching the state of the selector 52 between the reception permission state and the reception prohibition state. Specifically, the passage switching piece provided in the selector 52 is positioned for reception permission. And operate between the reception prohibited position. The MPU 72 switches the state of the selector 52 between the acceptance permitted state and the acceptance prohibited state by switching the output state and the stop state of the drive signal to the selector drive unit 52a.

Further, the MPU 72 executes the drive control of the hopper device 53 when the small winning combination is established and the medal is paid out. Further, the MPU 72 displays and controls the combined display unit 66 so that when the game medium is given, the number of the game media to be given is displayed. Further, the MPU 72 displays and controls the advantageous section display unit 67 so that the advantageous section is notified when the section is advantageous. Further, the MPU 72 controls the display of the notification display devices 85 to 87 so that the display corresponding to the management result of the game is performed. Further, the MPU 72 controls the light emission of the lighting devices 88a and 88b based on the detection result of the opening angle sensor 89. Further, the MPU 72 transmits a command to the effect control device 90 at each timing of each game, and also transmits a command to notify the effect control device 90 of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the image display device 63. In that case, the display control of the combined display unit 66 is executed so that the display corresponding to the content to be notified is performed. In this case, the direct display control of the image display device 63 is performed by the effect control device 90, while the direct display control of the combined display unit 66 is performed by the MPU 72. That is, for the image display device 63 that is the execution target of the relatively complicated display control, the direct display control is executed by the effect control device 90, and the combined display unit 66 that is the execution target of the relatively simple display control. The direct display control is executed in the MPU 72. This makes it possible to perform both a display that emphasizes the improvement of attention to the effect and a display that emphasizes reliability while reducing the processing load of the MPU 72.

A power failure monitoring circuit provided in the power supply device 54 is connected to the input side of the MPU 72 (not shown). The power supply device 54 is equipped with a power supply unit that supplies drive power to each electronic device of the slot machine 10 including the main control device 70, and a power failure monitoring circuit. The power failure monitoring circuit is applied from an external power source to the power supply unit. The voltage is monitored, and when the voltage becomes equal to or lower than the reference voltage, a power failure signal is output to the MPU 72. The MPU 72 executes the power failure processing by receiving the power failure signal, and makes it possible to return to the processing state before the power failure after the power is restored. Further, the power supply device 54 is provided with a power supply unit during power failure to supply backup power to the RAM 74 as power during power failure in a situation where the supply of operating power from an external power source is cut off. As a result, even if the supply of operating power from the external power supply is cut off, the data is stored and retained in the RAM 74 in a situation where backup power can be supplied in the power supply unit during power failure (for example, 1 day or 2 days). Will be done. However, the data stored and held in the RAM 74 is initialized by turning on the power of the slot machine 10 while pressing the reset button 56 provided on the power supply device 54.

The effect control device 90 includes an effect control board 91 for controlling various notifications and execution of various effects. The MPU 92 is mounted on the effect control board 91. The MPU 92 is a memory for temporarily storing various control programs executed by the MPU 92, a ROM 93 storing fixed value data, and various data when the control program stored in the ROM 93 is executed. A RAM 94 is built in, and a clock circuit, an interrupt circuit, a data input / output circuit, a random number generation circuit, and the like that output a rectangular wave of a predetermined frequency are built in.

It is not essential that the ROM 93 and the RAM 94 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 92, and each may be individually chipped. Further, the RAM 94 is configured such that the backup power is not supplied from the power supply unit during the power failure of the power supply device 54 when the supply of the operating power from the external power supply is cut off, but the backup power is supplied to the RAM 94. May be good.

The MPU 92 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. As described above, the MPU 72 of the main control device 70 is connected to the input side of the MPU 92, and various commands are received from the MPU 72. An upper lamp 61, a speaker 62, and an image display device 63 are connected to the output side of the MPU 92. The MPU 92 performs various notifications and various effects by executing light emission control of the upper lamp 61, sound output control of the speaker 62, and display control of the image display device 63 based on the command received from the MPU 72 of the main control device 70. To be done.

Although not shown, the effect control board 91 is equipped with a video display processor (VDP), a character ROM, a video RAM, and the like, in addition to the MPU 92. The VDP is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver incorporated in the image display device 63. The VDP intervenes in reading and writing data in the video RAM, and at the same time, reads the image data stored in the video RAM from the character ROM at a predetermined timing and displays it on the image display device 63. The character ROM plays a role as an image data library for storing character data such as a symbol displayed on the image display device 63. The character ROM holds bitmap format image data of various display symbols, a color palette table to be referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image, and the like. The video RAM is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the image display device 63. When the MPU 92 determines the execution content of the effect based on the command received from the MPU 72 of the main control device 70, the MPU 92 sets the VDP as a drawing list instructing the content of the image corresponding to each update timing according to the execution content of the determined effect. Output. The VDP reads image data from the character ROM according to the drawing list, and creates display data in the video RAM using the read image data. Then, the VDP outputs the image signal corresponding to the created display data to the image display device 63, so that the image display device 63 displays the image corresponding to the display data.

In the following description, for convenience of explanation, the MPU 72, ROM 73, and RAM 74 of the main control device 70 are referred to as the main MPU 72, the main ROM 73, and the main RAM 74, respectively, and the MPU 92, ROM 93, and RAM 94 of the effect control device 90 are referred to as the effect side, respectively. It is referred to as MPU 92, directing side ROM 93 and directing side RAM 94.

Next, the process executed by the main MPU 72 will be described. First, the main process executed by the main MPU 72 when the supply of the operating power to the main MPU 72 is started will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the main process, the initialization process is first executed (step S101). In the initialization process, interrupts by timer interrupt processing are permitted, and various initial settings are made for the register group in the main MPU 72, the I / O device, and the like. After the initialization process is completed, the display start process is executed (step S102). In the display start processing, the display on the first to third notification display devices 85 to 87 is started. In this case, if the main RAM 74 stores information on the management result of the game history immediately before the previous power failure, the first to third notification display devices 85 to display the information corresponding to the information. The display control of 87 is executed. On the other hand, if the main RAM 74 does not store the information on the management result of the game history immediately before the previous power failure, or if the regular information is not stored as the information, a predetermined initial display (for example, all lighting) is performed. ) Is performed, the display control of the first to third notification display devices 85 to 87 is executed. The processing for managing the game history and the display contents of the first to third notification display devices 85 to 87 will be described in detail later.

After that, it is determined whether or not the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole 57 and the power is turned on (step S103). If the power is turned on with the setting key inserted (step S103: YES), and if the reset button 56 is not turned on when the power is turned on (step S104: NO), the winning probability is as it is. The setting process is executed (step S106). On the other hand, if the reset button 56 is turned on when the power is turned on (step S104: YES), the winning probability setting process is executed after the clear process (step S105) is executed (step S106).

In the clear process, the entire area in the main RAM 74 is initialized. In this case, the area in which the set value of the slot machine 10 is stored in the main RAM 74, the area in which the data indicating whether or not the BB state is ST2 is stored, and the data indicating the total number of gaming media in the BB state ST2 are stored. Area, area where data indicating the game state is stored, area where data for specifying the end condition of RT state ST6 is stored, area where data indicating the game section is stored, management result of the game history Clear each area of the main RAM 74 including the area where the data is stored by "0". As a result, when the clearing process is executed, the normal state ST1 is set regardless of the state before the power is cut off, and the normal section is set. If it is in a regulated state, the abnormal state is canceled.

In the winning probability setting process, the current setting value is read on condition that the setting key is inserted and the ON operation is performed, and the current setting value is displayed on the credit display unit 65. When the clearing process (step S105) of the main RAM 74 is executed, the credit display unit 65 is displayed corresponding to "setting 1" at the start of the winning probability setting process, and the clearing process (step S105) is performed. If is not executed, the display corresponding to the set value in the state before the power is cut off is displayed. In the winning probability setting process, the set value is updated by 1 each time the reset button 56 is operated, and the updated set value is displayed on the credit display unit 65. If the reset button 56 is operated while the set value is "setting 6", the set value is updated to "setting 1". When the ON operation of the setting key is canceled after the start lever 41 is operated, the winning probability setting process is terminated. In this case, the display of the set value on the credit display unit 65 ends.

After executing the winning probability setting process, the initialization process of the advantageous section is executed (step S107). In the advantageous section initialization process, a process for initializing information about the advantageous section is executed. As a result, when the winning probability setting process is executed, the game section is surely set to the normal section. The specific processing contents of the initialization processing of the advantageous section will be described later. After executing the initialization process of the advantageous section, the process proceeds to the normal process (step S108). The normal processing will be described in detail later.

If the setting key is not turned on in the main process (step S103: NO), the power recovery process after step S109 is executed. The power recovery process is a process for returning the state of the slot machine 10 to the state before the power is cut off. In the power recovery process, it is determined whether or not the set value of the slot machine 10 is normal by checking the main RAM 74 (step S109). Specifically, when the set value is any one of "setting 1" to "setting 6", it is determined to be normal, and when it is "0" or "7" or more, it is determined to be abnormal. If the set value is normal, it is confirmed whether or not "1" is set in the power failure flag (step S110). The power failure flag is provided in the main RAM 74, and when the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 is stopped and the predetermined power failure processing is normally executed, the power failure flag is set to "1". Will be set. When "1" is set in the power failure flag, it is confirmed whether or not the RAM determination value is normal (step S111). Specifically, the checksum value of the main RAM 74 is checked, and it is confirmed whether or not the value is normal.

If an affirmative judgment is made in all of steps S109 to S111, it means that the power failure processing at the time of the previous power failure was normally executed. In this case, the value of the stack pointer stored in the main RAM 74 is written to the stack pointer of the main MPU 72, and the data saved in the main RAM 74 is returned to the register of the main MPU 72, so that the register of the main MPU 72 The state is returned to the state before the power was cut off (step S112). Further, the power failure flag of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S113). After that, after transmitting a power recovery command for recognizing the execution of the power recovery process to the effector MPU 92 (step S114), the process returns to the address before the power is cut off (step S115).

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in any of steps S109 to S111, the operation prohibition process is executed. In the operation prohibition process, the execution of the next timer interrupt process (FIG. 11) is prohibited (step S116), and all the output ports of the main MPU 72 are cleared to "0" so that all the actuators connected to the output ports are connected. Is set to the OFF state (step S117), and an error notification process for notifying the hall manager and the like of the occurrence of an error is executed (step S118). And it becomes an infinite loop. The operation prohibition process is canceled by executing the clear process (step S105).

Next, the timer interrupt process executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The timer interrupt process is started every 1.49 msec, for example.

In the register save process (step S201), the values of all the registers in the main MPU 72 used in the normal process described later are saved in the main RAM 74. In step S202, it is confirmed whether or not "1" is set in the power failure flag, and if "1" is set in the power failure flag, the process proceeds to step S203 to execute the power failure processing.

The power failure flag is set when a power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit of the power supply device 54 is input to the main MPU 72. In the power failure processing, it is first determined whether or not the command transmission is completed, and if the transmission is not completed, the main processing is terminated and the timer interrupt processing is restored, and the command transmission is terminated. When the transmission of the command is completed, the value of the stack pointer of the main MPU 72 is saved in the main RAM 74. After that, the output state of the output port of the main MPU 72 is cleared, and all actuators (not shown) are turned off. Then, when the power failure is resolved, a determination value for determining whether or not the data in the main RAM 74 is normal is calculated and stored in the main RAM 74, and subsequent RAM access is prohibited. After performing the above processing, an infinite loop is entered in preparation for the fact that the power supply is completely cut off and the processing cannot be executed.

If "1" is not set in the power failure flag in step S202, various processes after step S204 are performed. In step S204, the watchdog timer clearing process for initializing the value of the watchdog timer for monitoring the occurrence of a malfunction is performed. In step S205, an interrupt end declaration process is performed so that the next timer interrupt can be set for the main MPU 72 itself. In step S206, in order to rotate each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, a stepping motor control process for driving a stepping motor provided on each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is performed. In step S207, the states of various sensors connected to the input port are read, and a sensor monitoring process for monitoring whether or not the read result is normal is performed.

In step S208, a timer calculation process for subtracting the values of each counter and timer is performed. In step S209, counter processing is performed to output the result of counting the number of bets on medals and the number of payouts to the outside. In step S210, a command output process for transmitting various commands to the effect side MPU 92 is performed. In step S211 a port output process for outputting data corresponding to the I / O device from the input / output port is performed. In step S212, the value of each register saved in the main RAM 74 in the previous step S201 is returned to the corresponding register in the main MPU 72. In step S213, a management process for managing the game history and displaying the contents corresponding to the management results on the first to third notification display devices 85 to 87 is executed. In step S214, a lighting process for controlling light emission of the lighting devices 88a and 88b is executed according to the opening angle of the front door 12. After that, in step S215, an interrupt enable process for permitting the next timer interrupt is performed, and this series of timer interrupt processes is terminated. The details of the management process in step S213 and the lighting process in step S214 will be described later.

Next, the normal processing executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, an interrupt enable process for permitting the next timer interrupt is performed (step S301). After that, the start waiting process is executed (step S302). In the start waiting process, it is determined whether or not any replay winning has occurred in the previous game. If any of the replay winnings has occurred, the replay process for setting the same number of bets as the previous bet number is performed, and the start waiting process is terminated. If none of the replay prizes have occurred, it is determined whether or not the settlement button 51 has been operated, and if the settlement button 51 is operated, the same number of medals as the credited virtual medals are paid out. Process the medal return. Whether or not the medal insertion or credit insertion buttons 47 to 49 have been operated between the previous start waiting process and the current start waiting process after the medal return process is completed or the settlement button 51 is not operated. If any of these is performed, a medal insertion process for changing the number of bets is performed, and the start waiting process is terminated. If neither the medal insertion nor the operation of the credit insertion buttons 47 to 49 is performed between the previous start waiting process and the current start waiting process, the start waiting process is terminated as it is.

After executing the process of waiting for the start of step S302, it is determined whether or not the number of medals bets has reached the specified number (“3” in this embodiment) (step S303), and the number of bets has not reached the specified number. Return to the start waiting process (step S302). When the number of bets has reached the specified number, it is determined whether or not the start lever 41 has been operated (step S304). If the start lever 41 is not operated, the process returns to the start waiting process (step S302). On the other hand, when the start lever 41 is operated, the reception prohibition process is executed after the main line ML is activated (step S305). By executing the acceptance prohibition process, even if a medal is inserted into the medal insertion slot 45, the medal is not detected by the insertion medal detection sensor 45a and is ejected to the medal tray 59. After that, the winning combination lottery process for drawing the winning combination in the current game is executed (step S306), and the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are driven and controlled in a manner corresponding to the result of the winning combination lottery process. (Step S307).

After that, the medium addition process is executed (step S308). In the medium granting process, when a small winning combination is established in this game, a process for granting a player a number of game media corresponding to the small winning combination is executed. Specifically, when a virtual medal is awarded, the value corresponding to this small winning combination is added to the credit counter provided in the main RAM 74, and the value of the credit counter reaches the upper limit storage number. Drives and controls the hopper device 53 so that a number of medals exceeding the upper limit storage number are paid out to the medal tray 59. Further, in the medium granting process, the display control of the combined display unit 66 is performed so that the display corresponding to the number of game media to be granted this time is performed. The display corresponding to the number of game media on the combined display unit 66 is continued until a new bet is made on the game medium.

After that, a corresponding process at the end of the game is executed to enable the setting of the game state and the game section corresponding to the result of the current game (step S309). Further, an external output setting process for outputting the state of the slot machine 10 to the management computer of the game hall is executed (step S310). Then, the reception permission process is executed (step S311). By executing the acceptance permission process, the medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 45 are collected by the hopper device 53 after being detected by the insertion medal detection sensor 45a.

The winning combination lottery process executed in step S306 of the normal process (FIG. 12) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, a random number used when determining whether or not a combination is correct is acquired (step S401). In this slot machine 10, when the start lever 41 is operated, the hard circuit is configured to latch the value of the free run counter at that time. The free run counter generates random numbers from 0 to 65535, and the main MPU 72 stores the value latched by the hard circuit in the main RAM 74 after confirming the operation of the start lever 41. With such a configuration, it is possible to quickly acquire random numbers at the timing when the start lever 41 is operated, and it is possible to avoid problems such as synchronization. The hard circuit of the slot machine 10 is configured to latch the value of the free run counter each time the start lever 41 is operated.

After acquiring the random numbers, the lottery table for determining the winning or failing of the winning combination is read from the data for specific control described later in the main ROM 73 (step S402). Here, in this slot machine 10, six stages of winning probabilities from "setting 1" to "setting 6" are prepared in advance, and a setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole 57 to perform an ON operation and a predetermined operation. By performing the above, it is possible to set which winning probability is used to execute the winning combination lottery process. The winning probability of "setting n + 1" is more advantageous for the player than "setting n". Specifically, since the winning probability of the winning combination that triggers the transition to the BB state ST2 is higher in "setting n + 1" than in "setting n", "setting n + 1" is more game than "setting n". It will be advantageous to the person. Further, even if the set values are set at the same stage, the lottery table to be referred to differs depending on the game state. In step S402, a lottery table corresponding to the combination of the current set value and the current gaming state is selected.

The lottery table corresponding to each of the normal state ST1 and the BB state ST2 (first BB state or second BB state) will be described by taking the case of "setting 3" as an example. First, the lottery table selected in the normal state ST1 will be described. FIG. 14A is an explanatory diagram for explaining a lottery table for a normal state.

As shown in FIG. 14A, an index value IV is set in the lottery table for the normal state, and winning data is set and a point value PV is set in each index value IV. There is. The point value PV determines the winning probability of the corresponding lottery combination in relation to the maximum value (“65535”) of the free run counter.

Specifically, the bell winning data is set for the index value IV = 1. If the winning is achieved with the index value IV = 1, the bell winning is surely established regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R and the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44 for the rotation positions of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. do.

In this slot machine 10, reel control capable of sliding up to four symbols after the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated is performed for each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. In other words, reel control for stopping the reels 32L, 32M, 32R until a predetermined time (190 msec) elapses after the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated is performed. By performing such reel control, it becomes possible to easily establish a prize corresponding to the winning combination, and it is possible to prevent the winning corresponding to the winning combination from being established. It becomes possible. However, since the amount of rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that can be slid is limited as described above, a combination of symbols for establishing a prize is configured in one reel 32L, 32M, 32R. If there are 5 or more symbols between the constituent symbols, it may happen that the constituent symbols do not stop on the main line ML depending on the operation timing of the corresponding stop buttons 42 to 44 (the event is also called "missing"). Say). Bell winning is a winning mode in which no omissions occur. In addition, the normal replay prize, the first promotion replay prize, and the second promotion replay prize are also missed regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44 with respect to the rotation positions of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. It is a winning mode that does not. On the other hand, the watermelon winning, cherry winning, first BB winning, second BB winning, and SB winning are winning modes in which the stop buttons 42 to 44 may be missed depending on the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44 with respect to the rotation positions of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

Watermelon winning data is set in the index value IV = 2. If the winning is achieved with the index value IV = 2, the watermelon winning can be established regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. However, depending on the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, there is a possibility that the watermelon winning will not be established.

Cherry winning data is set in the index value IV = 3. If the winning is achieved with the index value IV = 3, the cherry winning can be established regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. However, depending on the operation timing of the left stop button 42 with respect to the rotation position of the left reel 32L, there is a possibility that the cherry winning will not be established.

The first BB winning data is set in the index value IV = 4. If the winning is achieved with the index value IV = 4, the first BB prize can be established regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. However, depending on the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, the first BB prize may not be established. Further, the second BB winning data is set in the index value IV = 5. If the winning is achieved with the index value IV = 5, the second BB prize can be established regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. However, depending on the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, the second BB prize may not be established. Further, SB winning data is set in the index value IV = 6. If the winning is achieved with the index value IV = 6, the SB winning can be established regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. However, depending on the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, there is a possibility that the SB winning will not be established.

Here, the winning data other than the 1st BB winning data and the 2nd BB winning data, such as the watermelon winning data and the SB winning data, are deleted in the winning game regardless of whether or not the winning is established. It will not be carried over to the next and subsequent games. On the other hand, the first BB winning data and the second BB winning data correspond to the corresponding BB even in the next and subsequent games of the winning game, except when the clear processing (step S105) of the main RAM 74 is performed. The memory is retained until the prize is established. In this case, in the game in which the first BB winning data or the second BB winning data is carried over, the index value IV corresponding to the first BB winning data, the second BB winning data, and the SB winning data is excluded from the lottery target. This makes it possible to prevent the BB winning data and the SB winning data from being newly stored even though the first BB winning data or the second BB winning data is already stored and retained, and the BB winning data and the SB winning data and It is possible to prevent the SB winning data from being accumulated and stored.

Normal replay winning data is set in the index value IV = 7. If the winning is achieved with an index value IV = 7, the normal replay prize is surely won regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R and the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44 with respect to the rotation position of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. To establish.

When the lottery table for the normal state is selected, the probability of winning when the index value IV = 1 is about 1/7, and the probability of winning when the index value IV = 2 is about 1/77. Yes, the probability of winning when the index value IV = 3 is about 1/423, and the probability of winning when the index value IV = 4 and the probability of winning when the index value IV = 5 are Each is about 1/218, the probability of winning when the index value IV = 6 is 1/16, and the probability of winning when the index value IV = 7 is about 1 / 7.3.

Next, the lottery table selected in the case of the first BB state or in the case of "setting 3" and the second BB state will be described. FIG. 14B is an explanatory diagram for explaining a lottery table for a BB state.

In the lottery table for the BB state, as shown in FIG. 14B, bell winning data is set at the index value IV = 1 as in the lottery table for the normal state. However, the point value PV set to the index value IV = 1 is "44000", which is a larger value than in the case of the lottery table for the normal state. In this case, the probability of winning at the index value IV = 1 is about 1 / 1.5. When the winning is achieved with the index value IV = 1, the bell winning is established regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R and the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. In addition, the number of game media given when the bell prize is established is larger than the number of game media given when other small winning combination prizes are established. This makes it possible to increase the expected number of game media to be granted per unit game number in the BB state ST2 to be larger than in the normal state ST1.

The winning data set in each of the index values IV = 2 and 3 and the point value PV set in each index value IV become the same as the index values IV = 2 and 3 in the lottery table for the normal state. There is. Further, the index value IV = 4 is normally set to the replay winning data. The point value PV set to the index value IV = 4 is a value larger than the point value PV set to the index value IV = 7 in which the normal replay winning data is set in the lottery table for the normal state. It is a certain "20530". In this case, the probability of winning at the index value IV = 4 is about 1 / 3.2. As a result, in the BB state ST2, even if no small winning combination is won, the normal replay winning is established. Therefore, it is possible to increase the number of game media acquired by the player in the BB state ST2.

Returning to the explanation of the lottery process (FIG. 13), after selecting the lottery table (step S402), the index value IV is set to "1" (step S403), and the determination value DV used when determining the winning or losing of the winning combination is set. (Step S404). In this determination value setting process, a new determination value DV is set by adding the current index value IV and the corresponding point value PV to the current determination value DV. In the initial determination value setting process, the random value acquired in step S401 is used as the current determination value DV, and the point value PV corresponding to the current index value IV “1” is added to this random value. A new determination value DV is used.

After that, it is determined whether or not the combination corresponding to the index value IV is appropriate (step S405). In the winning / failing determination of the combination, it is determined whether or not the determination value DV exceeds "65535". If it exceeds "65535", the winning data acquisition process for setting the data of the winning combination corresponding to the index value IV at that time in the main RAM 74 is executed (step S406). In the winning data acquisition process, all of the winning data set for the index value IV this time in the lottery table to be referred to is set in the main RAM 74. In the state where the winning data is set, if the winning data is winning data other than the BB winning data, "0" is cleared after the end of this game regardless of whether or not the winning data corresponding to the winning data is established, and the BB is set. If it is winning data, "0" is cleared when the prize is established.

When the determination value DV does not exceed "65535" (step S405: NO), it means that the combination corresponding to the index value IV is lost. In this case, the index value IV is added by 1 (step S407), and it is determined whether or not there is a role corresponding to the index value IV, that is, whether or not there is a determination target to be determined. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the added index value IV exceeds the maximum value of the index value IV set in the lottery table. If there is a determination target to be determined, the process returns to step S404 and the determination of the winning / failing of the winning combination is continued. At this time, in step S404, the current index value IV and the corresponding point value PV are added to the judgment value DV (that is, the current judgment value DV) used for the winning / failing judgment of the previous combination to obtain a new judgment value DV. In step S405, the winning / failing determination of the winning combination is performed based on the determination value DV.

When the process of step S406 is executed, or when a negative determination is made in step S408, it means that the winning / failing determination of the winning combination is completed. In this case, after executing the first stop information setting process for setting the stop information for reel stop control (step S409), the effect content determination process is executed (step S410). In the effect content determination process, a process for determining the outline content of the effect to be executed in the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 in this game is executed. As the contents of the outline, the high expectation content, the medium expectation content, and the low expectation content are set so that the expectation that the BB state ST2 or the RT state ST6 is generated gradually decreases. In the process of determining the content of the effect, the outline of the content of the effect is determined by lottery using the lottery table corresponding to the combination of the current game state, the current game section, and the result of the lottery process of the combination.

Information corresponding to the contents of the outline determined in the effect content determination process is set in the game start command, and the game start command is set as a transmission target to the effect side MPU 92 (step S411). The game start command is a command for causing the production side MPU 92 to recognize that a new game has started, and for causing the production side MPU 92 to recognize the outline contents of the production determined by the main side MPU 72. It is a command and is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 in the command output process (step S210) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11).

When the production side MPU 92 receives the game start command, it grasps the contents of the outline of the production in this game from the game start command, and details the contents of the production in an manner corresponding to the contents of the grasped outline of the production. It will be decided by lottery. Then, a data table corresponding to the determined content of the effect is read from the effect side ROM 93 to the effect side RAM 94, and according to the read data table, the light emission control of the upper lamp 61, the sound output control of the speaker 62, and the display of the image display device 63 are performed. Take control.

After that, the notification control process is executed (step S412). Although the details of the notification control process will be described later, the display control of the combined display unit 66 is performed so that the display corresponding to the stop order to be notified is performed when the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is notified. At the same time, a process is executed so that the notification of the stop order to be notified is executed by the image display device 63. After that, the transition trigger process of the RT state ST6 is executed (step S413). The details of the transition trigger processing of the RT state ST6 will be described later, but the processing for causing the transition to the RT state ST6 is executed.

Next, the reel control process executed in step S307 of the normal process (FIG. 12) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the reel control process, first, a rotation start process for starting the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is performed (step S501). In the rotation start processing, a predetermined weight time (for example, 4.1 seconds) has elapsed from the time when the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R corresponding to the result of the winning combination lottery processing (FIG. 13) in the previous game is started. Check if it has been done, and if it has not passed, wait until the wait time has elapsed. When the weight time has elapsed, the weight time for the next game is reset, and the rotation start information is set in the motor control storage area provided in the main RAM 74. By performing this process, the stepping motor control process in step S206 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11) starts the stepping motor acceleration process, and the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start rotating. After that, it waits until each reel 32L, 32M, 32R rotates at a constant speed at a predetermined rotation speed, and ends the rotation start processing. Further, the main MPU 72 can generate a stop command by lighting and displaying a lamp (not shown) of each stop button 42 to 44 when the rotation speed of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R becomes a constant speed. Notify the players and the like.

After that, it is determined whether or not any of the stop buttons 42 to 44 has been operated (step S502). If none of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is operated, the process of step S502 is repeatedly executed until any of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is operated. When it is determined that any of the stop buttons 42 to 44 has been operated, whether or not the rotating reels 32L, 32M, 32R and the corresponding stop buttons 42 to 44 have been operated, that is, whether or not a stop command has been generated. (Step S503). If the stop command has not been generated, the process returns to step S502, and the process of step S502 is repeatedly executed until any of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is operated. When a stop command is generated, a stop command command is set (step S504). The stop command command is a command for causing the effector MPU 92 to recognize which of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is operated to generate the stop command. When the stop command command is set, the stop control process shown in steps S505 to S511 is performed in order to stop the rotating reel.

In the stop control process, the symbol number of the arrival symbol that has reached the base point position (specifically, the lower row) at the timing when the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated is confirmed (step S505). Specifically, the symbol number of the arrival symbol that has reached the base point position is confirmed by the number of excitation pulses output from the time when the detection signal of the reel index sensor is input. After that, based on the stop information stored in the main RAM 74, the number of slips of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to be stopped this time is calculated (step S506).

In this slot machine 10, as a stop mode for stopping each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, a stop mode for stopping the arrival symbol reaching the base point position as it is when the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated corresponds to the stop mode. A stop mode in which the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are slid for one symbol and then stopped, a stop mode in which the reels are stopped after sliding two symbols, a stop mode in which the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped after sliding three symbols, and four symbols. Five patterns of stopping modes are prepared, one is a stopping mode in which the machine is stopped after sliding. Therefore, in step S506, any value of "0" to "4" is calculated as the slip number based on the stop information stored in the main RAM 74.

After that, the calculated slip number is added to the symbol number of the reached symbol, and the symbol number of the stop symbol that is actually stopped at the base point position is determined (step S507). Then, it is determined whether or not the symbol number of the arrival symbol of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to be stopped this time and the symbol number of the stop symbol are equal (step S508), and if they are equal, the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are equal. A reel stop process for stopping the rotation of the reel is performed (step S509). After that, it is determined whether or not all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R have stopped (step S510). If all reels 32L, 32M, 32R are not stopped, the stop information second setting process is performed (step S511), and the process returns to step S502.

Here, the stop information is information for making the stop mode of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R correspond to the result of the lottery process (FIG. 13) of the winning combination, and by using the stop information. , It is possible to calculate the number of slips (specifically, "0" to "4") for the arrival symbol that has reached the base point position when each of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is stopped. As the stop information, the slip number data indicating the correspondence relationship between each symbol and the slip number is stored in advance in the main ROM 73 in correspondence with each lottery result and the stop order of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the slip number data corresponding to each lottery result and the stop order of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R may be derived while the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are rotating. ..

As the process for setting the stop information, the stop information first setting process executed in step S409 of the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 13) and the stop information first setting process executed in step S511 of the reel control process (FIG. 15) are executed. There is a stop information second setting process. In the stop information first setting process, stop information is set according to the result of the lottery process of the winning combination. The stop information second setting process is a process of changing the stop information stored in the main RAM 74 in the stop information first setting process or the previous stop information second setting process after the reel is stopped. In the stop information second setting process, the stop information is changed based on the set winning data, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, and the stop rolls of the stopped reels 32L, 32M, 32R. do.

If it is determined in step S510 that all reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped, the winning determination process is executed in step S512. In the winning determination process, the type of the symbol stopped on the main line ML in each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is grasped. Then, when the combination of the symbols stopped and displayed on the main line ML in each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is the combination of the symbols corresponding to the winning combination in the lottery process of this combination, the winning combination is selected. The winning process is executed as the winning is established. In the winning process, if the winning is a small winning combination, the number of medals to be paid out is set in the main RAM 74 so that the game medium can be given in the medium giving process. On the other hand, if the winning is a replay winning, a flag setting process is executed so that the re-game setting process is executed in the next start waiting process (step S302).

After executing the winning determination process, the winning result command is set as an output target to the effect side MPU 92 (step S513). The winning result command includes data indicating whether or not the winning is successful this time, and if the winning is successful, data indicating the type of the winning is included.

<About the game state and game section>
Next, the gaming state and the gaming section will be described. FIG. 16 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a gaming state existing in the slot machine 10.

As already described as the gaming state, there are a normal state ST1, a BB state ST2, a post-bonus state ST3, a first preparation state ST4, a second preparation state ST5, and an RT state ST6. The normal state ST1 is a gaming state in which the player stays by executing the clearing process (step S105) of the main RAM 74. In addition, when the first promotion replay winning is not established even though the winning combination including the first promotion replay winning data is won in the combination lottery process in the first preparation state ST4, and in the second preparation state ST5. If the second promotion replay winning is not established even though the winning combination including the second promotion replay winning data is won in the combination lottery process, the game state becomes the normal state ST1. The normal state ST1 is a gaming state having the lowest advantage as compared with the other gaming states ST2 to ST6.

The normal state ST1 is a gaming state in which the game continues until the number of games corresponding to the upper limit number of games on the normal side (specifically, 999 games) is played, unless the BB prize is established in the middle. When the number of games played in the normal state ST1 is equal to the number of normal side upper limit games, the game shifts to the first preparation state ST4. Further, although the details will be described later, in the normal state ST1, both the normal section and the advantageous section can be set as the game section. However, in the normal state ST1, the frequency of staying in the normal section is higher than that in the advantageous section.

The BB state ST2 is a gaming state in which the transition is made when the first BB prize or the second BB prize is established in any of the normal state ST1, the post-bonus state ST3, the first preparation state ST4, the second preparation state ST5, and the RT state ST6. be. As described above, the BB state ST2 is a gaming state in which the expected number of game media to be granted per unit game is higher than that of the gaming states ST1, ST3 to ST6 other than the BB state ST2. Specifically, the winning combination that enables the winning of the bell is won with a higher probability (for example, about 1 / 1.5) than in other gaming states, and if the winning combination is won, each reel 32L , 32M, 32R, and the stop operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44 with respect to the rotation position of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, the bell winning is established regardless of the stop operation timing. Further, in the BB state ST2, if the small winning combination is not won, the normal replay winning will be established. The BB state ST2 ends when the total number of game media given since the start of the BB state ST2 becomes equal to or more than the end reference number (for example, "350").

The BB state ST2 has a first BB state and a second BB state. The first BB state is the BB state ST2 that shifts when the first BB prize is established, and the second BB state is the BB state ST2 that shifts when the second BB prize is established. The BB state ST2 ends when the total number of game media given since the start of the BB state ST2 becomes equal to or more than the end reference number (for example, "350"). In this case, since the end reference number is set to a number larger than the maximum number of game media that can be given in one game, the BB state ST2 will continue over a plurality of games. Further, the number of termination reference numbers is the same in both the first BB state and the second BB state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and although the number of end reference numbers differs between the first BB state and the second BB state, the configuration may be substantially the same, and the end reference number differs greatly between the first BB state and the second BB state. It may be configured. Further, the first BB state may have a configuration in which the number of termination reference numbers is larger than that in the second BB state, and the second BB state may have a configuration in which the number of termination reference numbers is larger than that in the first BB state.

Although the expected number of game media given in the BB state ST2 is the same in the first BB state and the second BB state, the setting modes of the game sections are different from each other. Specifically, in the first BB state, unless the number of continuous games in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit number of games in the middle, the game is maintained in the advantageous section regardless of the game section before the start of the first BB state, and the first BB state is maintained. It is maintained in the advantageous section even after the end of the 1BB state. For example, when the first BB prize is established in the normal section, the game section is set as the advantageous section in the first game of the first BB state, the advantageous section is maintained in the entire first BB state, and the first BB state is further changed. The advantageous section is maintained even after the end. Further, when the first BB prize is established in the advantageous section, the advantageous section is maintained even in the first BB state, and the advantageous section is maintained even after the first BB state is completed.

On the other hand, in the second BB state, unless the number of continuous games in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit number of games in the middle, the game section before the start of the second BB state is taken over as it is, and the game section remains as it is even after the end of the second BB state. Will be taken over. For example, when the second BB prize is established in the normal section, the normal section is maintained in the entire second BB state, and the normal section is maintained even after the second BB state is completed. Further, when the second BB prize is established in the advantageous section, the advantageous section is maintained in the entire second BB state and the second BB state is terminated unless the number of continuous games in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit number of games in the middle. The advantageous section will be maintained after that.

Although the details will be described later, in the first BB state where the game has shifted in the normal section, the lottery process for shifting to the RT state ST6 is executed in the first game. If the condition for shifting to the RT state ST6 is not satisfied, the lottery process for shifting to the RT state ST6 is executed based on the result of the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 13) in the games after the first game in the first BB state. Will be done. If the conditions for transitioning to the RT state ST6 are satisfied, whether to promote the continuation rate of the RT state ST6 based on the result of the lottery process (FIG. 13) in the games after the first game in the first BB state. A lottery process for determining whether or not to do so is executed. On the other hand, in the second BB state, regardless of whether or not the game section before the start of the second BB state and the condition for shifting to the RT state ST6 are satisfied, the lottery process for shifting to the RT state ST6 and the promotion lottery for the continuation rate of the RT state ST6 are performed. None of the processing is performed.

The probability that the first BB winning data is set in the lottery process of the winning combination is the same regardless of whether the setting value of the slot machine 10 is "setting 1" to "setting 6", whereas the second BB winning data The probability that is set in the winning combination lottery process differs depending on the set value of the slot machine 10. In this case, as described above, in the first BB state, the transition lottery process to the RT state ST6 and the promotion lottery process of the continuation rate of the RT state ST6 are executed, while in the second BB state, these transition lottery processes and promotion are performed. By preventing the lottery process from being executed, the transition probability to the RT state ST6 triggered by the occurrence of the BB state ST2 and the stay probability of the RT state ST6 are common between the set values of "setting 1" to "setting 6". It becomes possible to.

When the BB state ST2 is completed, the post-bonus state ST3 is used regardless of whether the completed BB state ST2 is the first BB state or the second BB state, and the game section is either the normal section or the advantageous section. Become. Further, when the SB prize is established in either the first preparation state ST4 or the second preparation state ST5, the bonus post-bonus state ST3 is obtained.

The post-bonus state ST3 is a gaming state in which the probability that a replay prize will be established is higher than that in the normal state ST1. Specifically, as shown in the explanatory diagrams of FIGS. 17A and 17B, the normal replay winning data has an index value IV = 7 in the lottery table regardless of whether the normal state ST1 or the bonus post-bonus state ST3 is used. Is set, but the point value PV assigned to the index value IV = 7 is "8978" in the normal state ST1 as shown in FIG. 17A, whereas in the post-bonus state ST3. Is "9500" as shown in FIG. 17 (b). Further, the types of winning data set to the index values IV = 1 to 6 and the point value PV assigned to each of these index values IV = 1 to 6 are the same in the normal state ST1 and the post-bonus state ST3. It has become. As a result, the post-bonus state ST3 becomes a slightly more advantageous gaming state than the normal state ST1 in terms of the lottery process of the winning combination. Further, in the post-bonus state ST3, both a normal section and an advantageous section can be set as the game section.

In the post-bonus state ST3, if the index value IV = 6 for which the SB winning data is set is won in the combination lottery process (FIG. 13) and the SB winning is not established in the game, the game section is the normal section. In any of the advantageous section and the advantageous section, the first preparation state ST4 is set. On the other hand, if the index value IV = 6 is won in the post-bonus state ST3 and the SB prize is established in the game, the transition to the first preparation state ST4 does not occur and the player stays in the post-bonus state ST3 as it is. It will be.

The first preparation state ST4 is a gaming state in which the probability that the replay winning is established is the same as that of the post-bonus state ST3. Specifically, as shown in the explanatory diagrams of FIGS. 17 (b) and 17 (c), the index value IV = 7 in the lottery table is normally replayed regardless of whether the post-bonus state ST3 or the first preparation state ST4. Winning data is set. In addition, index values IV = 8 to 13 are set in the lottery table in the first preparation state ST4, and both the normal replay winning data and the first promotion replay winning data are set in each of these index values IV = 8 to 13. Is set. The point value PV assigned to the index value IV = 7 in the post-bonus state ST3 is “9500” as shown in FIG. 17 (b), whereas the index value IV = in the first preparation state ST4. The total value of the point value PV set in 7 to 13 is "9500" as shown in FIG. 17 (c). Further, the types of winning data set to the index values IV = 1 to 6 and the point value PV assigned to each of these index values IV = 1 to 6 are in the post-bonus state ST3 and the first preparation state ST4. It is the same. As a result, the advantage of the first preparation state ST4 regarding the lottery process of the winning combination is the same as that of the post-bonus state ST3.

FIG. 18A is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R and the winning mode established when the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are won at the index value IV = 8 to 13 in the first preparation state ST4. Is. When the winning is achieved with the index value IV = 8, as shown in FIG. 18A, the first stop (reels 32L, 32M, 32R in which the first stop command is generated) is the left reel 32L, and the second stop is the second reel. When the stop (reel 32L, 32M, 32R where the stop command is generated second) is the middle reel 32M, and the third stop (reel 32L, 32M, 32R where the stop command is finally generated) is the right reel 32R. The first promotion replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and in other cases, the normal replay winning is established regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. Further, when the index values IV = 9 to 13, as shown in FIG. 18A, the reels 32L, 32M, 32R for which the first promotion replay winning is established are indexed within the range of 6 stop orders. It differs from the value IV = 8 and is different from each other. As a result, even if the winning combination is won at any of the index values IV = 8 to 13 in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 13) in the first preparation state ST4, the stop order corresponding to the establishment of the first promotion replay winning is performed. The first promotion replay prize will not be established unless the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped. Further, in the first preparation state ST4, both a normal section and an advantageous section can be set as the game section.

The stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enables the establishment of the first promotion replay winning is the lottery of the first preparation state ST4 under the condition that the transition condition to the RT state ST6 is satisfied in the advantageous section. When any of the index values IV = 8 to 13 in the table is won, the image display device 63 and the combined display unit 66 are notified. Such notification is performed after the game in which the notification is executed is started until the acceleration period of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R ends and the constant speed period is reached until the stop operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is enabled. Is started on.

If the first promotion replay prize is not established when the index value IV = 8 to 13 in the lottery table of the first preparation state ST4 is won, the condition for transition to the RT state ST6 is satisfied. Regardless of whether or not the game is played, and regardless of the game section, the normal state ST1 is entered. In this case, since the initialization process of the advantageous section is executed, the game section in the normal state ST1 of the transition destination becomes the normal section regardless of the current game section, and the transition condition to the RT state ST6 is satisfied. If so, it is invalidated and the transition condition to the RT state ST6 is not satisfied. If the first promotion replay prize is established when the index value IV = 8 to 13 in the lottery table of the first preparation state ST4 is won, is the condition for transition to the RT state ST6 satisfied? Regardless of whether or not, and regardless of the game section, the process shifts to the second preparation state ST5.

The second preparation state ST5 is a gaming state in which the probability that the replay winning is established is higher than that of the first preparation state ST4. Specifically, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 17C, in the lottery table of the first preparation state ST4, the normal replay winning data is set to the index value IV = 7, and the index values IV = 8 to 13 are set. While both the normal replay winning data and the first promotion replay winning data are set, the index value IV = 7 in the lottery table in the second preparation state ST5 as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 17 (d). The normal replay winning data is set, and both the normal replay winning data and the second promotion replay winning data are set at the index values IV = 8 to 13. The total value of the point values PV set to the index values IV = 7 to 13 in the first preparation state ST4 is "9500" as shown in FIG. 17 (c), whereas the second preparation state. The total value of the point value PV set to the index value IV = 7 to 13 in ST5 is “43500” as shown in FIG. 17 (d). Further, the types of winning data set to the index values IV = 1 to 6 and the point value PV assigned to each of these index values IV = 1 to 6 are the first preparation state ST4 and the second preparation state ST5. Is the same. As a result, the second preparation state ST5 becomes a gaming state that is more advantageous than the first preparation state ST4 in terms of the lottery process of the winning combination.

FIG. 18B is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R and the winning mode established when the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are won at the index value IV = 8 to 13 in the second preparation state ST5. Is. When winning with an index value IV = 8, as shown in FIG. 18B, the first stop is the left reel 32L, the second stop is the middle reel 32M, and the third stop is the right reel 32R. In some cases, the second promotion replay prize is definitely established regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44, and in other cases, the normal replay prize is established regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44. .. Further, when the index values IV = 9 to 13, as shown in FIG. 18B, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R at which the second promotion replay winning is established is within the range of six stop orders. It differs from the index value IV = 8 and is different from each other. As a result, even if the winning combination is won at any of the index values IV = 8 to 13 in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 13) in the second preparation state ST5, the stop order corresponding to the establishment of the second promotion replay winning is performed. The second promotion replay prize will not be established unless the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped. Further, in the second preparation state ST5, both a normal section and an advantageous section can be set as the game section.

The stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enables the establishment of the second promotion replay winning is the lottery of the second preparation state ST5 under the condition that the transition condition to the RT state ST6 is satisfied in the advantageous section. When any of the index values IV = 8 to 13 in the table is won, the image display device 63 and the combined display unit 66 are notified. Such notification is performed after the game in which the notification is executed is started until the acceleration period of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R ends and the constant speed period is reached until the stop operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is enabled. Is started on.

If the second promotion replay prize is not established when the index value IV = 8 to 13 in the lottery table of the second preparation state ST5 is won, the condition for transition to the RT state ST6 is satisfied. Regardless of whether or not the game is played, and regardless of the game section, the normal state ST1 is entered. In this case, since the initialization process of the advantageous section is executed, the game section in the normal state ST1 of the transition destination becomes the normal section regardless of the current game section, and the transition condition to the RT state ST6 is satisfied. If so, it is invalidated and the transition condition to the RT state ST6 is not satisfied. If the second promotion replay prize is established when the index value IV = 8 to 13 in the lottery table of the second preparation state ST5 is won, is the condition for transition to the RT state ST6 satisfied? Regardless of whether or not, and regardless of the game section, the RT state ST6 is entered.

The RT state ST6 is a gaming state in which the probability that the replay winning is established is higher than that in the second preparation state ST5. Specifically, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 17D, in the lottery table of the second preparation state ST5, the normal replay winning data is set to the index value IV = 7, and the index values IV = 8 to 13 are set. While both the normal replay winning data and the second promotion replay winning data are set, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 17 (e), in the lottery table of the RT state ST6, the index value IV = 7 is the normal replay. Winning data is set. The total value of the point values PV set to the index values IV = 7 to 13 in the second preparation state ST5 is "43500" as shown in FIG. 17 (d), whereas in the RT state ST6. The point value PV set to the index value IV = 7 is “48500” as shown in FIG. 17 (e). Further, the types of winning data set to the index values IV = 1 to 6 and the point value PV assigned to each of these index values IV = 1 to 6 are the same in the second preparation state ST5 and the RT state ST6. It has become. As a result, the RT state ST6 becomes a gaming state that is more advantageous than the second preparation state ST5 in terms of the winning combination lottery process.

The RT state ST6 is a gaming state that continues until a game corresponding to the maximum number of games on the RT side (specifically, 30 games) is played unless a BB prize is established in the middle. Further, although the details will be described later, in the RT state ST6, both a normal section and an advantageous section can be set as the game section. However, in the RT state ST6, the frequency of staying in the advantageous section is higher than that in the normal section.

When the number of games for the maximum number of games on the RT side is played in the RT state ST6, the game shifts to the first preparation state ST4. Further, when the RT state ST6 ends, the continuous lottery process is executed according to the continuation rate set at that time. If a continuous winning is achieved in the continuous lottery process, the section shifts to the first preparation state ST4 in a situation where the transition condition to the RT state ST6 is satisfied in the advantageous section. In this situation, if the player shifts to the first preparation state ST4 and wins at any of the index values IV = 8 to 13 in the lottery table of the first preparation state ST4, the first promotion replay prize can be established. The stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is notified. When the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped according to the stop order and the first promotion replay winning is established, the second preparation state ST5 is set. Even in the second preparation state ST5, it is an advantageous section and the transition condition to the RT state ST6 is satisfied. Therefore, if any of the index values IV = 8 to 13 in the lottery table of the second preparation state ST5 is won, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enables the establishment of the second promotion replay winning is Be notified. When the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped according to the stop order and the second promotion replay winning is established, the RT state ST6 is set. That is, even if the RT state ST6 ends, the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped again according to the notified stop order by the continuous winning process executed at the end of the RT state ST6. It will return.

On the other hand, if it is out of the continuous lottery process, it shifts to the first preparation state ST4 in a situation where the transition condition to the RT state ST6 is not satisfied. In this case, unless the transition condition to the RT state ST6 is newly satisfied, the first promotion replay winning is established even if the index value IV = 8 to 13 in the lottery table of the first preparation state ST4 is won. The stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enables the above is not notified. Then, if the first promotion replay winning cannot be established even though the index value IV = 8 to 13 is won, the initialization process of the advantageous section is executed as already explained. Then, the state shifts to the normal state ST1 and the normal section.

Here, as described above, it is possible to notify the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enable the establishment of the first promotion replay winning in the first preparation state ST4 and to establish the second promotion replay winning in the second preparation state ST5. The notification of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is generated when the transition condition to the RT state ST6 is satisfied in the advantageous section, but even if the notification is not performed, the game is played. Since the actual stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R of the person becomes the stop order corresponding to the correct answer, the first promotion replay winning is established in the first preparation state ST4, and the first in the second preparation state ST5. 2 Promotion replay prize is established. Then, even if it is a normal section or the transition condition to the RT state ST6 is not satisfied, if the second promotion replay winning is established, the transition to the RT state ST6 is performed. Even the RT state ST6 that has transitioned under such a situation is treated as the same as the RT state ST6 that has transitioned in a situation where the transition condition to the RT state ST6 is satisfied in the advantageous section. Further, when the RT state ST6 is entered under such a situation, the gaming section becomes an advantageous section in the RT state ST6, and the continuation rate of the RT state ST6 is determined at the time of the transition.

If the index value IV = 8 to 13 is won in the situation where the transition condition to the normal section or the RT state ST6 is not satisfied in the first preparation state ST4, the first promotion replay prize can be established. Although the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is not notified, the image display device 63 executes an effect that allows the player to recognize that the winning combination has been won. In addition, if the index value IV = 8 to 13 is won in the situation where the transition condition to the normal section or the RT state ST6 is not satisfied in the second preparation state ST5, the second promotion replay prize is established. Although the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R to be enabled is not notified, the image display device 63 executes an effect that allows the player to recognize that the winning combination has been won. The player who confirms this effect will perform the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R while expecting that the stop order corresponds to the correct answer. Then, when the transition to the RT state ST6 finally occurs, the feeling that the profit of the transition to the RT state ST6 is obtained by oneself is strengthened, and a feeling of satisfaction is obtained. Further, even in the RT state ST6, it becomes an advantageous section and the continuation rate is determined at the time of the transition, so that the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is the same as in the RT state ST6 shifted by the notified route. , RT state ST6 loop can be expected. From this point as well, you will be satisfied with the fact that you have acquired the transition to the RT state ST6 on your own.

Next, a state in which the transition to the RT state ST6 occurs in relation to the game section will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 19A shows a period in which the game section is a normal section, FIG. 19B shows a period in which the game section is an advantageous section, and FIG. 19C shows a combination lottery process (FIG. 19). 13) shows the timing at which the SB winning data is set, FIG. 19 (d) shows the period during which the gaming state is in the normal state ST1, and FIG. 19 (e) shows the period in which the gaming state is in the post-bonus state ST3. 19 (f) shows the period in which the gaming state is in the first preparation state ST4, and FIG. 19 (g) shows the period in which the gaming state is in the second preparation state ST5. FIG. 19H shows a period in which the gaming state is the RT state ST6.

First, a case where a transition to an advantageous section occurs in the normal state ST1 will be described.

An index in which SB winning data is set as shown in FIG. 19 (c) at the timing of t1 which is a normal section as shown in FIG. 19 (a) and is a normal state ST1 as shown in FIG. 19 (d). The value IV = 6 is won in the lottery process (FIG. 13). When the SB winning data is set in the normal section, the game shifts to the advantageous section in the next game with respect to the game regardless of whether or not the SB winning is established in the game. Therefore, at the timing of t2, as shown in FIGS. 19A and 19B, the gaming section shifts from the normal section to the advantageous section.

When the game shifts to the advantageous section triggered by the setting of the SB winning data, the shift lottery process to the RT state ST6 is executed in the game shifted to the advantageous section. However, in the transition lottery process executed when the transition to the advantageous section is performed in the normal state ST1, the result is basically out of order. Then, if the result is out of the transition lottery process, the advantageous section ends in the game in which the transition lottery process is executed. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 19 (a) and 19 (b), the game section shifts from the advantageous section to the normal section at the timing of t3 without the transition to the RT state ST6.

Next, a case where the SB winning data is set in the post-bonus state ST3 shifts to an advantageous section will be described.

SB winning data was set as shown in FIG. 19 (c) at the timing of t4, which is a normal section as shown in FIG. 19 (a) and is a post-bonus state ST3 as shown in FIG. 19 (e). The index value IV = 6 is won by the lottery process (FIG. 13). As described above, when the SB winning data is set in the normal section, the game shifts to the advantageous section in the next game regardless of whether or not the SB winning is established in the game. Further, when the SB winning data is set in the post-bonus state ST3, if the SB winning is not established in the game, the game state shifts to the first preparation state ST4 from the next game. This time, because the SB winning was not established in the game in which the SB winning data was set, the SB was shown in FIGS. 19 (a), 19 (b), 19 (e), and 19 (f). At the timing of t5, which is the timing when the next game is started for the game in which the winning data is set, the game section shifts from the normal section to the advantageous section, and the game state is changed from the post-bonus state ST3 to the first preparation state. Move to ST4.

When the SB winning data is set and the game shifts to the advantageous section, the lottery process for shifting to the RT state ST6 is executed in the game shifted to the advantageous section as described above. In this case, since the transition lottery process is executed in the first preparation state ST4, the transition is basically won. Then, when the transition is won in the transition lottery process, the transition to the normal state ST1 or the RT state ST6 basically occurs in the situation where the transition condition to the RT state ST6 is satisfied in the advantageous section. At least continue until. In this case, if any of the index values IV = 8 to 13 is won in the first preparation state ST4, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enables the establishment of the first promotion replay winning is notified. By stopping the reels 32L, 32M, 32R according to the notified stop order, the gaming state is changed from the first preparation state ST4 to the second at the timing of t6 as shown in FIGS. 19 (f) and 19 (g). It shifts to the preparation state ST5. Further, when any of the index values IV = 8 to 13 is won in the second preparation state ST5, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R which enables the establishment of the second promotion replay winning is notified. By stopping the reels 32L, 32M, 32R according to the notified stop order, the gaming state is changed from the second preparation state ST5 to the RT state at the timing of t7 as shown in FIGS. 19 (g) and 19 (h). Move to ST6.

The RT state ST6 continues for 30 games, and the 30th game is digested at the timing of t8, so that the gaming state is changed from the RT state ST6 to the RT state ST6 as shown in FIGS. 19 (h) and 19 (f). 1 Move to the ready state ST4. Further, at the timing when the RT state ST6 ends, the continuous lottery process is executed according to the continuation rate set at that time. By continuing to win in the continuous lottery process, even if the RT state ST6 shifts to the first preparation state ST4, the situation in which the transition condition to the RT state ST6 is satisfied in the advantageous section is maintained. Therefore, after the first preparation state ST4 is performed over the timing of t8 to t9 as shown in FIG. 19 (f), the second preparation is performed over the timing of t9 to t10 as shown in FIG. 19 (g). The state ST5 is performed, and then the RT state ST6 is performed over the timing of t10 to t11 as shown in FIG. 19 (h).

After that, the continuous lottery process executed when the RT state ST6 ends at the timing of t11 is out of order, so that the transition condition to the RT state ST6 is not satisfied although it is an advantageous section. In this case, as shown in FIG. 19 (f), even if the player wins at any of the index values IV = 8 to 13 in the first preparation state ST4 shifted at the timing of t11, the first promotion replay prize can be established. The stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is not notified. Therefore, in the game in which the index value IV = 8 to 13 is won, the first promotion replay prize cannot be established, and the timing of t12 is shown in FIGS. 19 (d) and 19 (f). As shown, the game state shifts from the first preparation state ST4 to the normal state ST1. Further, by executing the initialization process of the advantageous section at the timing of t12, the game section shifts from the advantageous section to the normal section as shown in FIGS. 19A and 19B. As a result, the normal state ST1 is restored to the normal section.

Next, the timing at which the transition lottery process to the RT state ST6 is executed will be described in more detail. FIG. 20 is a time chart showing how the transition lottery process to the RT state ST6 is executed. 20 (a) shows the execution period of one game, FIG. 20 (b) shows the timing when the SB winning data is set in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 13), and FIG. 20 (c) shows the game section. FIG. 20 (d) shows a period in which the game section is an advantageous section, and FIG. 20 (e) shows the timing when the transition lottery process to the RT state ST6 is executed. FIG. 20 (f) shows the execution period of the first BB state.

First, a case where the transition lottery process to the RT state ST6 is executed when the SB winning data is set in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 13) will be described.

As shown in FIG. 20 (c), a new game is started as shown in FIG. 20 (a) at the timing of t1 which is a normal section. Then, the SB winning data is set as shown in FIG. 20 (b) in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 13) executed at the start of this game. As a result, at the timing of t2 when the game ends, the game section shifts from the normal section to the advantageous section as shown in FIGS. 20 (c) and 20 (d).

After that, as shown in FIG. 20A, the next game is started at the timing of t3. Since the game is the first game after the game section shifts from the normal section to the advantageous section, the transition to the RT state ST6 is performed at the timing of t3, which is the start time of the game, as shown in FIG. 20 (e). The lottery process is executed. The probability of winning a transition in the transition lottery process to the RT state ST6 differs depending on the gaming state in which the transition lottery process is executed.

The lottery mode of the transition lottery process to the RT state ST6, which is executed when the SB winning data is set in this way, will be described with reference to FIGS. 21 (a) to 21 (d). 21 (a) and 21 (b) explain the first table for the normal state and the second table for the normal state which are referred to when the transition lottery process to the RT state ST6 is executed in the normal state ST1. 21 (c) is an explanatory diagram for this, and FIG. 21 (c) is referred to when the transition lottery process to the RT state ST6 is executed in any one of the post-bonus state ST3, the first preparation state ST4, and the second preparation state ST5. 21 (d) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a table for various states, and FIG. 21D describes a table for the RT state that is referred to when a transition lottery process to the RT state ST6 is executed in the RT state ST6. It is explanatory drawing for this.

When the SB winning data is set in the normal state ST1 and the transition lottery process to the RT state ST6 is executed, either the first table for the normal state or the second table for the normal state is referred to. As shown in FIG. 21A, in the first table for the normal state, the probability of winning the result in the transition lottery process is 0%, and the probability of losing the result is 100%. That is, when the transition lottery process is executed with reference to the first table for the normal state, the result is surely out of order. Then, if the result is out of the transition lottery process, the advantageous section ends in one game, and the situation returns from the normal state ST1 and the advantageous section to the normal state ST1 and the normal section. do. As a result, it is possible to reduce the number of games digested in the advantageous section when the transition condition to the RT state ST6 is not satisfied, and the number of games digested in the advantageous section does not increase meaninglessly. It becomes possible to do so.

On the other hand, in the second table for the normal state, as shown in FIG. 21B, the probability of winning the result in the transition lottery process is 100%, and the probability of losing the result is 0%. That is, when the transition lottery process is executed with reference to the second table for the normal state, the winning result is surely obtained. In addition, among the 6 stages of continuation rates, the selection targets are the 3 stages on the high continuation rate side. Specifically, the continuation rate of 80% is selected with a probability of 95%, and the continuation of 90%. A rate is selected with a probability of 3% and a continuation rate of 100% is selected with a probability of 2%. This makes it possible to increase the advantage that the transition lottery process is executed with reference to the second table for the normal state. Further, the selected continuation rate is maintained until the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied and the initialization process of the advantageous section is executed. By the way, when the continuation rate of 100% is selected, even if the RT state ST6 ends once, the state in which the transition condition to the RT state ST6 is satisfied is maintained until the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied. It becomes. If it becomes an advantageous section in the normal state ST1 and a winning result is obtained in the transition lottery process, it is an advantageous section and the state in which the transition condition to the RT state ST6 is satisfied is maintained at least until the transition to the first preparation state ST4. .. Then, by performing the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R according to the stop order notified in the first preparation state ST4, the first promotion replay winning is established and the reel 32L is established according to the stop order notified in the second preparation state ST5. By performing the stop operation of, 32M, 32R and establishing the second promotion replay winning, the RT state ST6 will be entered.

As described above, the normal state ST1 continues until the number of normal side upper limit games (specifically, 999 games) is played unless the transition to the BB state ST2 occurs. In this case, if the number of remaining games up to the number of normal side upper limit games in the normal state ST1 is larger than 50 games, the first table for the normal state is referred to in the transition lottery process, and the normal side upper limit game in the normal state ST1 is referred to. When the number of remaining games up to the number is 50 games or less, the second table for the normal state is referred to in the transition lottery process. This makes it possible to change the advantage of shifting to the RT state ST6 according to the timing at which the SB winning data is set in the normal state ST1. In particular, when the number of remaining games up to the maximum number of games on the normal side in the normal state ST1 is within the predetermined number of games included in 10% or less of the maximum number of games on the normal side, the second table for the normal state is referred to. By doing so, it is possible to compensate for the long stay in the normal state ST1 without the occurrence of both the BB state ST2 and the RT state ST6. The situation where the second table for the normal state is the reference target is not limited to the situation where the number of games is within the predetermined number range included in 10% or less of the upper limit game number on the normal side, and is included in 20% or less. It may be a situation where the predetermined number of games is within the predetermined number range, or a situation where the predetermined number of games is included in 5% or less.

When the SB winning data is set in any of the post-bonus state ST3, the first preparation state ST4, and the second preparation state ST5 and the transition lottery process to the RT state ST6 is executed, the tables for various states are referred to. As shown in FIG. 21 (c), the table for various states has a probability of winning the result in the transition lottery process of 100% and a probability of losing the result of 0%. That is, when the transition lottery process is executed with reference to the tables for various states, the winning result is surely obtained. Further, all of the continuation rates existing in the six stages are to be selected, but the selection rate of the three stages on the low continuation rate side is higher than the selection rate of the three stages on the high continuation rate side. Specifically, a 50% continuation rate is selected with an 80% probability, a 60% continuation rate is selected with a 12% probability, a 70% continuation rate is selected with a 7% probability, and an 80% continuation rate is selected. A continuation rate is selected with a probability of 0.5%, a continuation rate of 90% is selected with a probability of 0.4%, and a continuation rate of 100% is selected with a probability of 0.1%. That is, although the table for various states has a 100% probability of winning in the transition lottery process like the second table for normal states, the expected value of the selected continuation rate is that of the table for various states. Is lower than the second table for normal conditions. The situation in which the tables for various states are referred to by setting the selection mode of the continuation rate in this way is more advantageous than the situation in which the first table for the normal state is referred to, and the first table for the normal state is referred to. 2 It is more disadvantageous than the situation where the table is referenced.

If the index value IV = 6 for which the SB winning data is set in the post-bonus state ST3 is won by the lottery process and the SB winning is established, the transition to the first preparation state ST4 does not occur and the post-bonus state ST3 Will stay at. In this case, when the SB winning data is set in the post-bonus state ST3 and the normal section, the game is the next game after the game in which the SB winning is established, that is, the game in the SB state and is a bonus. The game in the post-state ST3 becomes the first game after the transition to the advantageous section, and the transition lottery process is executed with reference to the tables for various states in the game. Further, in the case where the SB winning data is set in the first preparation state ST4 or the second preparation state ST5 and the normal section, and the SB winning is established, the game following the above-mentioned SB winning is established. The game, that is, the game in the SB state and the post-bonus state ST3, becomes the first game after the transition to the advantageous section, and the transition lottery process is executed with reference to the tables for various states in the game. Will be done. Since the winning result is obtained in these transition lottery processes as described above, the state in which the transition condition to the RT state ST6 is satisfied is maintained, which is an advantageous section at least until the transition to the first preparation state ST4. Then, by performing the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R according to the stop order notified in the first preparation state ST4, the first promotion replay winning is established and the reel 32L is established according to the stop order notified in the second preparation state ST5. By performing the stop operation of, 32M, 32R and establishing the second promotion replay winning, the RT state ST6 will be entered.

If the index value IV = 6 in which the SB winning data is set in the post-bonus state ST3 is won in the winning combination and the SB winning is not established, the transition to the first preparation state ST4 occurs. When the SB winning data is set in the post-bonus state ST3 and the normal section, the game next to the game in which the SB winning data is set and is the first preparation state ST4. Is the first game after the transition to the advantageous section, and the transition lottery process is executed with reference to the tables for various states in the game. Further, if the SB winning data is set in the first preparation state ST4 and the normal section, and the SB winning is not established, in the next game of the game in which the SB winning data is set. Therefore, the game in the first preparation state ST4 becomes the first game after the transition to the advantageous section, and the transition lottery process is executed with reference to the tables for various states in the game. Since the winning result is obtained in these transition lottery processes as described above, it is an advantageous section until at least one of the index values IV = 8 to 13 in the first preparation state ST4 is won in the lottery process (FIG. 13). Therefore, the state in which the transition condition to the RT state ST6 is satisfied is maintained. Then, by performing the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R according to the stop order notified in the first preparation state ST4, the first promotion replay winning is established and the reel 32L is established according to the stop order notified in the second preparation state ST5. By performing the stop operation of, 32M, 32R and establishing the second promotion replay winning, the RT state ST6 will be entered.

If the SB winning data is set in the second preparation state ST5 and the normal section, and the SB winning is not established, it is the next game of the game in which the SB winning data is set. The game in the second preparation state ST5 becomes the first game after shifting to the advantageous section, and the transition lottery process is executed with reference to the tables for various states in the game. Since the winning result is obtained in these transition lottery processes as described above, it is an advantageous section until at least one of the index values IV = 8 to 13 in the second preparation state ST5 is won in the lottery process (FIG. 13). Therefore, the state in which the transition condition to the RT state ST6 is satisfied is maintained. Then, by performing the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R according to the stop order notified in the second preparation state ST5, the second promotion replay winning is established, and the process shifts to the RT state ST6.

When the SB winning data is set in the RT state ST6 and the transition lottery process to the RT state ST6 is executed, the lottery table for the RT state is referred to. As shown in FIG. 21D, in the lottery table for the RT state, the probability of winning the result in the transition lottery process is 100%, and the probability of losing the result is 0%. That is, when the table for the RT state is referred to and the transition lottery process is executed, the winning result is surely obtained. Moreover, among the continuation rates existing in 6 stages, only 100%, which is the highest continuation rate, is selected. This makes it possible to make the situation in which the table for the RT state is referred to in the transition lottery process more advantageous than the situation in which other tables are referred to in the transition lottery process.

The RT state ST6 basically shifts to the advantageous section, and the RT state ST6 also basically maintains the advantageous section. However, when the number of games continued without shifting to the normal section in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit number of games (specifically, 1500 games), the initialization process of the advantageous section is performed regardless of the gaming state at that time. Is executed to shift to the normal section. In addition, even if the maximum number of games has not been reached, the number of games that have been continued without shifting to the normal section in the advantageous section is the number of games that is less than the maximum number of games (specifically, 1450 games). In the above situation, in other words, when the number of remaining games up to the maximum number of games is within the specified number of games included in 5% or less of the maximum number of games, a new transition to the RT state ST6 will occur. In this case, the game section shifts from the advantageous section to the normal section at the time of transition to the RT state ST6, and in the RT state ST6, the game section becomes the normal section from the first game. However, in the RT state ST6, the same lottery table is referred to in the lottery process (FIG. 13) of the winning combination in either the normal section or the advantageous section, and the lottery table includes reels 32L, 32M, 32R. No combination is set in which the advantage differs depending on whether or not the stop order is notified. That is, the advantage of the RT state ST6 is the same in both the normal section and the advantageous section. When the SB winning data is set in the RT state ST6 and the normal section, the next game of the game in which the SB winning data is set is set regardless of whether or not the SB winning is established in the game. The game in the RT state ST6 becomes the first game after the transition to the advantageous section, and the transition lottery process is executed with reference to the table for the RT state in the game. Then, when the transition lottery process is executed with reference to the table for the RT state, the winning result is surely obtained and the continuation rate of 100% is surely selected as described above.

With the above configuration, it is possible to create a situation in which the advantageous section continues beyond the upper limit number of games across the RT state ST6, which is a normal section but has the same advantage as in the case of the advantageous section. As a result, the player expects that the advantageous section will continue beyond the upper limit of the number of games, and it will be possible to improve the interest of the game.

In particular, when the transition lottery process is executed with reference to the table for the RT state, the continuation rate of 100% is surely selected, which is an advantage that occurs after the situation in the RT state ST6 which is a normal section. The section will continue to the maximum number of games or the number of trigger games with high probability. That is, it is possible to create a situation in which the advantageous section is substantially continued with a high probability over twice the number of trigger games. As a result, it is possible to increase the player's expectation that the SB winning data will be set in the situation where the advantageous section continues over the number of trigger games and the RT state ST6 is the normal section.

If the SB winning data is not set in the RT state ST6 and the normal section, the normal section is also set in the first preparation state ST4 that shifts after the end of the RT state ST6. Then, as described above, in the situation where the first preparation state is ST4 and the normal section is used, if the winning combination is won by any of the index values IV = 8 to 13 in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 13), the player is promoted to the first position. The stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enable the establishment of the replay winning is not notified, and if the first promotion replay winning is not established, the normal state ST1 is entered. As a result, the player strongly expects the SB winning data to be set in the situation where the RT state is ST6 and is a normal section, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Incidentally, in the situation where the RT state ST6 is the normal section, the effect that the player can recognize the situation is executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63. This makes it possible to suitably increase the player's expectation that the SB winning data will be set in the situation.

Next, a case where the transition lottery process to the RT state ST6 is executed triggered by the transition to the first BB state in the normal section will be described with reference to FIG. 20 again.

As shown in FIG. 20 (a), a new game is started at the timing of t4, which is a normal section as shown in FIG. 20 (c). Then, the first BB prize is established in this game. As a result, at the timing of t5 when the game ends, the game shifts to the first BB state as shown in FIG. 20 (f). Further, when the transition to the first BB state occurs in the normal section, the process for shifting the gaming section from the normal section to the advantageous section is executed. Therefore, at the timing of t5, the gaming section shifts from the normal section to the advantageous section as shown in FIGS. 20 (c) and 20 (d).

After that, as shown in FIG. 20A, the next game is started at the timing of t6. Since the game is the first game after the game section shifts from the normal section to the advantageous section, the transition to the RT state ST6 is performed at the timing of t6, which is the start time of the game, as shown in FIG. 20 (e). The lottery process is executed. In this transition lottery process, the table for the first BB state is referred to.

FIG. 21 (e) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a table for the first BB state. In the table for the first BB state, the probability of winning the result in the transition lottery process is 5%, and the probability of losing the result is 95%. Further, all of the continuation rates existing in the six stages are to be selected, but the selection rate of the three stages on the low continuation rate side is higher than the selection rate of the three stages on the high continuation rate side. Specifically, when a winning result is obtained in the transition lottery process, a 50% continuation rate is selected with a 2% probability, a 60% continuation rate is selected with a 1% probability, and a 70% continuation rate is selected. A rate is selected with a 1% chance, an 80% continuation rate is selected with a 0.5% probability, a 90% continuation rate is selected with a 0.4% probability, and a 100% continuation rate is 0. Selected with a 1% chance. Therefore, the situation in which the table for the first BB state is referred to is more advantageous than the situation in which the first table for the normal state is referred to, and the second table for the normal state, the table for various states, and the RT state are referred to. It is more disadvantageous than the situation where the table of is referenced.

The advantageous section is maintained in the first BB state regardless of whether or not the winning result is obtained in the transition lottery process executed in the first game in the first BB state. Then, when the lottery trigger is won in the first BB state, if the transition condition to the RT state ST6 is not satisfied, the transition lottery process to the RT state ST6 is executed, and the transition condition to the RT state ST6 is satisfied. If so, the promotion lottery process for the continuation rate of the RT state ST6 is executed. That is, in the first BB state, the transition condition to the RT state ST6 may be satisfied not only at the start time but also at the intermediate timing. Further, when the condition for shifting to the RT state ST6 is already satisfied in the first BB state, the continuation rate of the RT state ST6 may increase at the timing in the middle of the first BB state. This makes it possible to increase the degree of attention to the game in the first BB state.

Next, a specific processing configuration that enables the setting of the gaming state as described above will be described. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing a corresponding process at the end of the game executed by the main MPU 72. The corresponding process at the end of the game is executed in step S309 in the normal process (FIG. 12). Since the process of step S309 is executed after the reel control process, it is executed when all the rotations of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in one game and the game ends.

First, the control process of the game section is executed (step S601). Although the details of the game section control process will be described later, a process for shifting the game section between the normal section and the advantageous section is executed. After that, the BB process is executed (step S602). The details of the BB process will be described later, but a process for shifting to the BB state ST2 and a process for advancing the BB state ST2 are executed.

After that, on condition that the state is not BB state ST2 (step S603: NO), a process for jumping to the process corresponding to the value of the state counter provided in the main RAM 74 is executed (step S604). The state counter is a counter for the main MPU 72 to specify whether the gaming state is the normal state ST1, the post-bonus state ST3, the first preparation state ST4, the second preparation state ST5, or the RT state ST6. .. When the value of the state counter is "0", the normal state process (step S605) for advancing the normal state ST1 is executed, and when the value of the state counter is "1", the post-bonus state ST3 is advanced. When the value of the state counter is "2", the first preparation state process (step S607) for advancing the first preparation state ST4 is executed, and the state is executed. When the value of the counter is "3", the second preparation state process (step S608) for advancing the second preparation state ST5 is executed, and when the value of the state counter is "4", the RT state ST6 is set. The RT state process (step S609) for advancing is executed. When the clearing process (step S105) of the main RAM 74 is executed, the value of the status counter becomes "0".

FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the normal state processing (step S605). As described above, since the corresponding processing at the end of the game is executed when the game ends, the normal state processing is also executed when the game ends.

First, the value of the ceiling game number counter provided in the main RAM 74 is added by 1 (step S701). The ceiling game number counter is a counter for the main MPU 72 to grasp the number of games continued without the transition to the BB state ST2 in the normal state ST1. When the value of the ceiling game number counter added by 1 is the upper limit number of games on the normal side (step S702: YES), the value of the status counter is added by 2 (step S703). As a result, the value of the status counter becomes "2" corresponding to the execution of the first preparation status process. That is, the gaming state shifts from the normal state ST1 to the first preparation state ST4. In addition, the value of the ceiling game number counter is cleared to "0" (step S704).

FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the bonus post-state processing (step S606). As described above, since the corresponding processing at the end of the game is executed when the game ends, the post-bonus state processing is also executed when the game ends.

If the index value IV = 6 is won and the SB winning data is set in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 13) in this game (step S801: YES), whether or not the SB winning is established in this game. Is determined (step S802). When the SB winning is established (step S802: NO), the value of the status counter is added by 1 (step S803). As a result, the value of the status counter becomes "2" corresponding to the execution of the first preparation status process. That is, the gaming state shifts from the post-bonus state ST3 to the first preparation state ST4. On the other hand, if the SB winning is established (step S802: YES), the post-bonus state processing is terminated as it is. As a result, even if the SB winning data is set in the post-bonus state ST3, if the SB winning is established, the player stays in the post-bonus state ST3 as it is. Further, with the above configuration, the post-bonus state ST3 will continue at least until the SB winning data is set, unless the transition to the BB state ST2 occurs.

FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the first preparation state process (step S607). As described above, since the corresponding process at the end of the game is executed when the game ends, the first preparation state process is also executed when the game ends.

When the SB winning is established in this game (step S901: YES), the value of the status counter is set to "1" (step S902). As a result, the gaming state shifts from the first preparation state ST4 to the post-bonus state ST3.

If any of the index values IV = 8 to 13 is won in this game and the first promotion replay winning is established (step S903 and step S904: YES), the value of the status counter is added by 1. (Step S905). As a result, the value of the status counter becomes "3" corresponding to the execution of the second preparation status process. That is, the gaming state shifts from the first preparation state ST4 to the second preparation state ST5. On the other hand, if the first promotion replay prize is not established even though the index value IV = 8 to 13 is won in this game (step S903: YES, step S904: NO), the status counter is cleared to "0". (Step S906). As a result, the gaming state shifts from the first preparation state ST4 to the normal state ST1.

FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the second preparation state process (step S608). As described above, since the corresponding process at the end of the game is executed when the game ends, the second preparation state process is also executed when the game ends.

When the SB winning is established in this game (step S1001: YES), the value of the status counter is set to "1" (step S1002). As a result, the gaming state shifts from the second preparation state ST5 to the post-bonus state ST3.

If any of the index values IV = 8 to 13 is won in this game and the second promotion replay winning is established (step S1003 and step S1004: YES), the value of the status counter is added by 1. (Step S1005). As a result, the value of the status counter becomes "4" corresponding to the execution of the RT status processing. That is, the gaming state shifts from the second preparation state ST5 to the RT state ST6. Further, "30" is set in the RT game number counter provided in the main RAM 74 (step S1006). The RT game number counter is a counter for grasping the remaining number of continuous games in the RT state ST6 by the main MPU 72.

On the other hand, if the second promotion replay prize is not established even though the index value IV = 8 to 13 is won in this game (step S1003: YES, step S1004: NO), the status counter is cleared to "0". (Step S1007). As a result, the gaming state shifts from the second preparation state ST5 to the normal state ST1.

Here, a processing configuration for notifying the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the first preparation state ST4 and the second preparation state ST5 will be described. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the notification control process. The notification control process is executed in step S412 in the combination lottery process (FIG. 13). Since the winning combination lottery process is executed before the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is started at the start of the game, the notification control process is also executed before the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is started at the start of the game. Will be executed.

When winning in any of the index values IV = 8 to 13 in the first preparation state ST4 (step S1101: YES), "1" is set in the advantageous section flag provided in the main RAM 74 and the main RAM 74. It is determined whether or not the value of the advantageous end preparation flag provided in is "0" (step S1102). The advantageous section flag is a flag for specifying whether or not the game section is an advantageous section, and the case where "1" is set in the advantageous section flag is the advantageous section, and the value of the advantageous section flag is "0". Is a normal section.

Further, the advantageous end preparation flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify that the transition condition to the RT state ST6 is not satisfied in the advantageous section, and "1" is set in the advantageous end preparation flag. If yes, it means that the condition for shifting to the RT state ST6 is not satisfied in the advantageous section. When "1" is set in the advantageous end preparation flag, even if the player wins with any of the index values IV = 8 to 13 in the first preparation state ST4 and the advantageous section, the first promotion replay prize is won. The stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that can be established is not notified, and in the situation where the second preparation state ST5 is an advantageous section, the index value IV = 8 to 13 is won. Even so, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enables the establishment of the second promotion replay winning is not notified. On the other hand, when the value of the advantageous end preparation flag is "0", the first promotion replay is won when the index value IV = 8 to 13 is won in the situation where the first preparation state ST4 is the advantageous section. When the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enables the winning is notified, and the index value IV = 8 to 13 is won in the second preparation state ST5, which is an advantageous section. Is notified of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enable the establishment of the second promotion replay winning.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1102, the first display data setting process is executed (step S1103). In the setting process of the first display data, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enables the establishment of the first promotion replay winning based on the information of the winning combination among the index values IV = 8 to 13. The display control of the combined display unit 66 is performed so that the display of the value corresponding to the above is started by the combined display unit 66. As a result, for example, as shown in FIG. 8B, the values corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enable the establishment of the first promotion replay winning are displayed on the combined display unit 66. The display of the combined display unit 66 is continued until all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped in this game. Further, the first stop order command is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S1104). In the first stop order command, information is set so that the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enables the establishment of the first promotion replay prize in this game can be specified by the effect side MPU 92.

When the player wins in any of the index values IV = 8 to 13 in the second preparation state ST5 (step S1105: YES), "1" is set in the advantageous section flag of the main RAM 74 and the advantageous end of the main RAM 74. It is determined whether or not the value of the preparation flag is "0" (step S1106). If an affirmative determination is made in step S1106, the second display data setting process is executed (step S1107). In the setting process of the second display data, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enables the establishment of the second promotion replay winning based on the information of the winning combination of the index values IV = 8 to 13 this time. The display control of the combined display unit 66 is performed so that the display of the value corresponding to the above is started by the combined display unit 66. As a result, for example, as shown in FIG. 8B, the values corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enable the establishment of the second promotion replay winning are displayed on the combined display unit 66. The display of the combined display unit 66 is continued until all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped in this game. Further, the second stop order command is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S1108). In the second stop order command, information is set so that the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enables the establishment of the second promotion replay prize in this game can be specified by the effect side MPU 92.

FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing a notification process executed by the effect side MPU 92. The notification process is repeatedly executed in the effect side MPU 92 with a relatively short cycle (for example, 4 msec).

When the first stop order command or the second stop order command is received from the main MPU 72 (step S1201: YES), an image of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R corresponding to the stop order command received this time is displayed on the image display device. Set the data required for display in 63 (step S1202). However, at this timing, the image of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R corresponding to the current stop order command is not displayed on the image display device 63. After that, a value corresponding to the notification delay period is set in the measurement counter provided in the effect side RAM 94 (step S1203). The notification delay period is set as a period shorter than the acceleration period from the start of rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to the constant speed rotation, and is set to, for example, 0.5 msec. The value set in the measurement counter is subtracted each time the notification process is started.

In the notification process, when the notification delay period measured by using the measurement counter of the effect side RAM 94 has elapsed (step S1204: YES), the notification start process is executed (step S1205). In the notification start process, an image is displayed on the image display device 63 based on the data set in step S1202. As a result, for example, as shown in FIG. 8A, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R corresponding to the current stop order command is displayed on the image display device 63. The display of the image display device 63 is continued until all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped in this game.

In the case of the above configuration, the effect side MPU 92 directly starts the notification corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R on the combined display unit 66 which is directly controlled by the main side MPU 72. The display-controlled image display device 63 starts the notification corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. As a result, when the notification regarding the winning combination is executed by the image display device 63, the notification regarding the winning combination is surely executed by the combined display unit 66, and the reel executed by the image display device 63. When confirming whether or not the notification corresponding to the stop order of 32L, 32M, 32R is due to fraudulent activity using the display contents of the combined display unit 66, the confirmation can be performed at an arbitrary timing. It will be possible.

It should be noted that the notification corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the combined display unit 66 and the notification corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the image display device 63 end at the same or substantially the same timing. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the combined display unit 66 is completed after the notification corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the image display device 63 is completed. The notification corresponding to the above may be terminated, and the order may be reversed.

FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing RT state processing (step S609). As described above, since the corresponding processing at the end of the game is executed when the game ends, the RT state processing is also executed when the game ends.

First, the value of the RT game number counter of the main RAM 74 is subtracted by 1 (step S1301). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the RT game number counter after the subtraction of 1 is "0" (step S1302). When the value of the RT game number counter is "0" (step S1302: YES), it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the advantageous section flag of the main RAM 74 (step S1303). That is, it is determined whether or not the game section is an advantageous section. As already explained, the RT state ST6 is basically an advantageous section, but the transition to the RT state ST6 occurs when the number of continuous games in the advantageous section exceeds the number of trigger games (specifically, 1450 games). If so, it becomes a normal section in the RT state ST6. Then, in the situation where the RT state ST6 is a normal section and the SB winning data is not set and the final game of the RT state ST6 is reached, a negative determination is made in step S1303. On the other hand, when the final game of the RT state ST6 is reached in a situation where the RT state ST6 is an advantageous section, an affirmative determination is made in step S1303.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1303, the continuous lottery process is executed (step S1304). In the continuous lottery process, the continuous lottery table corresponding to the information on the continuation rate of the RT state ST6 stored in the main RAM 74 is read from the main ROM 73. Then, by collating the value of the lottery counter that is periodically updated in the main RAM 74 with the continuous lottery table, it is determined whether or not the lottery is a continuous winning. As already explained, the probability of continuous winning in the continuous lottery process is 5%, 60%, 70%, 80%, 90% and 100%.

If the continuous winning is achieved (step S1305: YES), the RT status process is terminated after the value of the status counter is set to "2" (step S1307). In this case, "1" is set in the advantageous section flag of the main RAM 74, and the value of the advantageous end preparation flag of the main RAM 74 is "0". Therefore, it will shift to the first preparation state ST4 in a situation where the transition condition to the RT state ST6 is satisfied in the advantageous section.

On the other hand, when the continuation is disengaged (step S1305: NO), "1" is set in the advantageous end preparation flag of the main RAM 74 (step S1306), and the value of the status counter is set to "2" (step). S1307), this RT state processing is terminated. In this case, "1" is set in the advantageous section flag of the main RAM 74, and "1" is set in the advantageous end preparation flag of the main RAM 74. Therefore, it will shift to the first preparation state ST4 in a situation where the transition condition to the RT state ST6 is not satisfied in the advantageous section.

Next, the relationship between the probability of shifting from the normal section to the advantageous section and the probability of giving the profit related to the RT state ST6 after shifting to the advantageous section and the set value will be described.

As already explained, the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section is
Either (1) the game in which the SB winning data is set ends in the situation of the normal section, or (2) the game in which the first BB prize is established ends in the situation of the normal section occurs. Occurs when In addition to this,
(3) The transition to the advantageous section also occurs when the second promotion replay winning is established and the transition to the RT state ST6 occurs in the situation of the normal section.

The probability of occurrence of any of these (1) to (3) is common to all of the "setting 1" to "setting 6" of the slot machine 10. This content will be described in detail. FIG. 30A is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between the point value PV set for each combination and the set value when the combination lottery process (FIG. 13) is executed in the normal state ST1.

As already explained, the winning data set to the index values IV = 1 to 6 and their index values IV = 1 to also in the post-bonus state ST3, the first preparation state ST4, the second preparation state ST5, and the RT state ST6. The point value PV set to 6 is the same as in the case of the normal state ST1. Further, the winning data set to the index value IV = 7 is the normal replay winning data regardless of which of the normal state ST1, the post-bonus state ST3, the first preparation state ST4, the second preparation state ST5, and the RT state ST6. Although common, the point value PV set to the index value IV = 7 is different depending on each game state ST1, ST3 to ST6. However, the point value PV set to the index value IV = 7 is common to all the set values of "setting 1" to "setting 6" regardless of the gaming states ST1, ST3 to ST6.

As shown in FIG. 30 (a), among the index values IV = 1 to 7, the combination in which the point value PV differs depending on the set values of “setting 1” to “setting 6”, that is, the winning probability differs, is the bell winning data. Index value IV = 1 with watermelon winning data set, index value IV = 2 with watermelon winning data set, index value IV = 3 with cherry winning data set, and index value IV = 5 with second BB winning data set. The index value IV = 4 in which the first BB winning data is set, the index value IV = 6 in which the SB winning data is set, and the index value IV = 7 in which the normal replay winning data is set are all won. The probability is common to all the set values of "setting 1" to "setting 6". In this case, the SB winning data for causing the trigger of (1) above is set to the index value IV = 6. As a result, the probability that the trigger of (1) above occurs is common to all the set values of "setting 1" to "setting 6".

The first BB winning data for causing the opportunity of (2) above is set to the index value IV = 4, and the probability that the first BB winning is established when the first BB winning data is set is "setting 1". ~ It does not fluctuate according to the set value of "setting 6" and is common. As a result, the probability that the trigger of (2) above occurs is common to all the set values of "setting 1" to "setting 6".

As already explained, the trigger of (3) above is that the reels 32L and 32M are won in the second preparation state ST5 at any of the index values IV = 8 to 13 and in the stop order corresponding to the index value IV that is the winning target. , 32R is stopped and the second promotion replay prize is established. In this case, the point value PV set to the index value IV = 8 to 13 in the second preparation state ST5 is common to all the setting values of "setting 1" to "setting 6", and the second preparation In the state ST5, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enables the establishment of the second promotion replay winning regardless of whether the set value is "setting 1" to "setting 6" in the normal section is Not notified. As a result, the probability that the trigger of (3) above will occur is common to all the set values of "setting 1" to "setting 6". The index values IV = 8 to 13 also exist in the first preparation state ST4, but the point value PV set to these index values IV = 8 to 13 is set to "setting 1" to "setting 6". It is common to all set values.

In the above configuration, the index values IV = 1 to 3 and 5 in which the winning probability fluctuates according to the set values of "setting 1" to "setting 6" are not set as an opportunity to shift to the advantageous section. Therefore, the probability of shifting from the normal section to the advantageous section is common to all the set values of "setting 1" to "setting 6". As a result, regarding the frequency of transition from the normal section to the advantageous section, it is possible to prevent the advantage or disadvantage due to the set value from occurring.

In the configuration where the probability of shifting to the advantageous section is common to all the set values as described above, when the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section is performed as described above, the profit related to the RT state ST6 is given in the advantageous section. The probability is also common to all the set values of "setting 1" to "setting 6". In detail, in both the case where the SB winning data is set as described above and the case where the first BB prize is established, the game to be started first in the advantageous section when shifting from the normal section to the advantageous section. The lottery process for shifting to the RT state ST6 is executed at. This transition lottery process is surely executed in the game that is first started in the advantageous section when the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section is performed, and the set value is set for whether or not the transition lottery process is executed. It is irrelevant.

Further, as described above, the tables referred to in the lottery process for shifting to the RT state ST6 are the first table for the normal state (FIG. 21A) and the second table for the normal state if the normal state is ST1. (FIG. 21 (b)), which is a table for various states (FIG. 21 (c)) in the post-bonus state ST3, the first preparation state ST4, and the second preparation state ST5, and the RT state ST6. If it is, it is a table for the RT state (FIG. 21 (d)), and if it is the first BB state, it is a table for the first BB state (FIG. 21 (e)). Although each of these tables differs in the selection mode of the winning probability and the continuation rate selected when the winning result is obtained, it is common to all the setting values of "Setting 1" to "Setting 6". And, as already explained, the probability of shifting from the normal section to the advantageous section is also common to all the set values of "setting 1" to "setting 6". Furthermore, when the second promotion replay prize is established in the normal section, the RT state ST6 is set to the advantageous section regardless of which of "setting 1" to "setting 6". Therefore, not only the frequency of transition from the normal section to the advantageous section, but also the probability that the transition condition to the RT state ST6 is satisfied when the transition to the advantageous section is triggered is also the probability that the transition condition to the RT state ST6 is satisfied in all the set values of "setting 1" to "setting 6". It is common. As a result, it is possible to prevent an advantage or disadvantage due to the set value from occurring with respect to the probability that the transition condition to the RT state ST6 is satisfied when the transition to the advantageous section is triggered.

The lottery process for shifting to the RT state ST6 is also executed when a predetermined winning combination is won in a situation where the first BB state is an advantageous section and the conditions for shifting to the RT state ST6 are not satisfied. In addition, it is possible to promote the continuation rate of the RT state ST6 if a predetermined combination is won in the situation where the first BB state is an advantageous section and the conditions for transition to the RT state ST6 are satisfied. The promotion lottery process is executed. In this case, the probability that the transition lottery process and the promotion lottery process will be executed, and the probability that the winning result will be obtained in each lottery process are also common to all the set values of "Setting 1" to "Setting 6". .. This content will be described in detail. FIG. 30B is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between the point value PV set for each combination and the set value when the combination lottery process (FIG. 13) is executed in the first BB state.

As shown in FIG. 30B, the index values IV = 1 to 4 are common to all the set values having the winning probabilities of "setting 1" to "setting 6". In this case, the predetermined combinations that trigger the execution of the lottery process for shifting to the RT state ST6 and the lottery process for promoting the continuation rate in the first BB state are the index values IV = 2 and 3. Further, when a predetermined combination is won in the first BB state, if the condition for shifting to the RT state ST6 is not satisfied, the lottery process for shifting to the RT state ST6 is surely executed, and the process shifts to the RT state ST6. If the transition condition of is satisfied, the promotion lottery process of the continuation rate is surely executed on condition that the maximum continuation rate is not reached. As a result, the probability that the predetermined combination is won and the transition lottery process or the promotion lottery process is executed in the first BB state is common to all the set values of "setting 1" to "setting 6". Further, the probability of winning the transition in the transition lottery process executed in this case and the probability of being executed in the promotion lottery process are also common to all the set values of "setting 1" to "setting 6". As a result, it becomes possible to make the probability that a predetermined combination is won in the first BB state and a profit is given for the RT state ST6 common to all the set values of "setting 1" to "setting 6". Therefore, regarding the granting of the profit, it is possible to prevent the advantage or disadvantage due to the set value from occurring.

Incidentally, even if the transition to the second BB state occurs in the normal section, the transition to the advantageous section does not occur. Further, in the second BB state, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 30 (c), for the index value IV = 1, the winning probability is common to all the set values of "setting 1" to "setting 6". For the index values IV = 2 to 4, the winning probabilities differ depending on the set values of "setting 1" to "setting 6". Further, as described above, the winning probability of the index value IV = 5 in which the second BB winning data is set depends on the setting values of "setting 1" to "setting 6" regardless of the gaming states ST1, ST3 to ST6. Is different. On the other hand, in the second BB state, the transition lottery process to the RT state ST6 and the promotion lottery process of the continuation rate are not executed regardless of whether or not the predetermined combination is won.

With the above configuration, the probability of shifting from the normal section to the advantageous section and the probability of giving the profit related to the RT state ST6 after shifting to the advantageous section are all set to "Setting 1" to "Setting 6". It is possible to make the set values common. Therefore, regarding the probability of shifting from the normal section to the advantageous section and the probability of giving the benefit related to the RT state ST6 after shifting to the advantageous section, it is possible to prevent the advantage or disadvantage due to the set value from occurring. ..

Next, a specific processing configuration that enables various settings of the game section and a specific processing configuration for imparting a benefit related to the RT state ST6 will be described. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing a game section control process executed by the main MPU 72. The control process of the game section is executed in step S601 in the corresponding process (FIG. 22) at the end of the game. Further, as described above, since the corresponding processing at the end of the game is executed when the game ends, the control processing of the game section is also executed when the game ends.

First, the value of the total number of games counter 74a provided in the main RAM 74 is added by 1 (step S1401). The total number of games counter 74a is a counter for measuring the number of games digested regardless of the game state and the game section.

In the game section control process, when the second promotion replay winning is established in this game (step S1402: YES), it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the advantageous section flag of the main RAM 74. , It is determined whether or not the current game section is an advantageous section (step S1403). When the current game section is not an advantageous section but a normal section (step S1403: NO), "1" is set in the advantageous section flag of the main RAM 74 and "1" is set in the advantageous start flag provided in the main RAM 74. Is set, and the value of the continuous game number counter of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S1404). As a result, when the second promotion replay winning is established in the normal section and the game shifts to the RT state ST6, the shift to the advantageous section occurs at the end of the game. The advantageous start flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify that the first game has not yet started after shifting to the advantageous section.

After that, a lighting process for turning the advantageous section display unit 67 into a lighting state is executed (step S1405). As a result, when the advantageous section is started, the advantageous section display unit 67 is turned on, and by visually checking the advantageous section display unit 67, the manager of the game hall or the like grasps whether or not the advantageous section is an advantageous section. It becomes possible.

After that, the continuation rate setting process is executed (step S1406). In the continuation rate setting process, 50%, which is the lowest continuation rate as the continuation rate of the RT state ST6, is stored in the main RAM 74. As a result, the advantage when the second promotion replay winning is established and the transition to the RT state ST6 occurs in the situation where the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is not notified in the normal section becomes extremely high. It is possible to prevent it from being reeled. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the configuration may be such that the highest continuation rate is selected, or the intermediate continuation rate may be selected. Further, by executing the lottery process in the continuation rate setting process, any of the six levels of continuation rate may be determined by the lottery. In this case, the configuration may have the highest probability that the lowest continuation rate will be selected, the configuration may have the highest probability that the highest continuation rate will be selected, and the probability that the intermediate continuation rate will be selected is the highest. The configuration may be higher, and the expected value of the continuation rate may be lower than when the second promotion replay prize is established in the advantageous section and the transition to the RT state ST6 occurs, and the second promotion replay may be performed in the advantageous section. The expected value of the continuation rate may be higher than that in the case where the winning is established and the transition to the RT state ST6 occurs.

When the current game section is an advantageous section (step S1403: YES), it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the advantageous end preparation flag of the main RAM 74 (step S1407). As already explained, the advantageous end preparation flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify that the transition condition to the RT state ST6 is not satisfied in the advantageous section, and "1" is set in the advantageous end preparation flag. If it is, it means that the condition for shifting to the RT state ST6 is not satisfied in the advantageous section. When "1" is set in the advantageous end preparation flag (step S1407: YES), after clearing the value of the advantageous end preparation flag "0" (step S1408), the continuation rate setting process already described is executed. (Step S1406). As a result, if the second promotion replay prize is established and the transition to the RT state ST6 is established in a situation where the transition condition to the RT state ST6 is not satisfied in the advantageous section, the RT state ST6 is entered at the end of the game. The transition condition is satisfied and the continuation rate of the RT state ST6 is set.

In the game section control process, when the value of the advantageous section flag of the main RAM 74 is "0", that is, when the game section is a normal section and SB winning data is set in this game (step). S1409 and step S1410: YES), "1" is set for each of the advantageous section flag and the advantageous start flag of the main RAM 74, and the value of the continuous game number counter of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S1411). As a result, when the SB winning data is set in the normal section, the transition to the advantageous section occurs at the end of the game. In addition, a lighting process for setting the advantageous section display unit 67 to the lighting state is executed (step S1412). As a result, when the advantageous section is started, the advantageous section display unit 67 is turned on, and by visually checking the advantageous section display unit 67, the manager of the game hall or the like grasps whether or not the advantageous section is an advantageous section. It becomes possible.

In the game section control process, when the value of the advantageous section flag of the main RAM 74 is "0", that is, when the game section is a normal section and the first BB prize is established in this game (step S1409). And step S1413: YES), "1" is set in each of the advantageous section flag and the advantageous start flag of the main RAM 74, and the value of the continuous game number counter of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S1414). As a result, if the first BB prize is established in the normal section, the transition to the advantageous section will occur at the end of the game. In addition, a lighting process for setting the advantageous section display unit 67 to the lighting state is executed (step S1415). As a result, when the advantageous section is started, the advantageous section display unit 67 is turned on, and by visually checking the advantageous section display unit 67, the manager of the game hall or the like grasps whether or not the advantageous section is an advantageous section. It becomes possible.

Here, in order to execute the transition lottery process to the RT state ST6 when the SB winning data is set in the normal section and the section shifts to the advantageous section, or when the first BB winning is established in the normal section and the section shifts to the advantageous section. The processing configuration of is described. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing a transition trigger process of the RT state ST6 executed by the main MPU 72. The transition trigger process of the RT state ST6 is executed in step S413 in the combination lottery process (FIG. 13). Further, since the winning combination lottery process is executed when the game is started, the transition trigger process of the RT state ST6 is also executed when the game is started.

First, by determining whether or not "1" is set in the advantageous start flag of the main RAM 74, it is determined whether or not the game is started first after the transition to the advantageous section occurs (). Step S1501). When an affirmative judgment is made in step S1501, after clearing the advantageous start flag of the main RAM 74 to "0" (step S1502), whether or not the information on the continuation rate of the RT state ST6 is set in the main RAM 74 is determined. Determination (step S1503). When "1" is set in the advantageous start flag and the information on the continuation rate of the RT state ST6 is set, the second promotion replay winning is established in the normal section to enter the advantageous section. This corresponds to the situation where the migration has occurred. In this case, an affirmative determination is made in step S1503, and the transition trigger processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when the SB winning data is set in the normal section or when the first BB winning is established in the normal section, "1" is set in the advantageous start flag and the information on the continuation rate of the RT state ST6 is set. It will be a situation that has not been done. In this case, an affirmative determination is made in step S1503.

If a negative determination is made in step S1503, a lottery process for shifting to the RT state ST6 is executed (step S1504). In the transition lottery process, if the current gaming state is the normal state ST1, by checking the value of the ceiling game number counter of the main RAM 74, the number of remaining games up to the normal side upper limit game number in the normal state ST1 is 50 games. Determine if there are more than. Then, when the number of games remaining up to the maximum number of games on the normal side in the normal state ST1 is larger than 50 games, the first table for the normal state (FIG. 21A) is read from the main ROM 73, and the first table for the normal state (FIG. 21A) is read out, and in the normal state ST1. When the number of remaining games up to the upper limit number of games on the normal side is 50 games or less, the second table for the normal state (FIG. 21 (b)) is read out. If the current gaming state is any of the post-bonus state ST3, the first preparation state ST4, and the second preparation state ST5, the tables for various states (FIG. 21C) are read from the main ROM 73. If the current gaming state is the RT state ST6, the RT state table (FIG. 21 (d)) is read from the main ROM 73. If the current gaming state is the first BB state, the table for the first BB state (FIG. 21 (e)) is read from the main ROM 73. In the transition lottery process, after reading any of the above tables, the value of the lottery counter that is periodically updated in the main RAM 74 is read, and the value of the read lottery counter is collated with the read table. ..

If the result of the shift lottery process to the RT state ST6 is an error result (step S1505: NO), "1" is set in the advantageous end preparation flag provided in the main RAM 74 (step S1506). As already explained, the advantageous end preparation flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify that the transition condition to the RT state ST6 is not satisfied in the advantageous section, and "1" is set in the advantageous end preparation flag. If it is, it means that the condition for shifting to the RT state ST6 is not satisfied in the advantageous section. Therefore, when "1" is set in the advantageous end preparation flag, the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enable the establishment of the first promotion replay winning even if it is an advantageous section in the first preparation state ST4 are stopped. The order is not notified, and when "1" is set in the advantageous end preparation flag, the second promotion replay prize can be established even if it is an advantageous section in the second preparation state ST5. The stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is not notified.

If the result of the lottery process for shifting to the RT state ST6 is the winning result (step S1505: YES), the value of the advantageous end preparation flag of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S1507). As a result, the condition for shifting to the RT state ST6 is satisfied in the advantageous section. Further, the storage process of the continuation rate is executed (step S1508). In the continuation rate storage process, information on the continuation rate selected when a winning result is obtained in the transition lottery process to the RT state ST6 is stored in the main RAM 74.

When the game shifts to the advantageous section due to the above processing configuration, the shift lottery process to the RT state ST6 is executed in the game first started in the advantageous section. In addition, the transition lottery process is performed in a lottery mode according to the game state at that time.

The state in which the transition lottery process to the RT state ST6 is executed in the normal state ST1 will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. 33. FIG. 33 (a) shows a period in which the game section is an advantageous section, FIG. 33 (b) shows a period in which the normal state ST1 is set, and FIG. 33 (c) shows a normal side upper limit game in the normal state ST1. A period in which the number of remaining games up to the number is 50 games or less (hereinafter, this period is also referred to as a pre-ceiling period) is shown, FIG. 33 (d) shows the timing when SB winning data is set, and FIG. 33 (e) shows. Indicates the timing at which the transition lottery process to the RT state ST6 is executed, FIG. 33 (f) shows the period in which "1" is set in the advantageous end preparation flag of the main RAM 74, and FIG. 33 (g) shows the period. The period of the first preparation state ST4 is shown, FIG. 33 (h) shows the period of the second preparation state ST5, and FIG. 33 (i) shows the period of the RT state ST6.

First, a case where SB winning data is set only before the ceiling pre-ceiling period in the normal state ST1 will be described.

As shown in FIGS. 33 (a) and 33 (b), SB winning data is set as shown in FIG. 33 (d) at the timing of t1 which is a normal section and is in the normal state ST1. In this case, at the end of the game in which the SB winning data is set, the game section shifts from the normal section to the advantageous section as shown in FIG. 33 (a). Further, at the timing of t2, as shown in FIG. 33 (e), the transition lottery process to the RT state ST6 is executed. In this case, since the first table for the normal state (FIG. 21A) is referred to, the result of the transition lottery process is surely out of order. Therefore, at the timing of t2, “1” is set in the advantageous end preparation flag of the main RAM 74 as shown in FIG. 33 (f). The detailed processing configuration will be described later, but when "1" is set in the advantageous end preparation flag of the main RAM 74 in the situation where the normal state ST1 is an advantageous section, the lottery process for shifting to the RT state ST6 is executed. The initialization process of the advantageous section is executed at the end of the played game, that is, at the end of the first game executed after shifting to the advantageous section. Therefore, at the timing of t3, the game section shifts from the advantageous section to the normal section as shown in FIG. 33 (a), and the value of the advantageous end preparation flag is cleared to “0” as shown in FIG. 33 (f). To.

After that, at the timing of t4, the number of remaining games up to the upper limit number of games on the normal side in the normal state ST1 becomes 50 games or less, so that the period before the ceiling is set as shown in FIG. 33 (c). In this pre-ceiling period, the SB winning data is not set, and the number of games continued in the normal state ST1 reaches the normal side upper limit game number at the timing of t5, and as shown in FIG. 33 (c), in front of the ceiling. As the period ends, the gaming state shifts from the normal state ST1 to the first preparation state ST4 as shown in FIGS. 33 (b) and 33 (g). This first preparation state ST4 is started in a situation where the game section is a normal section. In the first preparation state ST4, which is a normal section, the index value IV = 8 to 13 is won in the combination lottery process (FIG. 13). In this case, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enables the establishment of the first promotion replay winning is not notified. Then, since the first promotion replay winning cannot be established in this game, the gaming state is changed from the first preparation state ST4 to the normal state at the timing of t6 as shown in FIGS. 33 (b) and 33 (g). Move to ST1.

Next, a case where SB winning data is set in the period before the ceiling in the normal state ST1 will be described.

As shown in FIGS. 33 (a) and 33 (b), the number of remaining games up to the upper limit number of games on the normal side in the normal state ST1 is 50 games or less at the timing of t7, which is the normal section and the normal state ST1. As a result, the period before the ceiling is set as shown in FIG. 33 (c). Then, the SB winning data is set as shown in FIG. 33 (d) at the timing of t8, which is the period before the ceiling. In this case, at the end of the game in which the SB winning data is set, the game section shifts from the normal section to the advantageous section as shown in FIG. 33 (a). Further, at the timing of t9, as shown in FIG. 33 (e), the transition lottery process to the RT state ST6 is executed. In this case, since the second table for the normal state (FIG. 21 (b)) is referred to, the result of the transition lottery process is surely the winning result. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 33 (f), "1" is not set in the advantageous end preparation flag of the main RAM 74, and the value of the advantageous end preparation flag is maintained at "0". The detailed processing configuration will be described later, but when the value of the advantageous end preparation flag is “0” in the situation where the normal state ST1 is the advantageous section, the advantageous section is maintained.

After that, when the number of games continued in the normal state ST1 reaches the upper limit number of games on the normal side at the timing of t10, the pre-ceiling period ends as shown in FIG. 33 (c), and FIGS. 33 (b) and 33 show. As shown in (g), the gaming state shifts from the normal state ST1 to the first preparation state ST4. This first preparation state ST4 is started in a state where the game section is an advantageous section and the transition condition to the RT state ST6 is satisfied. In the situation where the first preparation state is ST4 and the section is advantageous, the index value IV = 8 to 13 is won in the combination lottery process (FIG. 13). In this case, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enables the establishment of the first promotion replay winning is notified. Then, by establishing the first promotion replay prize in this game, the gaming state is changed from the first preparation state ST4 to the second preparation state ST5 as shown in FIGS. 33 (g) and 33 (h) at the timing of t11. Move to.

This second preparation state ST5 is started in a state where the game section is an advantageous section and the transition condition to the RT state ST6 is satisfied. In the second preparation state ST5, which is an advantageous section, the index value IV = 8 to 13 is won in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 13). In this case, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enables the establishment of the second promotion replay winning is notified. Then, by establishing the second promotion replay prize in this game, the gaming state shifts from the second preparation state ST5 to the RT state ST6 as shown in FIGS. 33 (h) and 33 (i) at the timing of t12. do.

With the above configuration, when the SB winning data is set in the normal state ST1 and the period before the ceiling, the transition condition to the RT state ST6 is satisfied. This makes it possible to compensate for the long stay in the normal state ST1 without both the BB state ST2 and the RT state ST6 occurring.

In the normal state ST1, if the number of continuous games in the normal state ST1 reaches the upper limit number of games on the normal side without setting the SB winning data in the period before the ceiling, the normal section remains in the first preparation state ST4. Transition. As a result, it is possible to increase the importance of setting the SB winning data in the limited period of the pre-ceiling period, and it is possible to increase the attention of the game in the pre-ceiling period.

Even if the SB winning data is set in the pre-ceiling period and the transition condition to the RT state ST6 is satisfied, the normal state ST1 does not end in the middle, and the number of continuous games in the normal state ST1 becomes the upper limit number of games on the normal side. When it is reached, the game state shifts from the normal state ST1 to the first preparation state ST4. As a result, it is possible to achieve the excellent effect as described above while keeping the transition process of the gaming state constant.

Next, the BB process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 34. The BB process is executed in step S602 in the corresponding process (FIG. 22) at the end of the game. Further, as described above, since the corresponding processing at the end of the game is executed when the game ends, the BB processing is also executed when the game ends.

When the first BB prize is established in this game (step S1601: YES), "1" is set in the first BB flag provided in the main RAM 74 (step S1602). The first BB flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify that it is in the first BB state. After that, the value of the total payout counter provided in the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S1603). The total payout counter is a counter for measuring the total number of game media given to the player in one BB state ST2 by the main MPU 72.

When the second BB winning is established in this game (step S1604: YES), "1" is set in the second BB flag provided in the main RAM 74 (step S1605). The second BB flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify that it is in the second BB state. After that, the value of the total payout counter of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S1603).

When "1" is set in the first BB flag of the main RAM 74 (step S1606: YES), the first BB process for controlling the progress of the first BB state is executed (step S1607). When "1" is set in the second BB flag of the main RAM 74 (step S1608: YES), the second BB process for controlling the progress of the second BB state is executed (step S1609).

FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the process for the first BB in step S1607.

When the winning is achieved with the index value IV = 2 or 3 in the advantageous section (step S1701: YES), it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the advantageous end preparation flag of the main RAM 74 (step). S1702). When the first BB prize is established in the normal section, the transition lottery process (step S1504) to the RT state ST6 is executed when the first game in the first BB state is started as described above. Then, if the result is out of the transition lottery process, "1" is set in the advantageous end preparation flag of the main RAM 74. In this case, an affirmative determination is made in step S1702.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1702, a lottery process for shifting to the RT state ST6 is executed (step S1703). In the transition lottery process, the transition table in the BB corresponding to the winning combination is read from the main ROM 73, the value of the lottery counter that is periodically updated in the main RAM 74 is read, and the read lottery counter is read. The value of is collated against the migration table in the above BB. In the transition table in BB corresponding to the index value IV = 2, the probability of winning the transition to the RT state ST6 is set to 25%. In addition, the continuation rate of the RT state ST6 that can be selected when the winning result is obtained is the lower 4 stages of the 6 stages, and the selection rates of these 4 stages are equal. In the transition table in BB corresponding to the index value IV = 3, the probability of winning the transition to the RT state ST6 is set to 50%. In addition, the continuation rate of the RT state ST6 that can be selected when the winning result is obtained is four stages excluding the maximum 100% and the minimum 50%, and the selection rates of these four stages are equal. ..

If the result of the lottery process for shifting to the RT state ST6 is the winning result (step S1704: YES), the value of the advantageous end preparation flag of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S1705). As a result, the condition for shifting to the RT state ST6 is satisfied in the advantageous section. Further, the storage process of the continuation rate is executed (step S1706). In the storage of the continuation rate, the information of the continuation rate selected when the winning result is obtained in the lottery process for shifting to the RT state ST6 in step S1703 is stored in the main RAM 74. If the result of the lottery process for shifting to the RT state ST6 is an error result (step S1704: NO), the process of step S1705 is not executed, so that "1" is set in the advantageous end preparation flag of the main RAM 74. The state is maintained.

If a negative determination is made in step S1702, it means that the condition for shifting to the RT state ST6 has already been satisfied, so that the lottery process for promoting the continuation rate is executed instead of the lottery process for shifting to the RT state ST6 ( Step S1707). In the promotion lottery process, the promotion table corresponding to the winning combination is read from the main ROM 73, the value of the lottery counter that is periodically updated in the main RAM 74 is read, and the read lottery counter value is used. Match against the promotion table. In the promotion table corresponding to the index value IV = 2, the probability of winning the promotion is set to 25%. In the promotion table corresponding to the index value IV = 3, the probability of winning the promotion is set to 50%. If the continuation rate has already reached the maximum, the promotion lottery process for the continuation rate (step S1707) is not executed.

When the result of the promotion lottery process of the continuation rate is the winning result (step S1708: YES), the continuation rate update process is executed (step S1709). In the continuation rate update process, the continuation rate information stored in the main RAM 74 is updated so that the continuation rate of the RT state ST6 is one step higher.

In the first BB process, in addition to the above-mentioned various processes, it is determined whether or not the game medium has been added in this game (step S1710). When the game medium is assigned (step S1710: YES), the information on the number of game media assigned in this game is added to the total payout counter of the main RAM 74 (step S1711). Then, when the value of the total payout counter after the addition becomes equal to or greater than the end reference number (for example, "350") (step S1712: YES), the first BB flag of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S1713). As a result, the first BB state ends. When the first BB flag is cleared to "0", the first BB end command is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92, and the effect side MPU 92 receiving the first BB end command executes the end effect of the first BB state. The upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 may be controlled. Further, "1" is set in the status counter of the main RAM 74 (step S1714). As a result, the post-bonus state process (step S606) is executed in the corresponding process (FIG. 22) at the end of the next game.

FIG. 36 is a time chart for explaining the progress of the game when the first BB state occurs. FIG. 36 (a) shows a period in which the gaming section is an advantageous section, FIG. 36 (b) shows a period in which the gaming state is the normal state ST1, and FIG. 36 (c) shows the period in which the gaming state is the first BB. FIG. 36 (d) shows the setting status of the advantageous end preparation flag of the main RAM 74, and FIG. 36 (e) shows the transition lottery process to the RT state ST6 and the promotion lottery process of the continuation rate. 36 (f) shows the period during which the game state is the post-bonus state ST3, and FIG. 36 (g) shows the timing when the lottery process for giving profit is executed. 1 The period in which the preparation state is ST4 is shown, FIG. 36 (h) shows the period in which the gaming state is in the second preparation state ST5, and FIG. 36 (i) shows the period in which the gaming state is in the RT state ST6. Indicates the period.

First, a case where the transition to the first BB state is performed in the normal section and the transition to the RT state ST6 executed in the first game of the first BB state is performed will be described.

When the first BB prize is established at the timing of t1 which is the normal state ST1 and the normal section, the gaming state is changed from the normal state ST1 to the first BB as shown in FIGS. 36 (b) and 36 (c). At the same time as shifting to the state, the gaming section shifts from the normal section to the advantageous section as shown in FIG. 36 (a). Further, as shown in FIG. 36 (e), the transition lottery process to the RT state ST6 is executed. As a result of the transition winning in the transition lottery process, "1" is not set in the advantageous end preparation flag of the main RAM 74 as shown in FIG. 36 (d), and the value of the advantageous end preparation flag is "0". Is maintained. As a result, the condition for shifting to the RT state ST6 is satisfied in the advantageous section.

After that, by winning the index value IV = 2 or 3 in the BB state ST2 at the timing of t2 in the middle of the first BB state, the promotion lottery process of the continuation rate is executed as shown in FIG. 36 (e). If the winning result is obtained in the promotion lottery process, the continuation rate of the RT state ST6 set at the timing of t1 is promoted by one step, and if the result is out of the promotion lottery process, it is set at the timing of t1. The continuation rate of the RT state ST6 is maintained.

After that, when the total number of game media given in the first BB state at the timing of t3 becomes equal to or more than the end reference number, the game state is changed from the first BB state as shown in FIGS. 36 (c) and 36 (f). After the bonus, it shifts to the state ST3. In this case, it shifts to the post-bonus state ST3 in a situation where the transition condition to the RT state ST6 is satisfied in the advantageous section.

After that, since the SB winning data is set at the timing of t4 and the SB winning is not established, the gaming state is changed from the post-bonus state ST3 to the first preparation state ST4 as shown in FIGS. 36 (f) and 36 (g). Move to. Since the SB winning data is set in the advantageous section, the transition lottery process to the RT state ST6 is not executed even if the SB winning data is set.

After that, at the timing of t5, the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped according to the notified stop order, and the first promotion replay winning is established, as shown in FIGS. 36 (g) and 36 (h). As described above, the gaming state shifts from the first preparation state ST4 to the second preparation state ST5. Further, at the timing of t6, the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped according to the notified stop order, and the second promotion replay winning is established, which is shown in FIGS. 36 (h) and 36 (i). As described above, the gaming state shifts from the second preparation state ST5 to the RT state ST6.

As described above, the transition to the RT state ST6 executed in the first game that has transitioned to the first BB state will result in a winning result in the lottery process, so that the transition to the RT state ST6 will basically occur. .. As a result, for example, the player expects the first BB state to occur in the situation of staying in the normal state ST1, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, if a winning result is obtained in the transition lottery process to the RT state ST6 executed in the first game that has transitioned to the first BB state, the index value IV = 2 or 3 is won in the first BB state. The continuation rate promotion lottery process is executed each time, and the continuation rate of the RT state ST6 is promoted by one step by the winning result in the promotion lottery process. As a result, when the player shifts to the first BB state, the player expects to win the transition to the RT state ST6 at an early stage, and also expects to win the index value IV = 2 or 3 in the first BB state. Will be done. Therefore, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the game in the first BB state.

Next, a case where the transition condition to the RT state ST6 is not satisfied in the first BB state when the transition to the first BB state is performed in the normal section will be described.

When the first BB prize is established at the timing of t7, which is the normal section and the normal state ST1, the gaming state is changed from the normal state ST1 to the first BB as shown in FIGS. 36 (b) and 36 (c). At the same time as shifting to the state, the gaming section shifts from the normal section to the advantageous section as shown in FIG. 36 (a). Further, as shown in FIG. 36 (e), the transition lottery process to the RT state ST6 is executed. As a result of the deviation in the transition lottery process, "1" is set in the advantageous end preparation flag of the main RAM 74 as shown in FIG. 36 (d). As a result, it is an advantageous section and the condition for shifting to the RT state ST6 is not satisfied.

After that, by winning the index value IV = 2 or 3 in the BB state ST2 at the timing of t8 in the middle of the first BB state, the transition lottery process to the RT state ST6 is executed again as shown in FIG. 36 (e). Will be done. As a result of the deviation even in the transition lottery process, the state in which "1" is set in the advantageous end preparation flag of the main RAM 74 is maintained as shown in FIG. 36 (d).

After that, when the total number of game media given in the first BB state at the timing of t9 becomes equal to or more than the end reference number, the game state is changed from the first BB state as shown in FIGS. 36 (c) and 36 (f). After the bonus, it shifts to the state ST3. In this case, it shifts to the post-bonus state ST3 in a situation where the transition condition to the RT state ST6 is not satisfied in the advantageous section.

After that, since the SB winning data is set at the timing of t10 and the SB winning is not established, the gaming state is changed from the post-bonus state ST3 to the first preparation state ST4 as shown in FIGS. 36 (f) and 36 (g). Move to. Since the SB winning data is set in the advantageous section, the transition lottery process to the RT state ST6 is not executed even if the SB winning data is set.

After that, at the timing of t11, even though the first promotion replay winning data is set, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enables the establishment of the first promotion replay winning is not notified to the game. Therefore, the establishment of the first promotion replay prize will be missed. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 36 (b) and 36 (g), the gaming state shifts from the first preparation state ST4 to the normal state ST1. In this case, by executing the initialization process of the advantageous section, the game section shifts from the advantageous section to the normal section as shown in FIG. 36 (a), and the main RAM 74 as shown in FIG. 36 (d). The advantageous end preparation flag of is cleared to "0".

Next, a case where the transition condition to the RT state ST6 is satisfied in a game after the first game in the first BB state will be described.

When the first BB prize is established at the timing of t12, which is the normal section and the normal state ST1, the gaming state is changed from the normal state ST1 to the first BB as shown in FIGS. 36 (b) and 36 (c). At the same time as shifting to the state, the gaming section shifts from the normal section to the advantageous section as shown in FIG. 36 (a). Further, as shown in FIG. 36 (e), the transition lottery process to the RT state ST6 is executed. As a result of the deviation in the transition lottery process, "1" is set in the advantageous end preparation flag of the main RAM 74 as shown in FIG. 36 (d). As a result, it is an advantageous section and the condition for shifting to the RT state ST6 is not satisfied.

After that, by winning the index value IV = 2 or 3 in the BB state ST2 at the timing of t13 in the middle of the first BB state, the transition lottery process to the RT state ST6 is executed again as shown in FIG. 36 (e). Will be done. By winning the transition in the transition lottery process, the advantageous end preparation flag of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" as shown in FIG. 36 (d). As a result, the condition for shifting to the RT state ST6 is satisfied in the advantageous section. After that, at each timing of t14 to t17, the same event as the timing of t3 to t6 occurs.

As described above, even if the result is out of the lottery process for shifting to the RT state ST6 executed in the first game that has shifted to the first BB state, the index value IV = 2 or 3 is won in the first BB state. As a result, the transition lottery process to the RT state ST6 is executed again, and the winning result is obtained in the transition lottery process, so that the transition condition to the RT state ST6 is satisfied. As a result, it is possible to increase the frequency with which the transition condition to the RT state ST6 is satisfied when the transition to the first BB state is established, and it is possible to increase the player's expectation for the transition to the first BB state.

If a winning result is obtained in the lottery process for shifting to the RT state ST6, the corresponding effect or notification may be executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, or the image display device 63. It may be configured not to be used. In the case of a configuration in which the effect or notification is executed, the player expects the effect or notification to be executed in the game that has transitioned to the first BB state, and at the same time, in the game that has transitioned to the first BB state. Even if the effect or notification is not executed, the player expects that the effect or notification is executed every time the index value IV = 2 or 3 is won. Further, if a winning result is obtained in the continuation rate promotion lottery process after the transition condition to the RT state ST6 is satisfied, the corresponding effect or notification is sent to the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, or the image display device 63. It may be a configuration that is executed or a configuration that is not executed.

FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the second BB process of step S1609 in the BB process (FIG. 34).

When the game medium is assigned in the current game (step S1801: YES), the information on the number of game media assigned in the current game is added to the total payout counter of the main RAM 74 (step S1802). .. Then, when the value of the total payout counter after the addition becomes equal to or greater than the end reference number (for example, "350") (step S1803: YES), the second BB flag of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S1804). As a result, the second BB state ends. When the second BB flag is cleared to "0", the second BB end command is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92, and the effect side MPU 92 receiving the second BB end command executes the end effect of the second BB state. The upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 may be controlled. Further, "1" is set in the status counter of the main RAM 74 (step S1805). As a result, the post-bonus state process (step S606) is executed in the corresponding process (FIG. 22) at the end of the next game.

As described above, in the second BB state, the transition lottery process to the RT state ST6 and the promotion lottery process of the continuation rate are not executed regardless of the result of the lottery process of the winning combination. The probability that the second BB winning data is set is different between the set values of "setting 1" to "setting 6" as described above. In such a configuration, by not executing the transition lottery process to the RT state ST6 and the promotion lottery process of the continuation rate in the second BB state, RT is triggered by the transition to the second BB state with a setting difference in the occurrence probability. It is possible to prevent the transition condition to the state ST6 from being satisfied.

FIG. 38 is a time chart for explaining the progress of the game when the second BB state occurs. FIG. 38 (a) shows a period in which the gaming section is an advantageous section, FIG. 38 (b) shows a period in which the gaming state is the normal state ST1, and FIG. 38 (c) shows the period in which the gaming state is the second BB. FIG. 38 (d) shows the setting status of the advantageous end preparation flag of the main RAM 74, and FIG. 38 (e) shows the timing at which the transition lottery process to the RT state ST6 is executed. 38 (f) shows the period in which the gaming state is the post-bonus state ST3, FIG. 38 (g) shows the period in which the gaming state is the first preparation state ST4, and FIG. 38 (h) shows the period. The period in which the gaming state is the second preparation state ST5 is shown, and FIG. 38 (i) shows the period in which the gaming state is the RT state ST6.

When the second BB prize is established at the timing of t1 which is the normal state ST1 and is the normal section, the gaming state is changed from the normal state ST1 to the second BB as shown in FIGS. 38 (b) and 38 (c). Move to the state. However, unlike the case of the first BB state, even if the second BB state is entered, the normal section is maintained without shifting to the advantageous section. Then, the normal section is maintained until the end of the second BB state. Further, as shown in FIG. 38 (d), the value of the advantageous end preparation flag of the main RAM 74 is maintained at "0" as it is maintained in the normal section. When the transition to the second BB state occurs in the advantageous section of the gaming section, the advantageous section is maintained without shifting to the normal section of the gaming section.

After that, when the total number of game media given in the second BB state at the timing of t2 becomes equal to or more than the end reference number, the game state is changed from the second BB state as shown in FIGS. 38 (c) and 38 (f). After the bonus, it shifts to the state ST3. In this case, the post-bonus state ST3 is the normal section.

The post-bonus state ST3 continues until the SB winning data is set and the SB winning is not established as described above. Since the SB winning data is set at the timing of t3 and the SB winning is not established, the gaming state shifts from the post-bonus state ST3 to the first preparation state ST4 as shown in FIGS. 38 (f) and 38 (g). At the same time, as shown in FIG. 38 (a), the game section shifts from the normal section to the advantageous section. Further, at the timing of t3, as shown in FIG. 38 (e), the transition lottery process to the RT state ST6 is executed. The transition lottery process will be executed in the first preparation state ST4, but as described above, in the transition lottery process executed in any of the post-bonus state ST3, the first preparation state ST4, and the second preparation state ST5. Is surely a winning result by referring to the table for various states (FIG. 21 (c)). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 38 (d), the state in which "0" is set in the advantageous end preparation flag of the main RAM 74 is maintained. As a result, the condition for shifting to the RT state ST6 is satisfied in the advantageous section.

After that, at the timing of t4, the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped according to the notified stop order, and the first promotion replay winning is established, as shown in FIGS. 38 (g) and 38 (h). As described above, the gaming state shifts from the first preparation state ST4 to the second preparation state ST5. Further, at the timing of t5, the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped according to the notified stop order, and the second promotion replay winning is established, which is shown in FIGS. 38 (h) and 38 (i). As described above, the gaming state shifts from the second preparation state ST5 to the RT state ST6.

As described above, when the state shifts to the second BB state in the situation of the normal section, the situation of the normal section is maintained until the second BB state ends and the state shifts to the post-bonus state ST3. Then, the post-bonus state ST3 continues at least until the SB winning data is set, and when the SB winning data is set in the normal section, a table for various states that surely results in winning (FIG. 21 (c). ))), The transition lottery process to the RT state ST6 is executed. As a result, when the second BB state occurs in the normal section, it is possible to ensure that the transition condition to the RT state ST6 is satisfied with the subsequent setting of the SB winning data as an opportunity. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the occurrence of the second BB state.

Next, a processing configuration for controlling the end of the advantageous section will be described.

As described above, in step S1409 in the game section control process (FIG. 31), whether or not the game section is an advantageous section by determining whether or not "1" is set in the advantageous section flag of the main RAM 74. Is determined. In the case of an advantageous section (step S1409: YES), first, the value of the advantageous game number counter 74b provided in the main RAM 74 is added by 1 (step S1416). The advantageous game number counter 74b is a counter for measuring the number of continuously digested games in a situation where the game section is an advantageous section, and if the advantageous section continues, the game state shifts in the middle. Even if it occurs, the value of the advantageous game number counter 74b is not cleared and the measurement is maintained. It should be noted that the process of step S1416 is not executed in the control process of the game section in the process times in which the process of step S1404 is executed. After that, the end processing of the advantageous section is executed (step S1417).

FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the end processing of the advantageous section. As described above, since the control process of the game section is executed when the game ends, the end process of the advantageous section is also executed when the game ends.

First, it is determined whether or not the transition condition to the normal state ST1 is satisfied in this game (step S1901). Specifically, when the first promotion replay winning data is set in the first preparation state ST4 but the first promotion replay winning is not established, it is determined that the transition condition to the normal state ST1 is satisfied. .. Further, when the second promotion replay winning data is set in the second preparation state ST5 but the second promotion replay winning is not established, it is determined that the transition condition to the normal state ST1 is satisfied.

When the transition condition to the normal state ST1 is satisfied in this game (step S1901: YES), the initialization process of the advantageous section is executed (step S1902). In the advantageous section initialization process, various information about the advantageous section stored in the main RAM 74 is initialized. Specifically, the advantageous section flag of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0", the advantageous end preparation flag of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0", and the information on the continuation rate of the RT state ST6 is also deleted. As a result, the game section shifts to the normal section. That is, it is the normal state ST1 and the normal section. After that, the extinguishing process for turning off the advantageous section display unit 67 is executed (step S1903). As a result, when the advantageous section ends and the normal section starts, the advantageous section display unit 67 is turned off, and by visually checking the advantageous section display unit 67, the manager of the game hall or the like is an advantageous section. It becomes possible to grasp whether or not it is.

Even in the normal state ST1 where "1" is set in the advantageous end preparation flag of the main RAM 74 (step S1904 and step S1905: YES), the initialization process of the advantageous section is executed and (step S1906). , The turn-off process of the advantageous section display unit 67 is executed (step S1907). The processing contents of steps S1906 and S1907 are the same as the processing contents of steps S1902 and S1903.

The situation in which an affirmative judgment is made in both steps S1904 and S1905 is a situation in which the normal state ST1 is a normal section, and the number of remaining games up to the normal side upper limit game number in the normal state ST1 exceeds 50 games. This is a case where the SB winning data is set as an opportunity to shift to an advantageous section. In this case, the transition lottery process to the RT state ST6 is executed in the first game that has transitioned to the advantageous section, and the transition lottery process is performed with reference to the first table for the normal state (FIG. 21A). Since it is executed, the result of the transition lottery process is surely out of order. Then, if the result is off, "1" is set in the advantageous end preparation flag of the main RAM 74. If an affirmative judgment is made in both steps S1904 and S1905 in the configuration, the initialization process of the advantageous section is executed, so that the normal state ST1 is the normal section, and the normal state is further normal. When the number of games remaining up to the maximum number of games on the normal side in the state ST1 exceeds 50 games and the SB winning data is set to move to the advantageous section, the first time to move to the advantageous section. It is possible to end the advantageous section in the game.

When a negative determination is made in any of step S1901, step S1904, and step S1905, the value of the continuous game number counter of the main RAM 74 is added by 1 (step S1908). After that, it is determined whether or not the second promotion replay winning is established in this game (step S1909). If the second promotion replay prize is not established (step S1909: NO), the value of the continuous game number counter of the main RAM 74 becomes equal to or more than the value of the upper limit number of games (specifically, 1500 games) in the advantageous section. (Step S1910). If it is equal to or greater than the value of the maximum number of games, it means that the number of games continued without shifting to the normal section in the advantageous section has reached the maximum number of games. (Step S1911), the extinguishing process of the advantageous section display unit 67 is executed (step S1912). The processing contents of steps S1911 and S1912 are the same as the processing contents of steps S1902 and S1903.

On the other hand, when the second promotion replay winning is established in this game (step S1909: YES), it means that the gaming state has changed from the second preparation state ST5 to the RT state ST6 in this game. In this case, it is determined whether or not the value of the continuous game number counter of the main RAM 74 is equal to or greater than the value of the number of trigger games (specifically, 1450 games) (step S1913). If it is equal to or more than the value of the number of trigger games, a new transition to the RT state ST6 has occurred in the situation where the number of games continued without shifting to the normal section in the advantageous section is equal to or greater than the number of trigger games. Therefore, the initialization process of the advantageous section is executed (step S1911), and the extinguishing process of the advantageous section display unit 67 is executed (step S1912). The processing contents of steps S1911 and S1912 are the same as the processing contents of steps S1902 and S1903.

Hereinafter, a state in which the advantageous section is forcibly terminated in relation to the number of continuous games in the advantageous section will be described. First, with reference to the time chart of FIG. 40, a state in which the advantageous section is forcibly terminated when the number of continuous games in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit number of games will be described. FIG. 40 (a) shows a period in which the game section is an advantageous section, FIG. 40 (b) shows the timing when the number of continuous games in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit number of games, and FIG. 40 (c) shows the SB winning. FIG. 40 (d) shows the timing when the data is set, FIG. 40 (d) shows the timing when the transition lottery process to the RT state ST6 is executed, and FIG. 40 (e) shows the period during which the game state is the normal state ST1. 40 (f) shows a period in which the game state is the first BB state, FIG. 40 (g) shows a period in which the game state is the post-bonus state ST3, and FIG. 40 (h) shows the game state. Shows the period during which the first preparation state ST4 is set, and FIG. 40 (i) shows the period during which the gaming state is the second preparation state ST5.

First, a case where the number of continuous games in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit number of games in the middle of the first BB state will be described. As shown in FIG. 40 (b), the number of continuous games in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit number of games at the timing of t1 which is the first BB state and is the advantageous section. In this case, the game section shifts from the advantageous section to the normal section as shown in FIG. 40 (a) by executing the initialization process of the advantageous section even in the middle of the first BB state. In the first BB state, if the section is advantageous, if the index value IV = 2 or 3 is won, the lottery process for shifting to the RT state ST6 or the lottery process for promoting the continuation rate is executed, but in the normal section. Even if the winning is achieved with the index value IV = 2 or 3, the lottery process for shifting to the RT state ST6 and the lottery process for promoting the continuation rate are not executed.

If the gaming section shifts to the normal section in the middle of the first BB state, the normal section continues until the first BB state ends. After that, when the end condition of the first BB state is satisfied at the timing of t2, the gaming state shifts from the first BB state to the post-bonus state ST3 as shown in FIGS. 40 (f) and 40 (g). The post-bonus state ST3 continues at least until the SB winning data is set. Then, at the timing of t3, the SB winning data is set as shown in FIG. 40 (c) and the SB winning is not established, so that the gaming state is a bonus as shown in FIGS. 40 (g) and 40 (h). The transition from the post-state ST3 to the first preparation state ST4. Further, at the timing of t3, as shown in FIG. 40 (a), the game section shifts from the normal section to the advantageous section. After that, as shown in FIG. 40 (d), the transition lottery process to the RT state ST6 is executed at the timing of t4, which is the timing when the first game is started in the advantageous section. In the transition lottery process, the tables for various states (FIG. 21 (c)) are referred to, so that the winning result is surely obtained. Therefore, it is an advantageous section and the transition condition to the RT state ST6 is satisfied.

As described above, if the number of continuous games in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit of the number of games in the middle of the first BB state and the transition to the normal section occurs, the normal section is after the end of the first BB state and the post-bonus state. The situation is ST3. Then, the post-bonus state ST3 continues at least until the SB winning data is set, and when the SB winning data is set, the RT state ST6 is reached with reference to the tables for various states (FIG. 21 (c)). Since the transition lottery process of is executed, the winning result is surely obtained. Therefore, if the number of continuous games in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit number of games in the middle of the first BB state, the transition condition to the RT state ST6 is satisfied after the end of the first BB state, and therefore, in the middle of the first BB state. The player expects that the number of continuous games in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit of the number of games.

Even when the number of continuous games in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit number of games in the middle of the second BB state, the number of continuous games in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit number of games in the middle of the first BB state, as in the case of the second BB. After the end of the state, the condition for shifting to the RT state ST6 is satisfied.

Next, a case where the number of continuous games in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit number of games in the middle of the post-bonus state ST3 will be described. As shown in FIG. 40 (b), the number of continuous games in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit number of games at the timing of t5, which is the post-bonus state ST3 and is the advantageous section. In this case, the game section shifts from the advantageous section to the normal section as shown in FIG. 40 (a) by executing the initialization process of the advantageous section even in the middle of the post-bonus state ST3.

The situation in which the post-bonus state ST3 is in the normal section continues at least until the SB winning data is set. Then, at the timing of t6, the SB winning data is set as shown in FIG. 40 (c) and the SB winning is not established, so that the gaming state is a bonus as shown in FIGS. 40 (g) and 40 (h). The transition from the post-state ST3 to the first preparation state ST4. Further, at the timing of t6, as shown in FIG. 40 (a), the game section shifts from the normal section to the advantageous section. After that, as shown in FIG. 40 (d), the transition lottery process to the RT state ST6 is executed at the timing of t7, which is the timing when the first game is started in the advantageous section. In the transition lottery process, the tables for various states (FIG. 21 (c)) are referred to, so that the winning result is surely obtained. Therefore, it is an advantageous section and the transition condition to the RT state ST6 is satisfied.

As described above, when the number of continuous games in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit number of games in the middle of the post-bonus state ST3 and the transition to the normal section occurs, the SB winning data is set in the post-bonus state ST3. The transition lottery process to the RT state ST6 is executed with reference to the tables for various states (FIG. 21 (c)), and the winning result is surely obtained. Therefore, if the number of continuous games in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit number of games in the middle of the post-bonus state ST3, the transition condition to the RT state ST6 is satisfied. The player expects that the number of continuous games reaches the maximum number of games.

Next, a case where the number of continuous games in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit number of games in the middle of the first preparation state ST4 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 40 (b), the number of continuous games in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit number of games at the timing of t8, which is the first preparation state ST4 and is the advantageous section. In this case, the game section shifts from the advantageous section to the normal section as shown in FIG. 40 (a) by executing the initialization process of the advantageous section even in the middle of the first preparation state ST4. After that, the first promotion replay winning data is set before the SB winning data is set. In this case, since the game section is a normal section, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R for establishing the first promotion replay winning is not notified. Therefore, although the first promotion replay winning data is set at the timing of t9, an event occurs in which the first promotion replay winning is not established, so that the gaming state is changed as shown in FIGS. 40 (e) and 40 (h). The transition from the first preparation state ST4 to the normal state ST1.

On the other hand, if the SB winning data is set before the first promotion replay winning data is set after the normal section is in the first preparation state ST4, the transition condition to the RT state ST6 is set. It will be established. This case will be described.

As shown in FIG. 40 (b), the number of continuous games in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit number of games at the timing of t10, which is the first preparation state ST4 and is the advantageous section. In this case, the game section shifts from the advantageous section to the normal section as shown in FIG. 40 (a) by executing the initialization process of the advantageous section even in the middle of the first preparation state ST4. After that, at the timing of t11, the SB winning data is set as shown in FIG. 40 (c), and the SB winning is not established. As a result, the gaming section shifts from the normal section to the advantageous section as shown in FIG. 40 (a) while the first preparation state ST4 is maintained as shown in FIG. 40 (h). After that, as shown in FIG. 40 (d), the transition lottery process to the RT state ST6 is executed at the timing of t12, which is the timing when the first game is started in the advantageous section. In the transition lottery process, the tables for various states (FIG. 21 (c)) are referred to, so that the winning result is surely obtained. Therefore, it is an advantageous section and the transition condition to the RT state ST6 is satisfied. In this case, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R for establishing the first promotion replay winning is notified. Therefore, when the first promotion replay winning data is set at the timing of t13, the first promotion replay winning is basically established, so that the gaming state is as shown in FIGS. 40 (h) and 40 (i). The transition from the first preparation state ST4 to the second preparation state ST5.

As described above, if the number of continuous games in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit number of games and the transition to the normal section occurs in the middle of the first preparation state ST4, before the first promotion replay winning data is set. By setting the SB winning data in, the transition lottery process to the RT state ST6 is executed with reference to the table for various states (FIG. 21 (c)), and the winning result is surely obtained. Therefore, when the number of continuous games in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit number of games in the middle of the first preparation state ST4, the SB winning data is set before the first promotion replay winning data is set. Players will have high expectations, and it will be possible to improve the interest of the game.

The first preparation is made by causing the image display device 63 to perform an effect or a notification for the player to be able to recognize whether the game section is a normal section or an advantageous section. The player can grasp that the advantageous section ends in the middle of the state ST4 and shifts to the normal section. Then, by making the player understand that it is the normal section and the first preparation state ST4 in this way, the SB winning data is set before the first promotion replay winning data is set. While expecting, the game in the first preparation state ST4 will be performed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the first preparation state ST4.

Next, a case where the number of continuous games in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit number of games in the middle of the second preparation state ST5 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 40 (b), the number of continuous games in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit number of games at the timing of t14, which is the second preparation state ST5 and is the advantageous section. In this case, the game section shifts from the advantageous section to the normal section as shown in FIG. 40 (a) by executing the initialization process of the advantageous section even in the middle of the second preparation state ST5. After that, the second promotion replay winning data is set before the SB winning data is set. In this case, since the game section is a normal section, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R for establishing the second promotion replay winning is not notified. Therefore, although the second promotion replay winning data is set at the timing of t15, an event occurs in which the second promotion replay winning is not established, so that the gaming state is changed as shown in FIGS. 40 (e) and 40 (i). The transition from the second preparation state ST5 to the normal state ST1.

On the other hand, if the SB winning data is set before the second promotion replay winning data is set after the normal section is in the second preparation state ST5, the transition condition to the RT state ST6 is set. It will be established. This case will be described.

As shown in FIG. 40 (b), the number of continuous games in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit number of games at the timing of t16, which is the second preparation state ST5 and is the advantageous section. In this case, the game section shifts from the advantageous section to the normal section as shown in FIG. 40 (a) by executing the initialization process of the advantageous section even in the middle of the second preparation state ST5. After that, at the timing of t17, the SB winning data is set as shown in FIG. 40 (c), and the SB winning is not established. As a result, the gaming section shifts from the normal section to the advantageous section as shown in FIG. 40 (a) while the second preparation state ST5 is maintained as shown in FIG. 40 (i). After that, as shown in FIG. 40 (d), the transition lottery process to the RT state ST6 is executed at the timing of t18, which is the timing when the first game is started in the advantageous section. In the transition lottery process, the tables for various states (FIG. 21 (c)) are referred to, so that the winning result is surely obtained. Therefore, it is an advantageous section and the transition condition to the RT state ST6 is satisfied. In this case, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R for establishing the second promotion replay winning is notified. Therefore, when the second promotion replay winning data is set at the timing of t19, the second promotion replay winning is basically established, so that the gaming state shifts from the second preparation state ST5 to the RT state ST6.

As described above, if the number of continuous games in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit number of games and the transition to the normal section occurs in the middle of the second preparation state ST5, before the second promotion replay winning data is set. By setting the SB winning data in, the transition lottery process to the RT state ST6 is executed with reference to the table for various states (FIG. 21 (c)), and the winning result is surely obtained. Therefore, when the number of continuous games in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit number of games in the middle of the second preparation state ST5, the SB winning data is set before the second promotion replay winning data is set. Players will have high expectations, and it will be possible to improve the interest of the game.

The second preparation is made by causing the image display device 63 to perform an effect or a notification for the player to be able to recognize whether the game section is a normal section or an advantageous section. The player can grasp that the advantageous section ends in the middle of the state ST5 and shifts to the normal section. Then, by making the player understand that the second preparation state ST5 is the normal section in this way, the SB winning data is set before the second promotion replay winning data is set. While expecting, the game in the second preparation state ST5 will be performed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the second preparation state ST5.

Next, referring to the time chart of FIG. 41, when the number of continuous games in the advantageous section is equal to or greater than the number of trigger games, the transition to the RT state ST6 occurs, and the advantageous section is forcibly terminated. I will explain how it works. FIG. 41 (a) shows a period in which the game section is an advantageous section, FIG. 41 (b) shows the timing when the number of continuous games in the advantageous section reaches the number of trigger games, and FIG. 41 (c) shows the SB winning. FIG. 41 (d) shows the timing when the data is set, FIG. 41 (d) shows the timing when the transition lottery process to the RT state ST6 is executed, and FIG. 41 (e) shows the period during which the game state is the RT state ST6. 40 (f) shows a period in which the gaming state is in the first preparation state ST4, FIG. 40 (g) shows a period in which the gaming state is in the second preparation state ST5, and FIG. 40 (h) shows. Indicates the period during which the gaming state is the normal state ST1.

First, a case where SB winning data is set in a normal section and in the RT state ST6 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 40 (b), the number of continuous games in the advantageous section reaches the number of trigger games at the timing of t1 which is the second preparation state ST5 and is the advantageous section. However, even if the number of continuous games in the advantageous section reaches the number of trigger games, the game section is maintained in the advantageous section as shown in FIG. 40 (a). After that, the second promotion replay prize is established at the timing of t2, which is the situation where the number of continuous games in the advantageous section is equal to or more than the number of trigger games and less than the upper limit number of games. ), The gaming state shifts from the second preparation state ST5 to the RT state ST6. In this case, since the RT state ST6 is entered in the situation where the number of continuous games in the advantageous section is equal to or greater than the number of trigger games, the game section is the advantageous section as shown in FIG. 41 (a) at the timing of the t2. To the normal section.

After that, the SB winning data is set as shown in FIG. 41 (c) at the timing of t3, which is the RT state ST6 and is the normal section, and is shown in FIG. 41 (a) at the timing of the t3. As described above, the game section shifts from the normal section to the advantageous section. After that, as shown in FIG. 41 (d), the transition lottery process to the RT state ST6 is executed at the timing of t4, which is the timing when the first game is started in the advantageous section. In the transition lottery process, the table for the RT state (FIG. 21 (d)) is referred to, so that the winning result is surely obtained and 100% is selected as the continuation rate of the RT state ST6. Therefore, basically, the state in which the transition condition to the RT state ST6 is satisfied is maintained until the number of continuous games in the advantageous section reaches the number of trigger games or the upper limit number of games. Therefore, even if the RT state ST6 is once terminated at the timing of t5 as shown in FIG. 41 (d), the first preparation state ST4 is displayed from the timing of t5 to the timing of t6 as shown in FIG. 41 (f). The second preparation state ST5 is performed as shown in FIG. 41 (g) from the timing of t6 to the timing of t7, and the RT state ST6 is resumed at the timing of t7 as shown in FIG. 41 (e). Will be done.

Next, a case where the SB winning data is not set in the RT state ST6 and the normal section will be described.

As shown in FIG. 40 (b), the number of continuous games in the advantageous section reaches the number of trigger games at the timing of t8, which is the second preparation state ST5 and is the advantageous section. However, even if the number of continuous games in the advantageous section reaches the number of trigger games, the game section is maintained in the advantageous section as shown in FIG. 40 (a). After that, the second promotion replay prize is established at the timing of t9, which is the situation where the number of continuous games in the advantageous section is equal to or more than the number of trigger games and less than the upper limit number of games. ), The gaming state shifts from the second preparation state ST5 to the RT state ST6. In this case, since the RT state ST6 is entered in the situation where the number of continuous games in the advantageous section is equal to or greater than the number of trigger games, the game section is the advantageous section as shown in FIG. 41 (a) at the timing of the t9. To the normal section.

After that, in the situation where the RT state ST6 is a normal section, the SB winning data is not set, and the RT state ST6 ends as shown in FIG. 41 (e) at the timing of t10, and the figure 41 (f) shows. As shown, it shifts to the first preparation state ST4. In this case, the first preparation state ST4 is set and the normal section is set. Then, the first promotion replay winning data is set before the SB winning data is set. In this case, since the game section is a normal section, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R for establishing the first promotion replay winning is not notified. Therefore, although the first promotion replay winning data is set at the timing of t11, an event occurs in which the first promotion replay winning is not established, so that the gaming state is changed as shown in FIGS. 41 (f) and 41 (h). The transition from the first preparation state ST4 to the normal state ST1.

As described above, when the number of continuous games in the advantageous section is equal to or greater than the number of trigger games and the number of games is less than the upper limit, the RT state ST6 is set and the normal section is set. Then, when the SB winning data is set in the middle of the RT state ST6, the table for the RT state (FIG. 21 (d)) is referred to at the time of the lottery process for shifting to the RT state ST6, so that the RT state ST6 is reached. Not only the transition condition of is surely satisfied, but also the maximum continuation rate of 100% is selected as the continuation rate of the RT state ST6. As a result, the player expects to shift to the RT state ST6 in a situation where the number of continuous games in the advantageous section is equal to or greater than the number of trigger games, and the game is that the SB winning data is set in the RT state ST6. Will expect. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

<About game history management>
Next, a management process executed by the main MPU 72 in order to manage the history of the game and notify the management result will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 42. The management process is executed in step S214 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11).

First, the value of the total number of games counter 74a of the main RAM 74 is grasped (step S2001), and the value of the advantageous game number counter 74b of the main RAM 74 is grasped (step S2002). Then, the ratio of the value of the advantageous game number counter 74b to the value of the total game number counter 74a is calculated (step S2003). That is, the calculation is executed so that the calculation result = "value of the advantageous game number counter 74b" / "value of the total game number counter 74a". Then, among the values obtained by multiplying the calculation result by 100, the 100th place is displayed on the first notification display device 85, the 10th place is displayed on the second notification display device 86, and the 1st place is the 1st place. 3 The display control of the first to third notification display devices 85 to 87 without going through another control device so as to be displayed by the notification display device 87 (step S2004). The above calculation result is notified as a percentage display. Specifically, if the value obtained by multiplying the above calculation result by 100 is "35", "0" is displayed on the first notification display device 85 and "3" is displayed on the second notification display device 86. , "5" is displayed on the third notification display device 87. Further, for example, if the value obtained by multiplying the above calculation result by 100 is "100", "1" is displayed on the first notification display device 85, "0" is displayed on the second notification display device 86, and the second notification display device 86 is displayed. 3 “0” is displayed on the notification display device 87.

By executing the management process as described above, the management result of the game history is always displayed on the first to third notification display devices 85 to 87, and the manager of the game hall is the front door 12. It is possible to grasp the management result of the game history by visually observing the first to third notification display devices 85 to 87 in the open state. Further, the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11) is executed in a cycle shorter than the shortest period required for digesting one game, and more specifically, the shortest time required from the end of one game to the start of the next one game. It is executed in a cycle shorter than the period. Therefore, the manager of the game hall can grasp the management result of the game history up to the game completed immediately before by visually observing the first to third notification display devices 85 to 87.

Next, the flowchart of FIG. 43 shows the lighting process for executing the light emission control of the lighting devices 88a and 88b provided for the purpose of irradiating the main control device 70 with light when the front door 12 is in the open state. It will be explained with reference to it. The lighting process is executed in step S214 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11).

When no light is emitted from the lighting devices 88a and 88b (step S2101: NO), it is determined whether or not the front door 12 is in the open state based on the state of the signal input from the open angle sensor 89. (Step S2102). When the front door 12 is in the open state (step S2102: YES), it is determined whether or not the opening angle of the front door 12 is within a predetermined angle range (step S2103). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the opening angle of the front door 12 exceeds a predetermined opening angle based on the state of the signal input from the opening angle sensor 89. This predetermined opening angle is set as an angle of 86% with respect to the maximum opening angle of the front door 12. Specifically, since the state where the front door 12 is opened 90 ° with respect to the housing 11 is the maximum opening angle of the front door 12, the state where the front door 12 is opened about 77 ° with respect to the housing 11 is predetermined. It is set to the opening angle of. When an affirmative determination is made in step S2103, that is, when the front door 12 is not in the closed state and the opening angle of the front door 12 is 77 ° or less, a drive signal is output to the pair of lighting devices 88a and 88b (step). S2104). As a result, light is irradiated from the pair of lighting devices 88a and 88b to the irradiation range IR including the main control device 70. Then, this light irradiation state is continued until the process of step S2106 described later is executed.

When light is emitted from the lighting devices 88a and 88b (step S2101: YES), the front door 12 is closed or the front door 12 is closed based on the state of the signal input from the opening angle sensor 89. It is determined whether the opening angle exceeds a predetermined opening angle (step S2105). If an affirmative determination is made in step S2105, the output of the drive signal to the pair of lighting devices 88a and 88b is stopped (step S2106). As a result, the pair of lighting devices 88a and 88b are put into a non-lighting state, and the irradiation of light from the pair of lighting devices 88a and 88b toward the irradiation range IR is stopped.

Here, the relationship between the opening angle of the front door 12 and the control state of the lighting devices 88a and 88b will be described with reference to the time charts of FIGS. 44 (a) and 44 (b). FIG. 44A shows the state of the front door 12, and FIG. 44B shows the control state of the lighting devices 88a and 88b. Further, in the following description, FIGS. 45 (a) and 45 (b) will be referred to as appropriate. FIG. 45A is an explanatory diagram for explaining the state of the lighting devices 88a and 88b when the front door 12 is in the open state and the opening angle is equal to or less than a predetermined opening angle, and FIG. 45B is shown in FIG. 45 (b). ) Is an explanatory diagram for explaining the state of the lighting devices 88a and 88b when the opening angle of the front door 12 is the maximum opening angle exceeding a predetermined opening angle.

First, a case where the opening operation of the front door 12 is stopped when the opening angle of the front door 12 is equal to or less than a predetermined opening angle will be described.

As shown in FIG. 44A, when the front door 12 is in the closed state, the opening operation of the front door 12 is started at the timing of t1. In this case, as shown in FIG. 44 (b), the irradiation of light from the pair of lighting devices 88a and 88b is started at the timing of t1. After that, at the timing of t2, the opening operation of the front door 12 is stopped in a state before the opening angle of the front door 12 exceeds a predetermined opening angle. In this state, as shown in FIG. 45A, light is emitted from the pair of lighting devices 88a and 88b toward the main control device 70. As a result, the main control device 70 is brightly illuminated even when the front door 12 is slightly opened, so that the manager of the game hall can use the board box 81 of the main control device 70 and the first to third notifications. It is possible to visually confirm the display contents of the display devices 85 to 87. In this case, since it is not necessary to open the front door 12 to the end during the confirmation work, the confirmation work can be facilitated.

After that, as shown in FIG. 44A, the closing operation of the front door 12 is started at the timing of t3, and the front door 12 is closed at the timing of t4. In this case, as shown in FIG. 44 (b), the irradiation of light from the pair of lighting devices 88a and 88b is stopped at the timing of t4.

Next, a case where the opening operation of the front door 12 is performed until the opening angle of the front door 12 reaches the maximum opening angle will be described.

As shown in FIG. 44A, when the front door 12 is in the closed state, the opening operation of the front door 12 is started at the timing of t5. In this case, as shown in FIG. 44 (b), the irradiation of light from the pair of lighting devices 88a and 88b is started at the timing of t5. After that, at the timing of t6, the opening angle of the front door 12 exceeds a predetermined opening angle as shown in FIG. 44 (a). As a result, the irradiation of light from the pair of lighting devices 88a and 88b is stopped at the timing of t6 as shown in FIG. 44 (b).

After that, the opening operation of the front door 12 is stopped in a state where the opening angle of the front door 12 reaches the maximum opening angle at the timing of t7. In this state, as shown in FIG. 45 (b), the pair of lighting devices 88a and 88b do not irradiate the main control device 70 with light. When the opening angle of the front door 12 exceeds a predetermined opening angle, such as when the opening angle reaches the maximum opening angle, the inside of the housing 11 is illuminated by the light or sunlight of the lighting inside the game hall. .. In this case, if the main control device 70 is illuminated by the lighting devices 88a and 88b, there is a concern that the visibility of the main control device 70 and the first to third notification display devices 85 to 87 may be deteriorated. Will be done. On the other hand, when the opening angle of the front door 12 exceeds a predetermined opening angle, the irradiation of light from the pair of lighting devices 88a and 88b is stopped, which causes such an inconvenience. It is possible to avoid it.

After that, as shown in FIG. 44A, the closing operation of the front door 12 is started at the timing of t8, and the opening angle of the front door 12 becomes equal to or less than the predetermined opening angle at the timing of t9. In this case, as shown in FIG. 44 (b), the irradiation of light from the pair of lighting devices 88a and 88b is started at the timing of t9. After that, as shown in FIG. 44A, the front door 12 is closed at the timing of t10. In this case, as shown in FIG. 44 (b), the irradiation of light from the pair of lighting devices 88a and 88b is stopped at the timing of t10.

By providing the lighting devices 88a and 88b for illuminating the main control device 70, it becomes easy to perform the confirmation work of the main control device 70 performed by opening the front door 12. In this case, when the front door 12 is closed, the lighting devices 88a and 88b are in a non-lighting state. This makes it possible to prevent the lighting devices 88a and 88b from being in a meaningless lighting state in a situation where the main control device 70 is not confirmed. Further, when the front door 12 is opened, the lighting devices 88a and 88b are naturally in the lighting state. This makes it easier to check the main control device 70 because it is not necessary to separately perform an operation for setting the lighting devices 88a and 88b to the lighting state.

The lighting devices 88a and 88b are provided in the housing 11 in which the main control device 70 is provided. This facilitates lighting of the main control device 70 by the lighting devices 88a and 88b according to the opening operation of the front door 12.

Regardless of which open position the front door 12 is arranged, the lighting devices 88a and 88b are not in the illuminated state, but the lighting devices 88a and 88b are selectively illuminated in some open positions. It becomes a state. As a result, when the lighting devices 88a and 88b are set to the lighting state and the lighting devices 88a and 88b are set to the lighting state only in a favorable situation when checking the main control device 70, it is rather difficult to check the main control device 70. The lighting devices 88a and 88b can be put into a non-lighting state.

When the front door 12 is present at the maximum open position, the lighting devices 88a and 88b are in a non-lighting state. As a result, the lighting devices 88a and 88b are in a non-lighting state when the main control device 70 is sufficiently brightly illuminated by the lighting of the game hall. Therefore, the main control device 70 is instead illuminated by the lighting by the lighting devices 88a and 88b. It is possible to prevent inconveniences such as difficulty in confirming.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

The existence of a plurality of types of game states ST1 to ST6 and the existence of a plurality of types of game sections separately make it possible to diversify the progress of the game. Further, the advantageous section is a section in which the transition to the RT state ST6 is more likely to occur than the normal section, and both the normal section and the advantageous section can stay in each of a plurality of types of gaming states ST1 to ST6. As a result, the player plays the game while expecting that the game is in an advantageous state and the section is advantageous. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

When the second promotion replay prize is established in the second preparation state ST5, the system shifts to the RT state ST6, but the notification of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R which enables the establishment of the second promotion replay prize is It is not done in the normal section but in the advantageous section. Therefore, it is basically an advantageous section in the RT state ST6. However, in relation to the number of games continued in the advantageous section, a situation may occur in which the normal section is set in the RT state ST6. In this case, if the SB winning data is set in the RT state ST6 and the normal section, the situation shifts to the RT state ST6 and the advantageous section and the table for the RT state is referred to. The transition lottery process to the RT state ST6 is executed. Then, when the transition lottery process to the RT state ST6 is executed with reference to the table for the RT state, the transition to the RT state ST6 is surely won and the continuation rate of the RT state ST6 is 100%, which is the most advantageous. The continuation rate is selected. As a result, the player will play the game while expecting that a situation in the RT state ST6 and a normal section will occur, and it will be possible to improve the interest of the game.

As described above, when the SB winning data is set in the RT state ST6 and the normal section, the transition lottery process to the RT state ST6 is executed with reference to the table for the RT state, so that it is certain. In addition to winning the transition to the RT state ST6, the most advantageous continuation rate of 100% is selected as the continuation rate of the RT state ST6. In this case, if the number of games continuously executed in the advantageous section is equal to or greater than the number of trigger games and the second promotion replay prize is established and the transition to the RT state ST6 occurs, the game continues in the advantageous section. Even if the number of games executed is not reached the upper limit of the number of games, the RT state ST6 is in the normal section from the start of the RT state ST6. As a result, it is possible to provide many opportunities for SB winning data to be set in the RT state ST6 and the normal section.

When the first BB prize is established in the normal section, the game section becomes an advantageous section, and when the first BB prize is established in the advantageous section, the game section is maintained in the advantageous section. That is, in the first BB state, the game section is basically an advantageous section. Then, the advantageous section is maintained in the post-bonus state ST3, the first preparation state ST4, and the second preparation state ST5 after the end of the first BB state, and any of these gaming states ST3 to ST5 is an advantageous section. Even if the SB winning data is set in, the transition lottery process to the RT state ST6 is not executed. On the other hand, when the number of games continued in the advantageous section in the middle of the first BB state reaches the upper limit number of games, the situation becomes the first BB state and the normal section, and also in the subsequent bonus post-bonus state ST3. The normal section is maintained. Further, when the number of games continued in the advantageous section in the middle of the post-bonus state ST3 reaches the upper limit number of games, the post-bonus state ST3 is in the normal section. Then, when the SB winning data is set in the situation where the bonus post-bonus state ST3 is the normal section, the game section shifts from the normal section to the advantageous section, and the table for various states is referred to to the RT state ST6. Transition lottery process is executed. When the transition lottery process to the RT state ST6 is executed with reference to the tables for various states, the transition to the RT state ST6 is surely won. As a result, the player will play the game while expecting that a situation in the first BB state or the post-bonus state ST3, which is a normal section, will occur, and it will be possible to improve the interest of the game. ..

If the transition lottery process to the RT state ST6 is executed in the situation where the first BB state is an advantageous section, there is a possibility that the transition to the RT state ST6 will not be won. On the other hand, in the case of the first BB state and the normal section, after the end of the first BB state, the post-bonus state ST3 is the normal section. Then, in order to shift the gaming state from the bonus post-bonus state ST3 to the first preparation state ST4, the SB winning data needs to be set, and when the SB winning data is set, the gaming section shifts to the advantageous section. At the same time, the lottery process for shifting to the RT state ST6 is executed with reference to the tables for various states, and the transition to the RT state ST6 is surely won. As a result, regardless of whether the situation is the normal section or the advantageous section in the first BB state, the transition to the RT state ST6 can be won, and the first BB state is the normal section. It is possible to increase the advantage of the above.

When the number of continuous games in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit number of games, the initial stage of the advantageous section is irrespective of whether or not the transition condition to the RT state ST6 is satisfied, and regardless of the current gaming states ST1 to ST6. The conversion process is executed, and the transition condition to the RT state ST6 is not satisfied, and the game section becomes the normal section. This makes it possible to prevent the advantageous section from continuing excessively. On the other hand, it is unfortunate for the player who wants to continue the advantageous section that the number of continuous games in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit number of games. On the other hand, if the number of continuous games in the advantageous section is equal to or greater than the number of trigger games and the second promotion replay prize is established, the RT state is ST6 and the normal section is set. It becomes easy to give profits to. Further, as described above, when the number of continuous games in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit number of games in the middle of the first BB state or the post-bonus state ST3, the situation is such that each of these game states is a normal section, and the player is profitable. It will be in a state where it is easy to be given. As a result, even if the number of continuous games in the advantageous section approaches the upper limit number of games, it is possible to prevent the degree of attention to the game from decreasing.

When the SB winning data is set in the normal section or the first BB winning is established, not only the SB winning data is set in the advantageous section but also the transition lottery process to the RT state ST6 is executed. This makes it possible to increase the player's attention to the setting of SB winning data or the establishment of the first BB winning in the normal section.

The transition lottery process to the RT state ST6 is executed in a game in which the SB winning data is set or a game after the game in which the first BB prize is established and included in the advantageous section. As a result, the difference between the normal section and the advantageous section is that the normal section is a section in which the transition lottery process to the RT state ST6 is not executed and the advantageous section is a section in which the transition lottery process to the RT state ST6 can be executed. It can be clarified.

The lottery process for shifting to the RT state ST6 is executed in a game after the game in which the SB winning data is set and included in the advantageous section in a mode corresponding to the game states ST1 to ST6 at that time. As a result, the player pays attention not only to the setting of the SB winning data in the normal section but also to the types of the gaming states ST1 to ST6 in the subsequent advantageous section.

Since the SB winning data is set in the post-bonus state ST3 and the SB winning is not established, the gaming state shifts from the post-bonus state ST3 to the first preparation state ST4. That is, the gaming state at the time when the SB winning data is set in the normal section and the gaming state when the transition lottery process to the RT state ST6 is executed in the advantageous section shifted based on the setting of the SB winning data. It can be different. This makes it possible to diversify the combination of the setting mode of the game section and the transition mode of the game state.

When the number of remaining games up to the maximum number of games on the normal side in the normal state ST1 exceeds 50 games, the SB winning data is set and the lottery process for shifting to the RT state ST6 is executed based on the shift to the advantageous section. In this case, the first table for the normal state is referred to, so that the transition to the RT state ST6 is not won. As a result, even if the SB winning data is set in the normal section and the section shifts to the advantageous section, it is possible to create a situation in which the transition to the RT state ST6 is not won.

When the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section occurs, the transition lottery process to the RT state ST6 is executed in the first game of the advantageous section. As a result, when the advantageous section is set, the lottery process for shifting to the RT state ST6 can be executed at an early stage.

Transition to RT state ST6 The end condition of the advantageous section differs depending on the result of the lottery process. For example, when the lottery process for shifting to the RT state ST6 is executed in the normal state ST1, if the transition to the RT state ST6 is won, it is advantageous until the situation becomes such that the transition to the normal state ST1 is performed again after the normal state ST1 is completed. While the advantageous section is continued until the number of continuous games in the section reaches the upper limit number of games, if the transition to the RT state ST6 is not won, the game in which the transition lottery process of the RT state ST6 is executed is executed. The advantageous section ends at. This makes it possible to associate the result of the transition lottery process to the RT state ST6 with the continuation mode of the advantageous section.

If the transition lottery process to the RT state ST6 is executed in the normal state ST1 and the transition to the RT state ST6 is not won in the transition lottery process, the game in which the transition lottery process is executed. The advantageous section ends at. This makes it possible to prevent the advantageous section from continuing unnecessarily long in a situation where the benefit of being an advantageous section cannot be enjoyed because the conditions for transition to the RT state ST6 are not satisfied. Will be.

When the transition to the first preparation state ST4 occurs on condition that the SB winning data is set in the post-bonus state ST3, and the SB winning data is set in the post-bonus state ST3 in the normal section. By referring to the tables for various states and executing the lottery process for shifting to the RT state ST6, the transition to the RT state ST6 is surely won. That is, when the post-bonus state ST3 is in the normal section, the probability that the transition condition to the RT state ST6 is satisfied is high. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the situation in which the post-bonus state ST3 is the normal section.

When the second BB state is reached in the normal section, after the end of the second BB state, the post-bonus state ST3 is set and the normal section is set. As a result, in the case of the second BB state, not only the profit from the BB state ST2 is given to the player, but also the post-bonus state ST3 is in the normal section after the end of the second BB state. Therefore, the probability that the transition condition to the RT state ST6 is satisfied increases. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the occurrence of the second BB state.

When the first BB state is reached in the normal section, the advantageous section is set at the start of the first BB state, so that after the end of the first BB state, the post-bonus state ST3 is the advantageous section. Then, even if the SB winning data is set in the advantageous section, the lottery process for shifting to the RT state ST6 is not executed. This makes it possible to make the player's advantage different after the end of the BB state ST2 between the first BB state and the second BB state.

On the other hand, when the second BB state is reached in the normal section, the lottery process for shifting to the RT state ST6 is not executed in the second BB state because the advantageous section is not set, whereas the first BB state is set in the normal section. In this case, since it is set to an advantageous section, the transition lottery process to the RT state ST6 is executed in the first BB state. This makes it possible to give an opportunity to execute the transition lottery process to the RT state ST6 even when the first BB state occurs.

There are multiple types of triggers for the end of the advantageous section. As a result, it is possible to diversify the ending mode of the advantageous section, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

When the number of games remaining up to the maximum number of games on the normal side in the normal state ST1 is 50 games or less, and the lottery process for shifting to the RT state ST6 is executed based on the setting of the SB winning data and the shift to the advantageous section. By referring to the second table for the normal state, the player wins the transition to the RT state ST6. Then, if the transition to the RT state ST6 is won in the normal state ST1 and the transition condition to the RT state ST6 is satisfied, then the transition to the first preparation state ST4 is made and the first promotion replay prize can be established. The advantageous section is surely continued until the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is notified. As a result, even though the transition condition to the RT state ST6 is satisfied, it is possible to prevent the advantageous section from ending without even notifying the stop order as described above. ..

Even in the advantageous section, when "1" is set in the advantageous end preparation flag of the main RAM 74, the stop order and the second promotion of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enable the establishment of the first promotion replay winning. The stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enables the establishment of the replay winning is not notified. As a result, it is possible to generate a situation in which the above-mentioned notification of the stop order is not executed even in the advantageous section, and it is possible to suitably control the game section.

"1" is set in the advantageous end preparation flag of the main RAM 74 while maintaining the advantageous section when the transition winning is not achieved in the transition lottery process to the RT state ST6. By maintaining the advantageous section in this way, it is possible to prevent the execution of the transition lottery process to the RT state ST6 for the subsequent setting of the SB winning data, and as described above in the advantageous section. It is possible to prevent the notification of the stop order from being executed. This makes it possible to facilitate the end of the advantageous section without shifting to the RT state ST6 when the transition to the RT state ST6 is not won.

If the first BB prize is established in the normal section, the first BB state is set and the section is advantageous. Then, if the transition winning is not achieved in the transition lottery process to the RT state ST6 executed for the setting of the advantageous section, "1" is set in the advantageous end preparation flag of the main RAM 74. The state in which "1" is set in the advantageous end preparation flag in this advantageous section is also maintained in the post-bonus state ST3, the first preparation state ST4, and the second preparation state ST5 after the end of the first BB state. As a result, even though the lottery process for shifting to the RT state ST6 has already been executed for the occurrence of the first BB state, the post-bonus state ST3, the first preparation state ST4, and the first BB state after the end of the first BB state have already been executed. It is possible to prevent the transition lottery process to the RT state ST6 from being executed again in the second preparation state ST5.

When the transition to the first BB state occurs when the advantageous end preparation flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1" in the advantageous section, even if the transition to the first BB state occurs, the normal game section is normal. Since the transition from the section to the advantageous section does not occur, the transition lottery process to the RT state ST6 triggered by the transition to the first BB state is not executed. As a result, even if the transition to the first BB state occurs, it is possible to create a situation in which the transition lottery process to the RT state ST6 is not executed.

If the first BB prize is established in the normal section, the first BB state is set and the section is advantageous. Then, the transition lottery process to the RT state ST6 is executed based on the setting in the advantageous section. As a result, when the first BB state occurs in the normal section, not only the profit from the BB state ST2 is given to the player, but also the profit of the transition lottery process to the RT state ST6 is given to the player. As a result, it is possible to raise the degree of attention of the player to the occurrence of the first BB state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

When the first BB prize is established in the normal section, the game section is set as an advantageous section at the start of the first BB state. This makes it possible to increase the player's attention to the timing at which the first BB state is started.

When the index value IV = 2 or 3 in the BB state ST2 is won in the situation where the first BB state is an advantageous section, the transition lottery process to the RT state ST6 is executed. As a result, it is possible to increase the attention of the player not only at the start of the first BB state but also after the start.

Transition to RT state ST6 executed when the first BB state is started Transition to RT state ST6 on condition that the lottery process does not win the transition to RT state ST6. Transition to RT state ST6 in the middle of the first BB state. The lottery process is executed. This makes it possible to prevent the establishment of the transition condition to the RT state ST6 from occurring in duplicate.

Transition to RT state ST6 executed when the first BB state is started If the lottery process is successful for transition to the RT state ST6, the index value IV = 2 in the BB state ST2 in the first BB state. Or, the promotion lottery process of the continuation rate is executed when the winner is won in 3. As a result, even if the transition condition to the RT state ST6 is satisfied when the first BB state is started, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the game in the first BB state.

In the situation where the game section is a normal section, the game section is set as an advantageous section based on the setting of the SB winning data, and the game state is the first based on the setting of the SB winning data in the post-bonus state ST3. It shifts to the preparation state ST4. By sharing the transition condition of the game section and the transition condition of the game state as the setting of the SB winning data in this way, it is possible to increase the degree of attention of the player to the setting of the SB winning data.

When the SB winning data is set, the game section shifts from the normal section to the advantageous section regardless of whether or not the SB winning is established, whereas the SB winning data is set and the SB winning is established. If not, the game state shifts from the post-bonus state ST3 to the first preparation state ST4. As a result, the situation where the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section and at the same time the transition from the post-bonus state ST3 to the first preparation state ST4 occurs, and the situation where the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section occurs but the post-bonus state ST3 is maintained. It becomes possible to diversify the transition situation of the combination between the game section and the game state.

<Second embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the player can select whether or not to delay the transition timing from the second preparation state ST5 to the RT state ST6. The configuration for enabling the delay of the transition timing will be described below. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 46 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the combination of the winning data and the point value PV set in each of the index values IV = 7 to 13 in the second preparation state ST5.

As shown in FIG. 46, in the lottery table of the second preparation state ST5 in the present embodiment, only the normal replay winning data is set for the index value IV = 7 as in the first embodiment. On the other hand, in the index values IV = 8 to 13, not only the normal replay winning data and the second promotion replay winning data but also the continuous replay winning data are set. The continuous replay winning data is the winning data that enables the establishment of the continuous replay winning. If the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is the "replay" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "bell" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is the "bell" symbol, the continuous replay prize is established. .. If the continuous replay prize is established, the privilege of replay will be given. Further, if the normal replay winning is established even though the index value IV = 8 to 13 is won in the second preparation state ST5, the gaming state is the second preparation state as in the first embodiment. The transition from ST5 to the normal state ST1 will be made, but if the continuous replay winning is established when the index value IV = 8 to 13 is won, the second preparation state ST5 will be continued.

FIG. 47 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R and the winning mode established when the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are won at the index value IV = 8 to 13 in the second preparation state ST5. When winning with an index value IV = 8, as shown in FIG. 47, when the first stop is the left reel 32L, the second stop is the middle reel 32M, and the third stop is the right reel 32R. The second promotion replay prize is surely established regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44, the first stop is the left reel 32L, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the middle reel 32M. In the case of, the continuous replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and in other cases, the normal replay winning is established regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. Further, when the index values IV = 9 to 13, as shown in FIG. 47, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R for which the second promotion replay winning is established is within the range of 6 stop orders, and the index value IV = In addition to being different from 8, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R on which the continuous replay winning is established is different from the index value IV = 8 within the range of 6 stop orders. As a result, even if the winning combination is won at any of the index values IV = 8 to 13 in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 13) in the second preparation state ST5, the stop order corresponding to the establishment of the second promotion replay winning is performed. Unless the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped, the second promotion replay winning will not be established, and similarly, the reels 32L, 32M, 32R will be stopped in the stopping order corresponding to the establishment of the continuous replay winning. Unless it is done, the continuous replay prize will not be established.

By the way, as a combination of symbols that enables the establishment of the second promotion replay prize, the combination of "replay" symbol, "bell" symbol, "replay" symbol, "bell" symbol, "replay" symbol, "bell" symbol In the configuration where is set, the combination of "replay" symbol, "bell" symbol, and "bell" symbol is set as the combination of symbols that enables the establishment of continuous replay winning, and the index. When the values IV = 8 and 9, both the second promotion replay prize and the continuous replay prize need to be stopped first, and when the index values IV = 10 and 11, the second promotion replay prize is won. It is necessary to stop the middle reel 32M first for both the continuous replay winning and the continuous replay winning, and when the index values IV = 12 and 13, both the second promotion replay winning and the continuous replay winning stop the right reel 32R first. There is a need. As a result, if any of the index values IV = 8 to 13 is won in the second preparation state ST5, one of the second promotion replay winning, the continuous replay winning, and the normal replay winning is surely established.

FIG. 48 shows a situation in which the second preparation state ST5 is an advantageous section and a condition for transitioning to the RT state ST6 is satisfied, and the number of continuous games in the advantageous section is 30 games more than the number of trigger games. To explain how the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is notified by the image display device 63 when the index value IV = 10 is won in the situation where the number of games is small or more and the number of games is less than the opportunity. It is explanatory drawing of. As shown in FIG. 48, a continuous game number image G4 for notifying the continuous game number of the advantageous section is displayed on the upper edge side of the image display device 63. By confirming the continuous game number image G4, the player can grasp the number of games required to reach the number of trigger games in the advantageous section. The configuration is not limited to the configuration in which the number of continuous games in the advantageous section is displayed, and the configuration may be such that the number of remaining games until the number of trigger games is reached is displayed.

On the center side of the image display device 63, a first stop order image G5 that enables the establishment of the second promotion replay winning is displayed. As the first stop order image G5, the same number of individual images as the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are displayed side by side, and an image showing the stop order of the corresponding reels 32L, 32M, 32R is displayed in each individual image. Specifically, when the index value IV = 10 is won, the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the right reel 32R, the second promotion is performed. Since the replay winning is established, the images in the corresponding order are displayed as the first stop order image G5.

On the lower edge side of the image display device 63, a second stop order image G6 that enables the establishment of a continuous replay winning is displayed. As the second stop order image G6, the same number of individual images as the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are displayed side by side, and an image showing the stop order of the corresponding reels 32L, 32M, 32R is displayed in each individual image. Specifically, when the index value IV = 10 is won, the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the left reel 32L. Is satisfied, so the images in the corresponding order are displayed as the second stop order image G6.

By displaying not only the first stop order image G5 but also the second stop order image G6 as described above, when the transition condition to the RT state ST6 is satisfied in the second preparation state ST5, an advantageous section is obtained. In relation to the number of continuous games, let the player choose whether to establish the second promotion replay prize and shift to the RT state ST6, or to establish the continuous replay prize and let the player stay in the second preparation state ST5. Is possible. For example, if the number of continuous games in the advantageous section is close to the number of trigger games, the number of continuous games in the advantageous section is equal to or greater than the number of trigger games by intentionally establishing a continuous replay prize and delaying the transition to the RT state ST6. It is possible to shift to the RT state ST6 in the situation where it has become. Then, since the transition to the RT state ST6 occurs in the situation where the number of games is equal to or greater than the number of trigger games, the RT state ST6 progresses in the normal section, so that the SB winning data is set in the RT state ST6. By doing so, not only the transition condition to the RT state ST6 is surely satisfied, but also 100% is surely selected as the continuation rate of the RT state ST6. On the other hand, if the number of continuous games in the advantageous section is far from the number of trigger games, it is possible to establish the second promotion replay prize and shift to the RT state ST6 at an early stage.

Hereinafter, a processing configuration for enabling the execution of the above notification will be described. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing a notification control process executed by the main MPU 72.

In steps S2201 to S2204, the same processing as in steps S1101 to S1104 of the notification control processing (FIG. 27) in the first embodiment is executed. When the player wins in any of the index values IV = 8 to 13 in the second preparation state ST5 (step S2205: YES), "1" is set in the advantageous section flag of the main RAM 74 and the advantageous end of the main RAM 74. It is determined whether or not the value of the preparation flag is "0" (step S2206). When an affirmative determination is made in step S2206, it is determined whether or not the number of continuous games in the advantageous section is 30 games less than the number of trigger games and less than the number of trigger games (step S2207). ..

If a negative determination is made in step S2207, the second display data setting process is executed (step S2208). In the setting process of the second display data, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enables the establishment of the second promotion replay winning based on the information of the winning combination of the index values IV = 8 to 13 this time. The display control of the combined display unit 66 is performed so that the display of the value corresponding to the above is started by the combined display unit 66. The display of the combined display unit 66 is continued until all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped in this game. Further, the second stop order command is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S2209). In the second stop order command, information is set so that the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enables the establishment of the second promotion replay prize in this game can be specified by the effect side MPU 92.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2207, the third display data setting process is executed (step S2210). In the setting process of the third display data, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enables the establishment of the second promotion replay winning based on the information of the winning combination of the index values IV = 8 to 13 this time. The combined display unit 66 is controlled so that the display of the value corresponding to the combination with the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enables the establishment of the continuous replay winning is started by the combined display unit 66. The display of the combined display unit 66 is continued until all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped in this game. Further, the third stop order command is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S2211). The third stop order command is the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enables the establishment of the second promotion replay prize in this game, and the stop of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enable the establishment of the continuous replay prize. Information is set so that the order can be specified by the effect side MPU 92.

FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing a notification process executed by the effect side MPU 92. The notification process is repeatedly executed in the effect side MPU 92 with a relatively short cycle (for example, 4 msec).

When the second stop order command is received from the main MPU 72 (step S2301: YES), the image of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R corresponding to the second stop order command received this time is displayed on the image display device 63. The data required for this is set (step S2302). However, at this timing, the image of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R corresponding to the second stop order command this time is not displayed on the image display device 63. After that, a value corresponding to the notification delay period is set in the measurement counter provided in the effect side RAM 94 (step S2303). The notification delay period is set as a period shorter than the acceleration period from the start of rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to the constant speed rotation, and is set to, for example, 0.5 msec. The value set in the measurement counter is subtracted each time the notification process is started. Then, when the notification delay period has elapsed, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R corresponding to the data set in step S2302 is displayed on the image display device 63. In this case, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enables the establishment of the second promotion replay winning is displayed on the image display device 63.

When the third stop order command is received from the main MPU 72 (step S2304: YES), the image of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R corresponding to the third stop order command received this time is displayed on the image display device 63. The data required for this is set (step S2305). However, at this timing, the image of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R corresponding to the third stop order command this time is not displayed on the image display device 63. Further, in step S2305, the data corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enables the establishment of the second promotion replay winning, and the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enable the establishment of the continuous replay winning. Both with the corresponding data are set. After that, a value corresponding to the notification delay period is set in the measurement counter provided in the effect side RAM 94 (step S2306). The notification delay period is as described above. Then, when the notification delay period has elapsed, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R corresponding to the data set in step S2305 is displayed on the image display device 63. In this case, both the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enable the establishment of the second promotion replay prize and the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enable the establishment of the continuous replay prize are both the image display device 63. Is displayed (see FIG. 48).

In step S2307 of the notification process, the process corresponding to the first stop order command and the processes of steps S1204 to S1205 of the notification process (FIG. 28) in the first embodiment are executed.

FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing a second preparation state process executed by the main MPU 72.

In steps S2401 to S2406, the same processing as in steps S1001 to S1006 of the second preparation state processing (FIG. 26) in the first embodiment is executed. If the second promotion replay winning data is set in this game and the second promotion replay winning is not established (step S2403: YES, step S2404: NO), whether or not the continuous replay winning is established. Is determined (step S2407). If the continuous replay winning is established (step S2407: YES), the second preparation state process is terminated as it is. As a result, the second preparation state ST5 will continue. If the continuous replay winning is not established (step S2407: NO), the normal replay winning is established. In this case, the status counter of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S2408). As a result, the gaming state shifts from the second preparation state ST5 to the normal state ST1.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, it is advantageous in the case where the transition condition to the RT state ST6 is satisfied in the second preparation state ST5 and the number of continuous games in the advantageous section is close to the number of trigger games. In relation to the number of continuous games in the section, let the player choose whether to establish the second promotion replay prize and shift to the RT state ST6, or to establish the continuous replay prize and stay in the second preparation state ST5. It becomes possible. For example, if the number of continuous games in the advantageous section is close to the number of trigger games, the number of continuous games in the advantageous section is equal to or greater than the number of trigger games by intentionally establishing a continuous replay prize and delaying the transition to the RT state ST6. It is possible to shift to the RT state ST6 in such a situation. Then, since the transition to the RT state ST6 occurs in the situation where the number of games is equal to or greater than the number of trigger games, the RT state ST6 progresses in the normal section, so that the SB winning data is set in the RT state ST6. By doing so, not only the transition condition to the RT state ST6 is surely satisfied, but also 100% is surely selected as the continuation rate of the RT state ST6. On the other hand, if the number of continuous games in the advantageous section is far from the number of trigger games, it is possible to establish the second promotion replay prize and shift to the RT state ST6 at an early stage. With the above configuration, it is possible to make the player predict the optimum timing as the timing for establishing the second promotion replay prize, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, even if the transition condition to the RT state ST6 is satisfied in the second preparation state ST5, the number of continuous games in the advantageous section is close to the number of trigger games, which is not within the range of the predetermined number of games. The stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enables the establishment of the second promotion replay prize is notified, but the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enable the establishment of the continuous replay prize is not notified. As a result, it is possible to limit the period during which the person can intentionally stay in the second preparation state ST5, and it is possible to prevent excessive staying in the second preparation state ST5. Will be.

When the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enable the establishment of the second promotion replay winning is notified in the second preparation state ST5, the reels 32L, 32M, that enable the establishment of the continuous replay winning. The stop order of 32R may be always notified. In this case, it is possible to secure a long period for the player to select.

<Third embodiment>
In this embodiment, a plurality of types of SB winning data are set. Hereinafter, a configuration different from that of the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 52 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a lottery table for a normal state in the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 52, index values IV of "1" to "8" are set in the lottery table for the normal state. The winning data set to the index value IV = 1 to 6 is the same as the first embodiment, and in this case, the first SB winning data is set to the index value IV = 6. The first SB winning data is the same as the SB winning data in the first embodiment, and the combination of symbols corresponding to the establishment of the first SB winning is the combination of the symbols corresponding to the establishment of the SB winning in the first embodiment. It is the same. Further, the second SB winning data is set in the index value IV = 7, and the normal replay winning data is set in the index value IV = 8. The point value PV set to the index value IV = 6 is "3000", whereas the point value PV set to the index value IV = 7 is "1000". Therefore, the probability that the second SB winning data will be set is lower than the probability that the first SB winning data will be set. Further, the probability that the first SB winning data is set and the probability that the second SB winning data is set are the same between the set values of "setting 1" to "setting 6".

The relationship between the index value IV and the winning data is the same in the post-bonus state ST3 and the RT state ST6. Further, in the first preparation state ST4, the index value IV = 9 to 14 is set to the normal replay winning data and the first promotion replay winning data, and in the second preparation state ST5, the index value IV = 9 to 14 is set. The normal replay winning data and the second promotion replay winning data are set.

As for the combination of symbols that enable the establishment of the second SB prize, the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is the "LUCKY" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "red 7" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is. It is a "red 7" pattern. When the second SB winning data is set, it is possible to establish the second SB winning regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, but the stop buttons 42 to 44 with respect to the rotation position of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. Depending on the stop operation timing of, the second SB winning may not be established.

FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing a transition trigger process of the RT state ST6 executed by the main MPU 72.

First, by determining whether or not "1" is set in the advantageous start flag of the main RAM 74, it is determined whether or not the game is the first game to be started after the transition to the advantageous section occurs (). Step S2501). If an affirmative judgment is made in step S2501, after clearing the advantageous start flag of the main RAM 74 to "0" (step S2502), whether or not the information on the continuation rate of the RT state ST6 is set in the main RAM 74 is determined. Determination (step S2503). When a negative judgment is made in step S2503, if the transition to the advantageous section this time is triggered by the setting of the first SB winning data (step S2504: YES), the table group corresponding to the first SB winning data. (Step S2505), and if the transition to the advantageous section this time is triggered by the setting of the second SB winning data (step S2506: YES), the table group corresponding to the second SB winning data is read (step S2505). In step S2507), if the transition to the advantageous section this time is triggered by the establishment of the first BB prize (step S2506: NO), the table corresponding to the first BB prize is read out (step S2508).

The table group corresponding to the first SB winning data is the table group shown in FIGS. 21 (a) to 21 (d) in the first embodiment, and the table corresponding to the first BB winning is the table group in the first embodiment. It is a table shown in FIG. 21 (e). 54 (a) to 54 (d) are explanatory views for explaining the table group corresponding to the second SB winning data. As shown in FIGS. 21 (d) and 54 (d), the table for the RT state is the same in the table group corresponding to the first SB winning data and the table group corresponding to the second SB winning data. As a result, in the situation where the RT state ST6 is a normal section, regardless of whether the first SB winning data or the second SB winning data is set, the transition condition to the RT state ST6 is surely satisfied and the largest continuation is achieved. The rate of 100% is definitely selected.

As shown in FIGS. 21 (b) to 21 (c) and 54 (b) to 54 (c), the second table for the normal state and the table for various states are tables corresponding to the first SB winning data. Although the transition condition to the RT state ST6 is surely satisfied in either the group or the table group corresponding to the second SB winning data, the continuation rate of the RT state ST6 is higher in the table group corresponding to the second SB winning data. It is more advantageous for the player than the table group corresponding to the first SB winning data. Further, as shown in FIGS. 21 (a) and 54 (a), the first table for the normal state has a configuration in which the transition condition to the RT state ST6 is not surely satisfied in the table group corresponding to the first SB winning data. On the other hand, in the table group corresponding to the second SB winning data, the transition condition to the RT state ST6 can be satisfied. Therefore, the table group corresponding to the second SB winning data is more advantageous to the player than the table group corresponding to the first SB winning data. That is, when the second SB winning data having a relatively low winning probability in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 13) is set, the first SB winning data having a relatively high winning probability in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 13) is set. The advantage in the transition lottery process to the RT state ST6 is higher than when it is set.

Returning to the description of the RT state transition trigger process (FIG. 53), after executing any of the processes of step S2505, step S2507, and step S2508, the transition lottery process to the RT state ST6 is executed (step S2509). In the transition lottery process, when the execution trigger of this time is the setting of the first SB winning data, the lottery process is executed with reference to the table corresponding to the current gaming state among the table groups read in step S2505. When the current execution trigger is the setting of the second SB winning data, the lottery process is executed with reference to the table corresponding to the current gaming state among the tables read in step S2507, and the current execution trigger is the first. In the case of 1BB winning, the lottery process is executed with reference to the table read out in step S2508.

If the result of the shift lottery process to the RT state ST6 is an error result (step S2510: NO), "1" is set in the advantageous end preparation flag of the main RAM 74 (step S2511). As a result, the condition for shifting to the RT state ST6 is not satisfied. If the result of the lottery process for shifting to the RT state ST6 is the winning result (step S2510: YES), the value of the advantageous end preparation flag of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S2512). As a result, the condition for shifting to the RT state ST6 is satisfied in the advantageous section. Further, the storage process of the continuation rate is executed (step S2513). In the continuation rate storage process, information on the continuation rate selected when a winning result is obtained in the transition lottery process to the RT state ST6 is stored in the main RAM 74.

According to the above configuration, the first SB winning data and the second SB winning data are set as the SB winning data that triggers the transition to the advantageous section. Then, the advantage of the transition lottery process to the RT state ST6 executed in the first game after shifting to the advantageous section is the advantageous section shifted when the first SB winning data is set and the second SB winning data. It is different from the advantageous section that has shifted due to the setting of. As a result, the player not only expects the SB winning data to be set, but also expects the SB winning data on the side that is advantageous to the player to be set. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

It should be noted that the configuration is not limited to the configuration in which two types of SB winning data, the first SB winning data and the second SB winning data, are set as the SB winning data that triggers the transition to the advantageous section, and even if three or more types are set. good. In this case, each of the three or more types of SB winning data set may be a trigger for the transition to the advantageous section, and the advantage in the subsequent transition lottery process to the RT state ST6 may be different.

<Fourth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the condition for shifting to the RT state ST6 and the normal section is different from the first embodiment in relation to the number of continuous games in the advantageous section. Hereinafter, a configuration different from that of the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the end processing of the advantageous section executed by the main MPU 72. In steps S261 to S2607, the same process as in steps S1901 to S1907 of the end process of the advantageous section (FIG. 39) in the first embodiment is executed. In step S2608, the value of the continuous game number counter of the main RAM 74 is added by 1. After that, it is determined whether or not the second promotion replay winning is established (step S2609). If the second promotion replay winning is not established (step S2609: NO), the initial value of the advantageous section is provided on condition that the value of the continuous game number counter is equal to or greater than the value corresponding to the upper limit number of games (step S2610: YES). Along with executing the conversion process (step S2611), the extinguishing process of the advantageous section display unit 67 is executed (step S2612).

When the second promotion replay winning is established (step S2609: YES), it is determined whether or not the value of the continuous game number counter corresponds to any of the first to fifth trigger ranges (step S2613). Each of the first to fifth trigger ranges is set as a range of a plurality of consecutive games within the range of the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section, and a plurality of trigger ranges are provided between the first to fifth trigger ranges. The game interval of the game is set. Specifically, the first opportunity range corresponds to 250 to 300 games of continuous games in the advantageous section, the second opportunity range corresponds to 500 to 550 games of continuous games in the advantageous section, and the third. The opportunity range corresponds to 750 to 800 games of the number of continuous games in the advantageous section, the fourth opportunity range corresponds to 1000 to 1050 games of the number of continuous games in the advantageous section, and the fifth opportunity range corresponds to the advantageous section. It corresponds to the number of continuous games of 1250 to 1300 games.

When the value of the continuous game number counter corresponds to any of the first to fifth trigger ranges (step S2613: YES), the initialization process of the advantageous section is executed (step S2611), and the advantageous section display unit 67 (Step S2612). As a result, if the transition to the RT state ST6 occurs in a situation where the number of continuous games in the advantageous section falls under any of the first to fifth trigger ranges, the RT state ST6 is the normal section. It becomes a situation. According to this configuration, it is possible to increase the frequency of occurrence of a situation in which the RT state is ST6 and which is a normal section, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game in a situation where the game section is an advantageous section.

<Fifth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the execution mode of the lottery process for shifting to the RT state ST6 is different from the first embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from that of the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing a transition trigger process of the RT state ST6 executed by the main MPU 72. First, by determining whether or not "1" is set in the advantageous start flag of the main RAM 74, it is determined whether or not the game is the first game to be started after the transition to the advantageous section occurs (). Step S2701). When an affirmative judgment is made in step S2701, after clearing the advantageous start flag of the main RAM 74 to "0" (step S2702), whether or not the information on the continuation rate of the RT state ST6 is set in the main RAM 74 is determined. Determination (step S2703). If a negative determination is made in step S2703, the table corresponding to the winning combination in this game is read out (step S2704). Then, the transition lottery process to the RT state ST6 is executed (step S2705). In the lottery process for shifting to the RT state ST6, the information of the lottery counter that is periodically updated in the main RAM 74 is read, and the read information is collated with the table read in step S2704.

If the result of the shift lottery process to the RT state ST6 is an error result (step S2706: NO), "1" is set in the advantageous end preparation flag of the main RAM 74 (step S2707). As a result, the condition for shifting to the RT state ST6 is not satisfied. If the result of the lottery process for shifting to the RT state ST6 is the winning result (step S2706: YES), the value of the advantageous end preparation flag of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S2708). As a result, the condition for shifting to the RT state ST6 is satisfied in the advantageous section. Further, the storage process of the continuation rate is executed (step S2709). In the continuation rate storage process, information on the continuation rate selected when a winning result is obtained in the transition lottery process to the RT state ST6 is stored in the main RAM 74.

That is, in the present embodiment, when executing the transition lottery process to the RT state ST6, the game that executes the transition lottery process does not use the table corresponding to the game state at the timing of executing the transition lottery process. The table corresponding to the result of the lottery process (FIG. 13) of the winning combination is used. In the table, the lower the winning probability in the winning combination process (FIG. 13), the higher the probability of winning the transition to the RT state ST6 in the corresponding table, and the winning combination process (FIG. 13). The lower the winning probability in, the easier it is to select a higher continuation rate as the continuation rate of the RT state ST6 in the corresponding table. As a result, the player pays attention to the result of the lottery process (FIG. 13) of the role in the first game after shifting to the advantageous section, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the transition lottery process to the RT state ST6 may be executed by using the table corresponding to the combination of the game state and the lottery process (FIG. 13) in the first game after shifting to the advantageous section. .. In this case, it is possible to make the execution mode of the transition lottery process to the RT state ST6 more complicated, and it is possible to prevent the transition lottery process from becoming uniform.

Further, in the above embodiment, as a table referred to in the transition lottery process to the RT state ST6, a table corresponding to a combination having a different winning probability between the set values of "setting 1" to "setting 6" is also set. However, instead of this, if the winning combination is won, the transition lottery process may not be executed even in the first game after shifting to the advantageous section, and after shifting to the advantageous section. If the winning combination is won in the first game, the execution of the transition lottery process is delayed, and then in the game in which the winning probability is common between the set values of "Setting 1" to "Setting 6". It may be configured that the transition lottery process to the RT state ST6 is executed by using the table corresponding to the combination. In this case, it is possible to prevent an advantage or disadvantage from occurring between the settings in the probability that the transition condition to the RT state ST6 is satisfied.

In addition, the types of replay winning data that are easy to set in the combination lottery process (FIG. 13) are different for each game state ST1, ST3 to ST6, and the types of replay winning data set in the game that has shifted to the advantageous section are supported. It may be configured that the transition lottery process to the RT state ST6 is executed by using the table. For example, although the first to fifth replay winning data can be set in any of the normal state ST1, the post-bonus state ST3, the first preparation state ST4, the second preparation state ST5, and the RT state ST6, the first in the normal state ST1. The replay winning data is easy to set, the second replay winning data is easy to set in the post-bonus state ST3, the third replay winning data is easy to set in the first preparation state ST4, and the fourth in the second preparation state ST5. The replay winning data is easily set, and the fifth replay winning data is easily set in the RT state ST6. Then, the table for the lottery is set so that the larger the value of n in the nth replay winning data, the easier it is to win the transition in the transition lottery process to the RT state ST6. As a result, while making the probability of winning the transition in the transition lottery process to the RT state ST6 different depending on the gaming state, the table and the table in which the probability of winning the transition is relatively low regardless of the gaming state. It is possible to allow any of the relatively high tables to be selected.

<Sixth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the execution mode of the lottery process for shifting to the RT state ST6 is different from the first embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from that of the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing a game section control process executed by the main MPU 72.

In step S2801 of the game section control process, the same process as in steps S1401 to S1408 of the game section control process (FIG. 31) in the first embodiment is executed. Further, in the control process of the game section, when "1" is set in the advantageous section flag of the main RAM 74 and it is an advantageous section (step S2802: YES), the processes of steps S2812 and S2813 are executed. The processing contents of these steps S2812 and S2813 are the same as those of steps S1416 and S1417 in the game section control processing (FIG. 31) in the first embodiment.

When it is a normal section (step S2802: NO), when SB winning data is set in this game (step S2803: YES), both the advantageous section flag and the advantageous start flag of the main RAM 74 are set to "1". (Step S2804), and clear the value of the continuous game number counter of the main RAM 74 to "0" (step S2805). In addition, a lighting process for setting the advantageous section display unit 67 to the lighting state is executed (step S2806).

After that, the transition lottery process at the time of winning is executed (step S2807). In the transition lottery process at the time of winning, the common table is read from the main ROM 73, the information of the lottery counter that is periodically updated in the main RAM 74 is read, and the read information of the lottery counter is collated with the common table. .. The common table is common regardless of the current gaming state and the current set value, and specifically, it is set so that the transition to the RT state ST6 is won with a probability of 10%.

When the transition to the RT state ST6 is won in the transition lottery process at the time of winning (step S2808: YES), the advantageous end preparation flag of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S2809). As a result, the condition for shifting to the RT state ST6 is satisfied. Further, the storage process of the continuation rate is executed (step S2810). In the storage process, information of 50%, which is the lowest continuation rate as the continuation rate, is stored in the main RAM 74. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and if a winning result is obtained in the transition lottery process at the time of winning, the continuation rate to be set may be selected from the continuation rates of 6 stages.

In step S2811, the same process as in steps S1413 to S1415 of the game section control process (FIG. 31) in the first embodiment is executed.

FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing a transition trigger process of the RT state ST6 executed by the main MPU 72.

First, by determining whether or not "1" is set in the advantageous start flag of the main RAM 74, it is determined whether or not the game is the first game to be started after the transition to the advantageous section occurs (). Step S2901). If an affirmative judgment is made in step S2901, after clearing the advantageous start flag of the main RAM 74 to "0" (step S2902), whether or not the information on the continuation rate of the RT state ST6 is set in the main RAM 74 is determined. Determination (step S2903). If a negative determination is made in step S2903, a lottery process for shifting to the RT state ST6 is executed (step S2904). In the transition lottery process, the lottery is executed using the table corresponding to the current gaming state as in step S1504 of the transition trigger process (FIG. 32) of the RT state ST6 in the first embodiment. Then, when the result of the lottery process for shifting to the RT state ST6 is an error result (step S2905: NO), "1" is set in the advantageous end preparation flag of the main RAM 74 (step S2906), and the RT state ST6 is entered. If the result of the transition lottery process is winning (step S2905: YES), the value of the advantageous end preparation flag of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S2907). As a result, the condition for shifting to the RT state ST6 is satisfied in the advantageous section. Further, the storage process of the continuation rate is executed (step S2908). In the continuation rate storage process, information on the continuation rate selected when a winning result is obtained in the transition lottery process to the RT state ST6 is stored in the main RAM 74.

If it is determined in step S2903 that the information on the continuation rate of the RT state ST6 is set in the main RAM 74, the continuation rate promotion lottery process is executed (step S2909). In the promotion lottery process, the promotion lottery table corresponding to the current gaming state is read out. The promotion lottery table is set so that the probability of winning the result in the promotion lottery process differs depending on the game state. Then, the information of the lottery counter that is periodically updated in the main RAM 74 is read out, and the read information is collated with the promotion lottery table corresponding to the current gaming state. If the promotion is won (step S2910: YES), the continuation rate update process is executed (step S2911). In the continuation rate update process, the continuation rate information stored in the main RAM 74 is updated so that the continuation rate of the RT state ST6 is one step higher. If the continuation rate has already reached the maximum, the promotion lottery process for the continuation rate (step S2909) is not executed.

According to the above configuration, the lottery process for shifting to the RT state ST6 is executed not only in the game that is started first after shifting to the advantageous section but also in the game in which the SB winning data that triggers the transition to the advantageous section is set. Will be done. As a result, the lottery process for shifting to the RT state ST6 is executed a plurality of times for the transition to the advantageous section, and it is possible to increase the frequency with which the conditions for shifting to the RT state ST6 are satisfied.

In addition, in the transition lottery process at the time of winning, which is executed in the game in which the SB winning data that triggers the transition to the advantageous section is set, a common table that is common regardless of the current game state and the current set value is used. The lottery is executed. This makes it possible to simplify the processing configuration of the transition lottery process at the time of winning.

In addition, when the transition to the RT state ST6 is won in the transition lottery process at the time of winning, the promotion lottery process of the continuation rate is executed in the game that is started first after shifting to the advantageous section. As a result, if the transition to the RT state ST6 is won in the transition lottery process at the time of winning, an opportunity to further promote the continuation rate of the RT state ST6 will occur, and the winner will be won in the transition lottery process at the time of winning. It is possible to increase the player's expectation for the result.

In the transition lottery process at the time of winning, a lottery may be executed as to whether or not the transition condition to the RT state ST6 is satisfied by using the table corresponding to the game states ST1 to ST6 at that time. For example, various tables may be set so that the probability of winning the transition to the RT state ST6 differs depending on the game states ST1 to ST6. This makes it possible to increase the player's attention to the gaming states ST1 to ST6 at the time when the SB winning data is set.

In addition, if the transition to the RT state ST6 is won in the transition lottery process at the time of winning, the continuation rate promotion lottery process is performed in the transition trigger process of the RT state ST6 executed after being set in the advantageous section. Instead of the configuration to be executed, the configuration in which the promotion lottery process of the continuation rate is not executed may be used. This makes it possible to prevent the advantage of setting the SB winning data from becoming extremely high.

In addition, even if the first BB prize is established in the normal section, the transition lottery process at the time of winning is executed at that time, and even if the first BB state is in the advantageous section, the RT state ST6 is entered. The transition lottery process or the promotion lottery process for the continuation rate may be executed. This makes it possible to increase the advantage of the occurrence of the first BB state.

In addition, when the advantageous section is set based on the SB winning data being set, or when the advantageous section is set based on the establishment of the first BB prize, in one case, the transition lottery at the time of winning is made. Not only the processing but also the transition lottery process to the RT state ST6 or the promotion lottery process of the continuation rate is executed based on the setting of the advantageous section after that, and on the other hand, the transition lottery process at the time of winning is not executed. The configuration may be such that the transition lottery process to the RT state ST6 or the promotion lottery process of the continuation rate is executed based on the setting of the advantageous section. Further, on one side, not only the transition lottery process at the time of winning but also the transition lottery process to the RT state ST6 or the promotion lottery process of the continuation rate is executed based on the setting of the advantageous section after that, and on the other hand, at the time of winning. The transition lottery process of the above may be executed, but the transition lottery process to the RT state ST6 based on the setting of the advantageous section and the promotion lottery process of the continuation rate may not be executed. As a result, there are cases where an advantageous section is set based on the setting of SB winning data and cases where an advantageous section is set based on the establishment of the first BB prize. It is possible to give a difference to.

<7th Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the condition for forcibly ending the advantageous section in relation to the number of continuous games in the advantageous section is different from the first embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from that of the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing the end processing of the advantageous section executed by the main MPU 72. In steps S3001 to S3007, the same process as in steps S1901 to S1907 of the end process (FIG. 39) of the advantageous section in the first embodiment is executed. In step S3008, the value of the continuous game number counter of the main RAM 74 is added by 1. After that, on condition that the value of the continuous game number counter is equal to or greater than the value corresponding to the upper limit number of games (step S3009: YES), the initialization process of the advantageous section is executed (step S3010), and the advantageous section display unit 67 (Step S3011).

That is, in the present embodiment, the condition for forcibly ending the advantageous section in relation to the number of continuous games in the advantageous section is set only on the condition that the number of continuous games in the advantageous section has reached the upper limit number of games. , Even if the transition to the RT state ST6 occurs in the situation where the number of continuous games in the advantageous section has reached the number of trigger games, the advantageous section is not ended. Therefore, in order to generate a situation in which the RT state ST6 is a normal section, it is necessary to generate an event in which the number of continuous games in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit number of games in the middle of the RT state ST6. As a result, it is possible to suppress the frequency of occurrence of a situation in which the RT state ST6 is a normal section. When the SB winning data is set in the RT state ST6 and the normal section, the transition condition to the RT state ST6 is surely satisfied and the RT state ST6 is set as in the first embodiment. The continuation rate is the maximum continuation rate. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the frequency with which the profit is given, and it is possible to enhance the satisfaction of the player when the profit is given.

Further, when the number of continuous games in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit number of games in the middle of the RT state ST6, it is usually the RT state ST6 that reaches the upper limit number of games at an early stage after the start of the RT state ST6. It is possible to secure a large number of games to be executed in a situation that is a section. As a result, it is possible to change the advantage of being in the RT state ST6 and the normal section according to the timing when the number of continuous games in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit number of games.

<Eighth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the ART state is set as the advantageous gaming state instead of the RT state ST6. Hereinafter, a configuration different from that of the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 60 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the correspondence between the combination of the symbols to be won and the privilege given when the prize is won.

Similar to the first embodiment, there are bell prize, watermelon prize, cherry prize, normal replay prize, first promotion replay prize, second promotion replay prize, first BB prize, second BB prize, and SB prize. is doing. The correspondence between these winning modes and the combination of symbols is the same as that of the first embodiment. Further, in the present embodiment, apart from these winning modes, there are a first supplementary prize, a second supplementary prize, and a third supplementary prize. On the main line ML, the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is either the "BAR" symbol or the "white 7" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "bell" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is "". If it is a "bell" pattern, it will be the first supplementary prize. Further, on the main line ML, the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is either a "watermelon" symbol or a "LUCKY" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is a "bell" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is. If it is a "bell" symbol, it will be the second supplementary prize. When the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is the "replay" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "bell" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is the "bell" symbol on the main line ML. It will be the third supplementary prize. In the case of any of the first supplementary prize to the third supplementary prize, the number of game media to be granted is "1". The number of grant targets is less than the maximum number of bets (specifically, "3") required to start one game. In addition, the number of game media to be granted when a bell prize is generated is "11", and the number of grant targets is larger than the maximum number of bets required to start one game (specifically, "3"). It is a large number.

FIG. 61 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a lottery table for a normal state in the present embodiment. Further, FIG. 62 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R and the winning mode established when the lottery table for the normal state is selected.

As shown in FIG. 61, index values IV of "1" to "9" are set in the lottery table for the normal state. The winning data set to the index value IV = 4 to 9 is the same as the winning data set to the index value IV = 2 to 7 of the lottery table for the normal state in the first embodiment. On the other hand, at the index values IV = 1 to 3, either the bell winning data or the first to third supplementary winning data is set.

Specifically, the bell winning data and the first supplementary winning data are set in the index value IV = 1. When winning with an index value IV = 1, as shown in FIG. 62, when the first stop is the left reel 32L, the types of the second stop target and the third stop target reels 32L, 32M, 32R and each of them. The bell prize is surely generated regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and the first supplementary prize is surely generated in other cases.

As shown in FIG. 61, the bell winning data and the second supplementary winning data are set in the index value IV = 2. When winning with an index value IV = 2, as shown in FIG. 62, when the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the types of the second stop target and the third stop target reels 32L, 32M, 32R and each of them. The bell prize is surely established regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and in other cases, the second supplementary prize is surely established.

As shown in FIG. 61, the bell winning data and the third supplementary winning data are set in the index value IV = 3. When winning with an index value IV = 3, as shown in FIG. 62, when the first stop is the right reel 32R, the types of the second stop target and the third stop target reels 32L, 32M, 32R and each of them. The bell prize is surely established regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and in other cases, the third supplementary prize is surely established.

The point value PV set for each of the index values IV = 1 to 3 is "13000", and the probabilities of winning in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 13) are the same. .. Further, the point value PV set in each of the index values IV = 1 to 3 is the same regardless of any of the set values of "setting 1" to "setting 6".

63 (a) to 63 (e) are explanatory views for explaining the winning data in which the index values IV = 9 or more in each of the game states ST1 and ST3 to ST6 other than the BB state ST2. The content of the winning data set to the index value IV = 1 to 8 and the point value PV set to the index value IV = 1 to 8 are the same in each game state ST1, ST3 to ST6 other than the BB state ST2. Is. Further, the lottery table in the BB state ST2 is the same as that of the first embodiment.

As shown in FIGS. 63 (a), 63 (b) and 63 (e), "9" is the maximum index value IV in all of the normal state ST1, the post-bonus state ST3 and the RT state ST6. , Only the normal replay winning data is set to the index value IV = 9.

As shown in FIG. 63 (c), in the first preparation state ST4, only the normal replay winning data is set to the index value IV = 9, and the normal replay winning data and the first promotion replay winning are set to the index value IV = 10 to 15. The combination with the data is set. The relationship between the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R at the index value IV = 10 to 15 and the winning mode established is the same as the case of the index value IV = 8 to 13 of the first preparation state ST4 in the first embodiment. Is.

As shown in FIG. 63 (d), in the second preparation state ST5, only the normal replay winning data is set to the index value IV = 9, and the normal replay winning data and the second promotion replay winning are set to the index value IV = 10 to 15. The combination with the data is set. The relationship between the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R at the index value IV = 10 to 15 and the winning mode established is the same as the case of the index value IV = 8 to 13 of the second preparation state ST5 in the first embodiment. Is.

The probability that a replay prize including a normal replay prize, a first promotion replay prize, and a second promotion replay prize will be established is the normal state ST1 <post-bonus state ST3 = first preparation state ST4 <second preparation state ST5 <RT state ST6. It has become a relationship of. Therefore, even in this embodiment, among the normal state ST1, the post-bonus state ST3, the first preparation state ST4, the second preparation state ST5, and the RT state ST6, the RT state ST6 is the most advantageous gaming state. , The normal state ST1 is the game state with the lowest advantage.

The transition mode of each game state ST1 to ST6 is the same as that of the first embodiment. That is, if the first BB prize is established in any of the normal state ST1, the post-bonus state ST3, the first preparation state ST4, the second preparation state ST5, and the RT state ST6, the process shifts to the first BB state and the second BB prize is awarded. If it is established, the state shifts to the second BB state. Further, when the first BB state or the second BB state is completed, the state shifts to the post-bonus state ST3, and when the SB winning data is set in the post-bonus state ST3 but the SB winning is not established, the first preparation state is established. It shifts to ST4, and if the first promotion replay prize is established in the first preparation state ST4, it shifts to the second preparation state ST5, and if the second promotion replay prize is established in the second preparation state ST5, it is in the RT state. Move to ST6. Further, the mode of transition to the advantageous section and the conditions for executing the transition lottery process to the RT state ST6 are also the same as those of the first embodiment. However, in the present embodiment, in the situation where the game states ST1 and ST3 to ST6 other than the BB state ST2 are advantageous sections, it does not matter whether or not "1" is set in the advantageous end preparation flag of the main RAM 74. , The stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enables the establishment of the bell winning when any of the index values IV = 1 to 3 is won is notified by the image display device 63 and the combined display unit 66, and the BB state is reached. Reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enable the establishment of a bell prize even if any of the index values IV = 1 to 3 is won in the game state ST1, ST3 to ST6 other than ST2 and in the normal section. The stop order is not notified. By notifying the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enables the establishment of the bell winning in the advantageous section in this way, it is possible to increase the advantage that the game section becomes the advantageous section.

FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing a notification control process executed by the main MPU 72.

When any of the index values IV = 1 to 3 is won in the non-BB state (the game state of any of the normal state ST1, the post-bonus state ST3, the first preparation state ST4, the second preparation state ST5, and the RT state ST6). (Step S3101: YES), subject to the condition that "1" is set in the advantageous section flag of the main RAM 74 and the current game section is an advantageous section (step S3102: YES), the setting process of the bell display data. Is executed (step S3103). In the setting process of the display data for the bell, it corresponds to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enables the establishment of the bell winning based on the information of the winning combination among the index values IV = 1 to 3. The display control of the combined display unit 66 is performed so that the display of the value is started by the combined display unit 66. The display of the combined display unit 66 is continued until all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped in this game.

After that, the bell stop order command is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S3104). In the bell stop order command, information is set so that the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enables the establishment of the bell winning in this game can be specified by the effect side MPU 92. When the production side MPU 92 receives the bell stop order command, the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enable the establishment of the bell prize at the timing before the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R becomes possible in this game. The notification of the stop order is started by the image display device 63.

After that, "1" is set in the notified flag provided in the main RAM 74 (step S3105). The notified flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify that the notification of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, which enables the establishment of the bell winning when the section shifts to the advantageous section, has been executed once or more. Is.

In steps S3106 to S3113 in the notification control process, the same processes as in steps S1101 to S1108 of the notification control process (FIG. 27) in the first embodiment are executed.

FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing the end processing of the advantageous section executed by the main MPU 72.

First, it is determined whether or not the transition condition to the normal state ST1 is satisfied in this game (step S3201). This process is the same as step S1901 of the end process (FIG. 39) of the advantageous section in the first embodiment. When the transition condition to the normal state ST1 is satisfied (step S3201: YES), it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the notified flag of the main RAM 74, and the bell is set in this advantageous section. It is determined whether or not the notification of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enables the winning is established once or more (step S3202). When "1" is set in the notified flag (step S3202: YES), the initialization process of the advantageous section is executed in the same manner as in step S1902 of the end process of the advantageous section (FIG. 39) in the first embodiment. (Step S3203). As a result, the game section shifts from the advantageous section to the normal section. After that, the extinguishing process for turning off the advantageous section display unit 67 is executed (step S3204).

On the other hand, when "1" is not set in the notified flag of the main RAM 74 (step S3202: NO), the delay flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set without executing the initialization process of the advantageous section. “1” is set (step S3205). The delay flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify that the transition from the advantageous section to the normal section is delayed, and the bell prize is won in the situation where "1" is set in the delay flag. When the notification of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enables the establishment is executed and "1" is set in the notified flag of the main RAM 74, the game section shifts from the advantageous section to the normal section.

In the end processing of the advantageous section, when the current gaming state is the normal state ST1 and the advantageous end preparation flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S3206 and step S3207: YES), the main RAM 74 It is determined whether or not "1" is set in the notified flag (step S3208). When "1" is set in the notified flag (step S3208: YES), the advantageous section initialization process is executed and the advantageous section display unit 67 is displayed in the same manner as in steps S3203 and S3204 (step S3209). The turn-off process for turning off the light is executed (step S3210). When "1" is not set in the notified flag (step S3208: NO), "1" is set in the delay flag of the main RAM 74 (step S3211).

When a negative determination is made in either step S3206 or step S3207, the value of the continuous game number counter of the main RAM 74 is added by 1 (step S3212). Then, on condition that the value of the continuous game number counter is equal to or greater than the value corresponding to the upper limit number of games (step S3213: YES), it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the notified flag of the main RAM 74. (Step S3214). When "1" is set in the notified flag (step S3214: YES), the advantageous section initialization process is executed and the advantageous section display unit 67 is displayed in the same manner as in steps S3203 and S3204 (step S3215). The turn-off process for turning off the light is executed (step S3216). When "1" is not set in the notified flag (step S3214: NO), "1" is set in the delay flag of the main RAM 74 (step S3217).

When a negative determination is made in step S3213, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in each of the notified flag and the delay flag of the main RAM 74 (step S3218). When an affirmative determination is made in step S3218, the initialization process of the advantageous section is executed and the extinguishing process for turning off the advantageous section display unit 67 is executed as in steps S3203 and S3204 (step S3219). (Step S3220). In the initialization process of the advantageous section in each of step S3203, step S3209, step S3215, and step S3219, the notified flag of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" and the delay flag of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0". do.

According to the above configuration, when shifting to the advantageous section, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enables the establishment of the bell winning at least once in the non-BB state is notified. The number of game media given when the bell prize is established is larger than the number of bets required to start one game (specifically, "3"). As a result, it is possible to increase the advantage of shifting to the advantageous section, and it is possible to increase the degree of attention of the player to shift to the advantageous section.

Even if the gaming state shifts to the normal state ST1, it is also advantageous in the normal state ST1 when the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enables the establishment of the bell winning after shifting to the advantageous section has not been notified. When the section is maintained and the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enables the establishment of the bell winning is notified, the game section shifts from the advantageous section to the normal section. As a result, the game section does not uniquely become the normal section when shifting to the normal state ST1, but may become the normal section when shifting to the normal state ST1, or the bell in the middle of the normal state ST1. The normal section may be set by notifying the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enable the winning. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the timing when the game section changes from the advantageous section to the normal section.

When the game section shifts from the normal section to the advantageous section in the normal state ST1, the reel 32L that enables the establishment of the bell prize in the advantageous section instead of immediately returning to the normal section when one game is exhausted in the advantageous section. , 32M, 32R returns to the normal section when the stop order is notified. This makes it possible to diversify the timing of returning to the normal section when the game section shifts from the normal section to the advantageous section in the normal state ST1.

The number of notifications of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, which enables the establishment of the bell winning required for the advantageous section to end, is set to one. As a result, it is possible to reduce the number of games staying in the advantageous section when the transition condition to the RT state ST6 is not satisfied even though the transition to the advantageous section is performed in the normal state ST1.

In the RT state ST6, which is an advantageous section, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enable the establishment of the bell winning is notified and the probability that the replay winning is established increases, whereas the RT state In the situation of ST6 and the normal section, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enables the establishment of the bell winning is not notified, but the probability that the replay winning is established is high. This makes it possible to set a plurality of levels of advantage even in the RT state ST6.

It should be noted that the suspension is not limited to the configuration in which the advantageous section can be terminated by executing the notification of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enables the establishment of the bell winning once. The configuration may be such that the order notification needs to be notified a predetermined number of times or more, such as twice or three times.

Further, after the notification of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enables the establishment of the bell winning is executed a number of times that can be terminated, the end lottery process for whether or not to end the advantageous section is executed. If the end lottery process results in a continuous loss, the advantageous section may end and the section may shift to the normal section. The trigger for executing this end lottery process is arbitrary, but for example, when the number of times the notification of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is executed becomes the number of times that the end possible trigger is reached, the end lottery is performed in each game. The process may be executed, or the end lottery process may be executed when a predetermined lottery opportunity winning combination is won or when a predetermined lottery opportunity winning prize is established.

In addition to the bell winning, winning data is set in which the winning is established when the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R becomes a predetermined stop order and the winning is established and the game medium is given. It may be configured. In this case, in order to end the advantageous section, the winning with the largest number of game media is completed among the plurality of types of winnings that are established when the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R becomes a predetermined stopping order. The configuration may be such that it is necessary to be established more than the number of triggers, and the number of awarding media is the smallest among the plurality of types of prizes that are established when the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R becomes a predetermined stop order. The configuration may be such that it is necessary to be established more than the number of times that the winning is triggered.

<Other embodiments>
It should be noted that the description is not limited to the contents of each of the above-described embodiments, and various modifications and improvements can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. For example, it may be changed as follows. Incidentally, the following configurations of different embodiments may be applied individually to the configurations of the above embodiments, or may be applied in combination. Further, the configurations of the above embodiments may be applied in combination with each other, or the configurations of the following different embodiments may be applied individually or in combination to the configurations in which the configurations of the above embodiments are combined with each other. good.

(1) The game section is not limited to a configuration in which a normal section in which the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is not notified and an advantageous section in which the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R can be notified are set. In any case, although the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R can be notified, a plurality of sections having different types of winning data to be notified of the stop order may be set, and in any case, the reel 32L may be notified. , 32M, 32R may be notified of the stop order, but a plurality of sections having different frequencies of execution of the stop order may be set. Even in this case, by giving a difference in the advantage regarding the notification of the stop order in the plurality of sections, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the transition of the game section.

(2) When SB winning data is set in the situation where the RT state ST6 is a normal section, the continuation rate of 100% is surely selected as the continuation rate of the RT state ST6. No, the continuation rate other than 100% is selected or the continuation rate of 100% is not selected, but the selection mode of the continuation rate is more advantageous than the case where the transition process to the RT state ST6 is executed in other situations. It may be a high configuration. Even in this case, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the setting of the SB winning data in the RT state ST6 and the normal section.

(3) The transition process to the RT state ST6, which is executed when the SB winning data is set in the situation where the RT state ST6 is a normal section, is to the RT state ST6 executed in another situation. The configuration is not limited to a configuration having a higher advantage than the transition lottery process of, and may be the same as or substantially the same as the advantage of the transition lottery process to the RT state ST6 executed in other predetermined situations. , The configuration may be less advantageous than the transition lottery process to the RT state ST6 executed in other situations. Further, even in the transition lottery process to the RT state ST6, which is executed when the SB winning data is set in the RT state ST6 and the normal section, the transition winning may not occur. ..

(4) In the case of the RT state ST6 and the normal section, the provision of profit to the player may be confirmed at that time. For example, in the case of the RT state ST6 and the normal section, even if the SB winning data is not set in the situation, the SB in the other gaming states ST1, ST3 to ST5 after the end of the RT state ST6 The transition to the RT state ST6 executed for the initial setting of the winning data may be configured so that the transition winning is surely achieved, and not only the transition winning is surely achieved, but also the RT state ST6 having the highest advantage is achieved. The continuation rate of may be selected. This makes it possible to increase the advantage of being in the RT state ST6 and being in the normal section.

(5) The opportunity to shift from the normal section to the advantageous section is not limited to the configuration in which the SB winning data is set or the first BB winning is established, for example, the SB winning data is set. At the same time, the fact that the SB prize is not established may be an opportunity to shift to the advantageous section. In this case, the trigger for the gaming section to shift from the normal section to the advantageous section and the trigger for the gaming state to shift from the post-bonus state ST3 to the first preparation state ST4 are the same.

In addition, the setting of watermelon winning data may be an opportunity to shift to an advantageous section, and the watermelon winning data is set and the watermelon winning is established, or the watermelon winning data is set and the watermelon winning is established. Not doing so may be an opportunity to move to an advantageous section. In addition, the setting of cherry winning data may be an opportunity to shift to an advantageous section, and the cherry winning data is set and the cherry winning is established, or the cherry winning data is set and the cherry winning is established. Not doing so may be an opportunity to move to an advantageous section. By taking the opportunity of shifting to the advantageous section when the corresponding prize is not established, it is possible to configure the configuration in which the transition to the advantageous section occurs triggered by the occurrence of so-called omission.

Further, the setting of the bell winning data may be an opportunity to shift to the advantageous section, or the setting of the bell winning data and the establishment of the bell winning may be the trigger to shift to the advantageous section. Further, the setting of the normal replay winning data may be an opportunity to shift to the advantageous section, and the setting of the normal replay winning data and the establishment of the normal replay winning may be the trigger to shift to the advantageous section. May be good.

In the case of each of the above configurations, the opportunity for the gaming section to shift from the normal section to the advantageous section does not completely coincide with the trigger for the gaming state to shift from the post-bonus state ST3 to the first preparation state ST4.

(6) Transition to RT status ST6 Even if the transition to RT status ST6 is won in the lottery process and the conditions for transition to RT status ST6 are satisfied, the transition to the normal status ST1 is performed before the second promotion replay prize is established. When it occurs, it is not limited to the configuration in which the state in which the transition condition to the RT state ST6 is satisfied is canceled, and the transition is won in the transition lottery process to the RT state ST6, and the transition condition to the RT state ST6 is changed. If it is satisfied, the state in which the transition condition is satisfied may not be released until the transition to the RT state ST6 occurs. This makes it possible to increase the advantage of satisfying the transition condition to the RT state ST6.

(7) Transition to RT status ST6 If the transition to RT status ST6 is won in the lottery process and the conditions for transition to RT status ST6 are satisfied, the transition to RT status ST6 is performed without waiting for the establishment of the second promotion replay prize. It may be a configuration in which the migration of the above occurs. For example, in any of the normal state ST1, the post-bonus state ST3, the first preparation state ST4, and the second preparation state ST5, if the transition to the RT state ST6 is won in the lottery process, the RT state is started from the next game. The configuration may be such that ST6 is started. Further, in the case of the transition winning in the transition lottery process to the RT state ST6 in the BB state ST2, the RT state ST6 may be started when the BB state ST2 ends. Further, when the transition is won in the transition lottery process to the RT status ST6 in the RT status ST6, a new execution round of the RT status ST6 may be started from the next game. This makes it possible to start the RT state ST6 at an early stage.

(8) Unless it is an advantageous section, the configuration may be such that the transition to the RT state ST6 does not occur. In this case, since the transition to the RT state ST6 does not occur in the normal section, it is possible to increase the advantage of being an advantageous section.

(9) When the second promotion replay prize is established in the normal section and the game shifts to the RT state ST6, a low continuation rate is selected as the continuation rate of the RT state ST6, or a continuation rate of 0% is selected. good. In the former case, even if the second promotion replay winning is established in the normal section and the RT state ST6 is entered, the probability of continuous winning in the continuous lottery process executed once the RT state ST6 is completed is low. In the latter case, even if the second promotion replay winning is established in the normal section and the RT state ST6 is completed, if the RT state ST6 is completed, the normal state ST1 is transferred before the RT state ST6 is changed again. The probability is high. This makes it possible to increase the advantage of shifting to the RT state ST6 in the advantageous section.

(10) When the second promotion replay winning is established in the normal section and the game shifts to the RT state ST6, the game section may be maintained in the normal section in the RT state ST6. In this case, a situation occurs in which the RT state ST6 is a normal section. Therefore, by setting the SB winning data in the situation, not only the SB winning data is set in the advantageous section but also the transition condition to the RT state ST6 occurs. Is surely established, and 100%, which is the most advantageous as the continuation rate of the RT state ST6, is selected.

(11) Profit such as the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enables the establishment of the first promotion replay prize and the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enable the establishment of the second promotion replay prize in the normal section. Although the notification of the stop order directly linked to the reel is not executed, the notification of the stop order for the effect that is not directly linked to the profit may be executed. For example, if only the normal replay winning data is set, the normal replay winning will be established regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, but when the normal replay winning data is set in this way, the normal replay winning data is set. In a configuration in which the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is intentionally notified for the purpose of production, the notification of the stop order may be executed only in the normal section or in both the normal section and the advantageous section. By applying this configuration to a configuration in which the player cannot or is difficult to recognize whether the gaming section is a normal section or an advantageous section, when the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is notified, it is possible. The player is expected to be based on the establishment of the transition condition of the RT state ST6, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(12) When the second promotion replay winning data is set in the second preparation state ST5, if the second promotion replay winning is established, the system shifts to the RT state ST6, and the second promotion replay winning is not established. Is configured to shift to the normal state ST1, but is not limited to this, and the index value IV that triggers the transition from the second preparation state ST5 to the RT state ST6 and the normal state ST5 from the second preparation state ST5 are normal. The configuration may be different from the index value IV that triggers the transition to the state ST1.

(13) When the first promotion replay winning data is set in the first preparation state ST4, if the first promotion replay winning is established, the process shifts to the second preparation state ST5, and the first promotion replay winning is not established. In this case, the configuration is set to shift to the normal state ST1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the index value IV that triggers the transition from the first preparation state ST4 to the second preparation state ST5 and the first preparation The configuration may be different from the index value IV that triggers the transition from the state ST4 to the normal state ST1.

(14) In the normal state ST1, the transition to the RT state ST6 may not always be won regardless of the number of games continuously executed in the normal state ST1, or the transition lottery process to the RT state ST6 may not be executed. .. As a result, it is necessary to generate the BB state ST2 in order to generate the transition to the RT state ST6 in the middle of the normal state ST1, so that the player's attention to the BB state ST2 can be increased.

(15) When the number of games continuously executed in the normal state ST1 reaches the upper limit number of games on the normal side, the normal state ST1 ends and the game shifts to the first preparation state ST4. In addition, the transition to the first preparation state ST4 may occur when the predetermined transition combination is won, and the transition to the first preparation state ST4 occurs when the predetermined transition prize is established. It may be configured.

(16) Only when the transition is won in the transition lottery process to the RT state ST6 executed at the start of the first BB state, the winning of the index value IV = 2 or 3 is triggered in the subsequent first BB state. It may be configured that the promotion lottery process of the continuation rate of the RT state ST6 is executed. This makes it possible to increase the player's attention to the transition lottery process to the RT state ST6, which is executed at the start of the first BB state.

(17) Since the first preparation state ST4 has a higher replay winning probability than the post-bonus state ST3 or the expected number of game media to be granted is higher, the first preparation state ST4 is a player than the post-bonus state ST3. It may be a configuration that is advantageous to the user. This makes it possible to increase the player's attention to the transition from the post-bonus state ST3 to the first preparation state ST4.

(18) When the advantageous section ends in the situation where the RT state ST6 is an advantageous section, the RT state ST6 may also end at that time. In this case, when the RT state ST6 ends, it may be configured to shift to the normal state ST1, a configuration to shift to the post-bonus state ST3, a configuration to shift to the first preparation state ST4, or a second configuration. It may be configured to shift to the preparation state ST5. Further, instead of the RT state ST6, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enable the establishment of the bell winning is notified as in the eighth embodiment, and the probability that the replay winning is established does not increase. In the configuration for shifting to the AT state, if the advantageous section ends in the situation where the AT state is the advantageous section, the AT state may end at that point.

(19) The notification for making the player recognize which game section is may be executed in a mode other than the advantageous section display unit 67. For example, at least one of the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 may be configured to perform an effect that allows the player to recognize which game section is. Further, in addition to or in place of these configurations, information indicating which game section is used may be externally output to the hall computer of the game hall.

(20) Transition to RT state ST6 When the lottery process is executed, the player may be notified of it. Further, when the lottery process for shifting to the RT state ST6 is executed, the result may be notified to the player. The mode of this notification is arbitrary, and for example, the notification may be executed by utilizing the effect of at least one of the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63.

Further, even when the continuous lottery process or the promotion lottery process is executed, the player may be notified of the continuous lottery process or the promotion lottery process, and the results thereof may also be notified to the player. The mode of this notification is arbitrary, and for example, the notification may be executed by utilizing the effect of at least one of the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63.

(21) When the first BB prize is established in the advantageous section, the game section may be once set to the normal section in the first BB state and then reset to the advantageous section. As a result, even if the first BB prize is established in the advantageous section, it is possible to execute the transition lottery process to the RT state ST6 triggered by the resetting to the advantageous section. In this case, for example, the game section may be set as a normal section at the start of the first BB state, and the game section may be set as an advantageous section when the first BB state ends. In addition to setting the section, the game section may be set as an advantageous section based on the fact that the winning combination is won in the lottery process of the combination in the first BB state or the opportunity winning is established.

(22) Transition to RT state ST6 The variable factors for making the execution mode of the lottery process different according to the game states ST1 to ST6 at that time are the probability of winning the transition to the RT state ST6 and RT. The continuation rate of the state ST6 is not limited. For example, the probability of winning the transition to the RT state ST6 is the same regardless of which game states ST1 to ST6, but the transition to the RT state ST6 is won. The continuation rate selected in the case may be different depending on the gaming state. For example, the probability of winning the transition to the RT state ST6 is the same regardless of the gaming states ST1 to ST6, but the RT state ST6. The mode of selecting the number of continuous games in the RT state ST6 selected when the game is won may be different depending on the gaming states ST1 to ST6.

(23) The end trigger of the RT state ST6 is not limited to the configuration in which the number of games executed in the RT state ST6 is the number of games to be ended, for example, a fall for ending the RT state ST6. If there is a replay winning data, if the falling replay winning data is set, the RT state ST6 ends when the falling replay winning data is established, and even if the falling replay winning data is set, the falling replay winning is established. If not, the RT state ST6 may be maintained. In this case, when the fall replay winning data is set in the RT state ST6 and the advantageous section, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that can avoid the establishment of the fall replay winning is notified. In the RT state ST6 and the normal section, even if the fall replay winning data is set, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that can avoid the establishment of the fall replay winning may not be notified.

(24) When the first table for the normal state is referred to, the transition winning is not performed in the transition lottery process to the RT state ST6, but a transition winning configuration may be used. In this case, in order to increase the advantage of performing the transition lottery process to the RT state ST6 in another gaming state, the first table for the normal state is referred to rather than the other tables are referred to. The probability of winning the transition is lower. Further, when the second table for the normal state is referred to, the transition winning is surely achieved in the transition lottery process to the RT state ST6, but the transition winning may not be achieved. In this case, in order to increase the advantage of referencing the second table for the normal state in the normal state ST1, the second table for the normal state is referred to rather than the case where the first table for the normal state is referred to. If it is done, the probability of winning the transition is higher. Further, when the tables for various states are referred to, the transition winning process is surely performed in the transition lottery process to the RT state ST6, but the transition winning may not be achieved. In this case, in order to increase the advantage of executing the transition lottery process to the RT state ST6 in the various gaming states ST3 to ST5, the table for various states is compared to the case where the first table for the normal state is referred to. It is assumed that the probability of winning the transition is higher when is referred to.

(25) In any of the post-bonus state ST3, the first preparation state ST4, and the second preparation state ST5, the table referred to in the transition process to the RT state ST6 is common as the table for various states. Although it is configured, a table may be set corresponding to each of these gaming states ST3 to ST5. In this case, the table referred to in the post-bonus state ST3 may be the most advantageous configuration, and the table referenced in the first preparation state ST4 may be the most advantageous configuration, and is referred to in the second preparation state ST5. The table may be the most advantageous configuration.

(26) When the transition to the BB state ST2 occurs in the situation where "1" is set in the advantageous end preparation flag, the advantageous end preparation flag may be cleared to "0". For example, in a situation where "1" is set in the advantageous end preparation flag in an advantageous section, if the first BB prize or the second BB prize is established, the advantageous end preparation flag is set to "0" when the BB state ST2 is entered. "clear. As a result, the value of the advantageous end preparation flag is "0" in the advantageous section with the transition to the BB state ST2. Therefore, if the transition to the first preparation state ST4 is performed thereafter, the first promotion is made. The stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enables the establishment of the replay winning is notified, and the reels 32L, 32M, that enable the establishment of the second promotion replay winning when the second preparation state ST5 is entered. The stop order of 32R is notified.

(27) The number of games executed in the BB state ST2 in the advantageous section is also measured as the number of games continuously executed in the advantageous section, but the configuration is not limited to this. , Even if the number of games executed in the BB state ST2 is an advantageous section, it may be configured not to be measured as the number of games continuously executed in the advantageous section. In this case, if the advantageous section is before the start of the BB state ST2, the advantageous section is set to be the advantageous section even after the end of the BB state ST2, and the number of continuous games in the advantageous section before the start of the BB state ST2 is the BB state. The configuration will be inherited even after the end of ST2. According to this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the number of continuous games in the advantageous section to reach the maximum number of games.

(28) In the BB state ST2, the game section may not be set. In this case, even if the BB state ST2 is started in the advantageous section, the number of games executed in the BB state ST2 is not measured as the number of games continuously executed in the advantageous section. Further, in the configuration, when the advantageous section is before the start of the BB state ST2, the advantageous section is set to be the advantageous section even after the end of the BB state ST2, and the continuous game of the advantageous section before the start of the BB state ST2 is performed. The number is inherited even after the end of the BB state ST2. According to this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the number of continuous games in the advantageous section to reach the maximum number of games.

(29) When calculating the ratio of the total number of games in the advantageous section to the total number of games, the number of games executed in the BB state ST2 may not be added as the total number of games in the advantageous section.

(30) The ratio of the total number of games in the advantageous section to the total number of games may be calculated for each set value. In this case, even if the set value is changed, it is necessary to configure the configuration so that the calculation is continued without initializing the information of the above ratio performed for each set value. According to this configuration, it is possible to grasp the above ratio for each set value.

(31) In the substrate box 81, a blocking sheet may be provided in the facing region facing the first to third notification display devices 85 to 87 on the facing wall portion facing the element mounting surface of the main control board 71. The blocking sheet is provided in the substrate box 81 so as to make the inside of the substrate box 81, more specifically, the first to third notification display devices 85 to 87, invisible through the area where the blocking sheet is provided. .. Specifically, the hologram sheet is provided as a blocking sheet, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a reflective sheet or a diffused reflective sheet may be provided. Since the blocking sheet is provided, even if the area where the blocking sheet is provided in the substrate box 81 is visually observed from the front, the presence of the blocking sheet allows the first to third notification display devices 85 to 87 to be visually observed. Becomes impossible. As a result, when the front door 12 is opened in front of the slot machine 10 with respect to the housing 11 for the purpose of maintenance or the like in a situation where the game is being played in the slot machine 10, the player notifies the first to third. The possibility that the display devices 85 to 87 are visually inspected is reduced. On the other hand, since the blocking sheet is provided in a part of the facing wall portion, by visually observing the facing wall portion diagonally toward the first to third notification display devices 85 to 87, these first It is possible to visually check the display surface of the third notification display device 85 to 87 from the outside of the board box 81. Therefore, the manager of the game hall can visually check the notification contents of each determination result on the first to third notification display devices 85 to 87 from the outside of the board box 81.

Incidentally, the blocking sheet may be configured not to be provided in the region facing the main MPU 72 on the facing wall portion. As a result, even if the blocking sheet is provided, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the main MPU 72 from being deteriorated at the time of visual confirmation.

In addition, instead of the blocking sheet, a member for reducing the visibility of the first to third notification display devices 85 to 87 may be provided. For example, a sheet that is colored and transparent but has low transparency may be provided in place of the blocking sheet. In this case, when the sheet is viewed from the front, the display surface of the first to third notification display devices 85 to 87 can be visually recognized, but the display content on the display surface becomes difficult to see.

(32) The total number of games digested regardless of which game state ST1 to ST6 is, and the total number of advantageous games digested in the advantageous section are stored as history information, and the total game is stored. The configuration is such that the ratio of the number of advantageous games to the number is calculated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of winnings of the predetermined winning combination to be the target of the lottery and the total number of games are recorded in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 13). It may be stored as information and may be configured to calculate the winning probability of the predetermined winning combination. In this case, there are a first predetermined combination and a second predetermined combination as the target predetermined combination, and the number of winnings is individually stored as history information for each of the first predetermined combination and the second predetermined combination, and the first The winning probability may be calculated for each of the predetermined combination and the second predetermined combination. In addition, the number of winnings may be individually stored as history information for each of all the winning combinations, and the winning probability may be calculated for each of the winning combinations. This makes it possible to notify the manager of the game hall of the winning probability of the role to be managed.

Further, the total number of game media granted and the total number of games may be stored as history information, and the number of game media granted per unit game may be calculated. This makes it possible to notify the manager of the game hall of the number of game media granted per unit game number. In addition, the combination of the total number of game media granted and the total number of games is individually stored as history information for each of the game states ST1 to ST6 and the advantageous section, and the number of game media granted per unit game number is stored. It may be configured to calculate individually for each of the game states ST1 to ST6 and the advantageous section.

Further, the number of transitions to the BB state ST2 and the total number of games digested in the game states ST1 and ST3 to ST6 that are not the BB states ST2 are stored as history information, and the transition probability to the BB state ST2 is calculated. May be. Further, the number of transitions to the RT state ST6 and the total number of games digested in the game states ST1 to ST5 other than the RT state ST6 are stored as history information, and the transition probability to the RT state ST6 is calculated. good.

(33) The display of each determination result on the first to third notification display devices 85 to 87 is configured to be started when the check result display period is reached and ended when the check result display period is completed. May be good. Further, when it is detected by the sensor that detects the opening of the front door 12 that the front door 12 has been opened with respect to the housing 11, the first to third notification display devices 85 to 87 make each determination immediately before. The display of the result is started, and when it is detected by the sensor that detects the opening of the front door 12 that the front door 12 is closed with respect to the housing 11, the first to third notification display devices are displayed. The display of each determination result in 85 to 87 may be terminated. In this case, it is possible to limit the period during which the display is performed on the first to third notification display devices 85 to 87.

(34) Although the configuration is such that the remaining number of continuous games in the RT state ST6 is not notified, the configuration may be such that the remaining number of continuous games is notified. Further, although the number of games continuously executed during the advantageous period is not notified, the number of continuously executed games may be notified. As the execution mode of the notification of the number of games, for example, the configuration may be performed by the image display device 63, or the configuration may be performed by a dedicated display unit.

(35) When the RT state ST6 ends, the continuous lottery process is executed, and if the continuous lottery process does not result in a continuous winning, the transition condition to the RT state ST6 is not satisfied. However, in addition to or instead of the configuration, when the number of continuous games in the RT state ST6 reaches the number of games corresponding to the end, one execution time of the RT state ST6 is set, and the remaining execution times of the RT state ST6 are stocked. It may be configured to be. In this case, when one execution time of the RT state ST6 is completed, it is determined whether or not there is a stocked execution time, and if there is a stocked execution time, the execution time is concerned. Is subtracted by 1, and a new execution time of the RT state ST6 may be started. In this configuration, when the advantageous section ends and the initialization process of the advantageous section is executed, the stocked execution times may also be cleared to "0". This makes it possible to set the transition condition of the RT state ST6 to a state in which the transition condition of the RT state ST6 is not satisfied at the end of the advantageous section.

(36) When the advantageous section ends when the number of continuous games in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit number of games, the advantageous section is set next time depending on whether or not the transition condition to the RT state ST6 is satisfied at that time. In some cases, the advantages may be different. For example, when the transition condition to the RT state ST6 is satisfied when the advantageous section ends due to reaching the upper limit number of games, the next time than when the transition condition to the RT state ST6 is not satisfied. It may be configured to increase the probability of winning the transition in the transition lottery process to the RT state ST6 executed when setting the advantageous section of the above, and the transition lottery process to the RT state ST6 executed when the next advantageous section is set. When the transition is won in, a high continuation rate may be easily selected as the continuation rate of the RT state ST6. As a result, it is possible to compensate the player for forcibly ending the advantageous section by reaching the upper limit number of games.

(37) In addition to or instead of the configuration in which the advantageous section ends when the number of continuous games in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit number of games, the result of the end lottery process executed in the advantageous section is the end winning result. In some cases, the advantageous section may end and the normal section may be entered. The trigger for executing this end lottery process is arbitrary, but for example, the end lottery process may be executed in each game, and when a predetermined lottery trigger is won or a predetermined lottery trigger prize is established. The end lottery process may be executed at the same time. Further, on condition that the number of continuous games in the advantageous section is equal to or more than the predetermined number of games, the end lottery process is executed every time a lottery opportunity occurs, and it is advantageous when the result of the end lottery process is the end winning result. It may be configured to end the section and shift to the normal section.

(38) In the advantageous section, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is notified so that the advantageous section is not limited to the configuration in which the advantageous section is more advantageous than the normal section. For example, a small winning combination is established. In the case, the advantageous section may be more advantageous than the normal section by increasing the number of game media to be given, and the number of game media required to start one game is smaller than the normal section. However, the configuration may be such that the advantageous section is more advantageous.

(39) The notification of the calculation result using the game history is not limited to the configuration performed by the first to third notification display devices 85 to 87, and for example, the credit display unit 65 and the combined display unit 66 are used. It may be configured as such. Further, in the configuration, when a plurality of types of events to be notified exist, the events to be notified of each type may be sequentially switched and displayed. When the display is sequentially switched in this way, for example, the type of the event to be notified is displayed on the credit display unit 65, and the operation result or the content of the operation result for the event to be notified is displayed on the combined display unit 66. The configuration may be such that the corresponding information is displayed. As a result, even when a plurality of types of events to be notified exist, it is possible to notify the events of the plurality of types of notification targets by using a small number of display units.

(40) The upper limit of the number of continuous games may be set for the normal section as well. In this case, when the number of games continuously executed in the normal section reaches the upper limit number of games, the SB winning data is set and the first BB prize is set in the advantageous section even if it is not established. Become. Further, in the transition lottery process to the RT state ST6 executed at the time of setting the advantageous section, the transition winning may be ensured. This makes it possible to compensate for the fact that the normal section continues until the maximum number of games is reached. Further, by setting the upper limit number of games in the normal section to be the same between the set values of "setting 1" to "setting 6", it is possible to prevent the advantage or disadvantage due to the set value with respect to the upper limit number of games. It will be possible.

(41) Even when the front door 12 is in the open state, an operation unit operated to forcibly put the lighting devices 88a and 88b into the non-lighting state may be provided. In this case, when the lighting by the lighting devices 88a and 88b is unnecessary, the lighting devices 88a and 88b can be put into a non-lighting state. Further, the operation unit may be provided at a position where it can be operated even when the front door 12 is closed, and when the front door 12 is closed, it cannot be operated and the front door 12 is opened. It may be configured to be provided at a position where it can be operated.

(42) When the front door 12 is in the open state, the lighting devices 88a and 88b are always in the lighting state, and when the front door 12 is in the closed state, the lighting devices 88a and 88b are always in the non-lighting state. It may be configured as.

(43) Even if the front door 12 is changed from the closed state to the open state, the lighting devices 88a and 88b are maintained in the non-lighting state until the predetermined opening angle is reached, and then the opening angle is equal to or higher than the predetermined opening angle. The lighting devices 88a and 88b may be configured to be in a lighting state. Further, in addition to the configuration, when the front door 12 is in the maximum open position as in the above embodiment, the lighting devices 88a and 88b may be in a non-illuminated state.

(44) The intensity of the light emitted from the lighting devices 88a and 88b may be changed according to the opening angle of the front door 12. For example, when the front door 12 is closed, the lighting devices 88a and 88b are in a non-lighting state or a lighting state with a relatively weak intensity, the front door 12 is in an open state, and the opening angle of the front door 12 is a predetermined opening. If the angle is less than or equal to the angle, the lighting state may be set to a relatively strong intensity, and if the opening angle of the front door 12 exceeds a predetermined opening angle, the lighting state may be set to a relatively weak intensity.

(45) The configuration is not limited to the configuration in which the number of effective lines is only one of the main line ML, and the configuration may be such that the number of effective lines is two, three, or four or more. In this case, the number of effective lines may increase as the number of bet game media increases, or the maximum number of valid lines may be set regardless of the number of bet game media.

(46) The type of information transmitted from the main MPU 72 to the production side MPU 92 is not limited to that in each of the above embodiments. Information on the number of game media to be played may be transmitted from the main MPU 72 to the production side MPU 92. In this case, it is possible to notify the information on the number of game media given by winning a prize on the image display device 63 or the like. Further, even if all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are not stopped, when the rotation of some reels 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped or stopped, the corresponding information is on the main side. It may be configured to be transmitted from the MPU 72 to the effect side MPU 92. In this case, the image display device 63 or the like can perform an effect corresponding to the rotation status of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R.

(47) In each of the above embodiments, the privilege of paying out medals when a small winning combination is established is given, but the configuration is not limited to such a configuration, and some privilege is given to the player. It should be. For example, a prize other than a medal may be paid out when a small winning combination is established. Further, in a slot machine that does not have an actual medal insertion or medal payout function and manages medals owned by a player by credit, an increase in credited medals corresponds to granting a privilege.

(48) The present invention may be applied to a so-called B type slot machine, and a C type, an A type and a C type composite type, a B type and a C type composite type, and an RT game, a CT game, or an AT may be applied. The invention may be applied to any slot machine, such as a type with a game.

(49) The design of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is not limited to a picture, a number, a character, etc., but may be a geometric line, a figure, or the like. Further, the design can be composed of light, color, or the like, the design can be composed of a three-dimensional shape, or the like, and even a composite of these can be used to compose the design. That is, the design may have a function as information having distinctiveness.

(50) In each of the above embodiments, a specific example of the slot machine 10 is shown, but it may be applied to a pachinko machine in which a game is played by using a game ball as a game medium, and the slot machine and the pachinko machine may be applied. It may be applied to a gaming machine in a form fused with the machine.

<About the invention group extracted from the above embodiment>
Hereinafter, the characteristics of the invention group extracted from the above-described embodiments will be described while showing the effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for the sake of easy understanding, the corresponding configurations in the above-described embodiment are appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but the present invention is not limited to the specific configurations shown in the parentheses or the like.

<Characteristic A group>
Features A1. Transition to a state in which the gaming state is shifted between a plurality of types of gaming states having different advantages (normal state ST1, BB state ST2, post-bonus state ST3, first preparation state ST4, second preparation state ST5, RT state ST6). Means (in the first embodiment, a function of executing the processes of step S704, step S803, step S902, step S905, step S906, step S1002, step S1005, step S1007, step S1307, step S1602 and step S1605 in the main MPU 72. , A function of executing the processes of steps S2402, S2405 and S2408 in the main MPU 72 in the second embodiment).
The first section setting means (a function of executing the end processing of the advantageous section in the main MPU 72) for setting the game section to the first section (normal section), and
A second section setting means for setting the game section as a second section (advantageous section) (in the first embodiment, a function of executing the processes of steps S1404, S1411, and step S1414 in the main MPU 72, the sixth embodiment. Then, the function of executing the process of step S2804 in the main MPU 72) and
Equipped with
One of the first section and the second section may be granted a privilege that does not occur in the other, or one of the first section and the second section is granted a privilege to the player more than the other. Easy configuration,
The first section and the second section are any of the predetermined gaming states (first BB state, post-bonus state ST3, first preparation state ST4, second preparation state ST5, and RT state ST6) among the plurality of types of gaming states. It is a configuration that can stay in the above-mentioned multiple types of gaming states, and other gaming states (normal state ST1, BB state ST2, post-bonus state ST3, first preparation state ST4, second preparation state ST5 and RT. It is a configuration that can stay even in any of the states ST6).
This gaming machine is
The predetermined gaming state is the predetermined gaming state, although the situation in the predetermined gaming state and the second section occurs, provided that the situation in the first section occurs. Unlike the case where the situation in the first section does not occur, the related process executing means (RT using the table for various states in the main MPU 72) so that the related process related to the interest of the player can be executed. A function to execute the transition lottery process to the state ST6, a function to execute the transition lottery process to the RT state ST6 using the table for the RT state in the main MPU 72), and
When a predetermined condition is satisfied (the number of games continued in the advantageous section in the first BB state, the first preparation state ST4 or the second preparation state ST5 reaches the upper limit number of games, and the post-bonus state after the end of the second BB state. Transition to ST3, transition to RT state ST6 in a situation where the number of games continued in the advantageous section is equal to or greater than the number of trigger games) is the situation in which the predetermined gaming state is the first section. If the predetermined condition is not satisfied, a predetermined response means (in step S1413 in the main MPU 72) for preventing the situation of the predetermined gaming state and the first section from occurring. (Function to execute the process of step S1911 in the main MPU 72) and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature A1, it is possible to diversify the progress of the game by the existence of a plurality of types of game states and the existence of a plurality of types of game sections separately. Further, one of the first section and the second section is configured to be more easily given the privilege than the other, and both the first section and the second section are configured to be able to stay in a predetermined gaming state and another gaming state. Therefore, the player plays the game while expecting that the game is in an advantageous state and the game section is advantageous.

In this case, when the situation of the predetermined gaming state and the first section occurs, the situation of the predetermined gaming state and the second section occurs, but the situation of the predetermined gaming state and the first section occurs. Is different from the case where the above is not generated, the related processing related to the profit of the player can be executed, and when the predetermined condition is satisfied, a situation occurs in which the predetermined gaming state is in the first section. As a result, the player expects that a predetermined condition is satisfied and a situation in which the predetermined gaming state is in the first section occurs, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature A2. When a specific event (the end of the first BB state and the setting of SB winning data) occurs in the situation of the predetermined gaming state and the first section, the related processing execution means said. The gaming machine according to feature A1, wherein the related processing can be executed, unlike the case where the specific event occurs in the situation of the predetermined gaming state and the second section.

According to the feature A2, the related process is not surely executed when the predetermined game state is the first section, but the specific event occurs in the predetermined game state and the first section. By doing so, the related processing is executed. As a result, it becomes possible to gradually change the target to be noticed by the player who expects the execution of the related processing, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature A3. The gaming machine according to feature A2, wherein the second section setting means sets the gaming section to the second section when the specific event occurs in the situation of the first section.

According to the feature A3, when a specific event occurs in the situation of the predetermined gaming state and the first section, the situation becomes the situation of the predetermined gaming state and the second section and the related processing is executed. As a result, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the occurrence of a specific event in the situation of the predetermined gaming state and the first section.

Feature A4. The gaming machine according to feature A2 or A3, wherein the occurrence of the specific event includes winning a specific combination in a combination lottery process.

According to the feature A4, the player who expects the execution of the related processing is expected to win the specific combination in the combination lottery process in the situation where the predetermined gaming state is the first section. This makes it easy for the player who expects to execute the related processing to understand the object to be noted.

Feature A5. It is possible to generate a situation in which the transition to the predetermined gaming state or the predetermined gaming state is likely to occur based on the occurrence of the specific event in the situation of the other gaming state and the first section. (Function to execute the transition lottery process to the RT state ST6 by using the first table for the normal state, the second table for the normal state, or the table for the first BB state in the main MPU 72. ), The gaming machine according to any one of features A2 to A4.

According to the feature A5, it is possible to generate a situation in which the transition to the predetermined gaming state or the predetermined gaming state is likely to occur based on the occurrence of a specific event in the situation of the first section in another gaming state. Is executed. Further, the related processing can be executed based on the occurrence of a specific event in the situation of the predetermined gaming state having the configuration of the above feature A2 and the first section. This makes it possible to give the player the recognition that there is some advantage in the occurrence of a specific event in the situation of the first section, and the player's response to the occurrence of the specific event in the situation of the first section. It is possible to increase the degree of attention.

Feature A6. The gaming machine according to any one of features A2 to A5, wherein the specific event is the termination of the predetermined gaming state.

According to the feature A6, the related processing is executed when the situation of the predetermined gaming state and the first section ends. As a result, the conditions for executing the related processing become easy for the player to understand.

Feature A7. The predetermined response means is any one of the features A2 to A6, characterized in that, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the predetermined gaming state is in the predetermined gaming state from the start of the predetermined gaming state and is in the first section. The gaming machine according to 1.

According to the feature A7, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the predetermined gaming state is the first section from the start of the predetermined gaming state. Then, when a specific event occurs in the situation, related processing related to the interest of the player can be executed. This makes it possible to increase the frequency with which related processing is executed.

Feature A8. The winning lottery generated in the predetermined game state and the second section (the lottery process for shifting to the RT state ST6 executed by using the table for the first BB state in the main MPU 72). As a result, a profit is given to the player, and when the predetermined gaming state is reached and the first section is reached, the related process is subsequently executed to give the player a profit. The gaming machine according to any one of the features A1 to A7.

According to the feature A8, in the situation where it is the second section in the predetermined game state, the profit is not given to the player unless the generated lottery process is won, whereas the situation where it is the first section in the predetermined game state. If this happens, the player will be given a profit by executing the related processing after that. As a result, it is advantageous for the situation to be the first section in the predetermined gaming state while making it possible to give a profit regardless of the situation of the first section or the situation of the second section in the predetermined gaming state. Can be increased.

Feature A9. In the second section, the privilege that does not occur in the first section can be given to the player, or the second section is characterized in that the privilege is more easily given to the player than the first section. The gaming machine according to any one of A1 to A8.

According to the feature A9, the second section is more advantageous than the first section when comparing only the game sections. In this case, by having the configuration of the above-mentioned feature A1, in the situation where the predetermined gaming state is the first section, unlike the situation where the predetermined gaming state is the second section, it is related to the profit of the player. Related processing can be performed. As a result, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the situation in which the predetermined gaming state is the first section.

Feature A10. The state transition means is configured to shift the gaming state from the other gaming state to the predetermined gaming state when a predetermined transition trigger (establishment of the second promotion replay winning) occurs in the other gaming state.
When the other gaming state is the second section, the predetermined transition trigger is generated, and when the other gaming state is the first section, the predetermined transition trigger does not occur, or the predetermined transition trigger is not generated. Features A1 to the feature A1 to be characterized in that the predetermined transition trigger is more likely to occur in the case of another gaming state and the second section than in the case of the other gaming state and the first section. The gaming machine according to any one of A9.

According to the feature A10, in the case of the first section in another gaming state, the transition to the predetermined gaming state does not occur or is difficult to occur, so that the game is in the second section in the other gaming state. Will expect. On the other hand, in the case of the predetermined gaming state and the first section, the related processing related to the profit of the player can be executed. As a result, it is possible to make the type of the gaming section that the player expects to occur different according to the type of the gaming state, and it is possible to draw the player's attention to both the first section and the second section.

Feature A11. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A10, wherein the predetermined condition is satisfied based on the number of games executed in the situation of the second section reaching a predetermined number of games.

According to the feature A11, when the number of games executed in the situation of the second section reaches the predetermined number of games, the situation becomes the predetermined gaming state and the first section, and in the situation, it is in the interest of the player. Related related processing may be performed. This makes it possible to increase the player's attention to the number of games executed in the situation of the second section.

Feature A12. A second section ending means for ending the second section based on the number of games continuously executed in the second section reaching the upper limit number of games (in the first embodiment, in the main MPU 72). It has a function of executing the process of step S1911, and a function of executing the process of step S2611 in the main MPU 72 in the fourth embodiment).
The predetermined condition is based on the transition to the predetermined gaming state in the situation where the number of games continuously executed in the second section is within the range of the predetermined number of games to the upper limit number of games. The gaming machine according to feature A11, which is characterized by being established.

According to the feature A12, since the second section ends based on the number of games continuously executed in the second section reaching the upper limit number of games, the second section continues excessively. On the other hand, it is unfortunate for the player who wants to continue the second section that the number of games reaches the upper limit. On the other hand, when the transition to the predetermined gaming state occurs in the situation where the number of games continuously executed in the second section is within the range of the predetermined number of games to the upper limit number of games, the predetermined gaming state occurs. However, the situation is the first section, and in the case of the situation, the related processing related to the interest of the player can be executed. As a result, even if the number of continuous games approaches the upper limit number of games in the situation of the second section, it is possible to prevent the degree of attention to the game from decreasing.

Feature A13. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A12, wherein the predetermined condition is satisfied based on the satisfaction of the end condition of the second section in the predetermined gaming state.

According to the feature A13, in the situation where the predetermined gaming state is the second section and the end condition of the second section is satisfied, the situation is the predetermined gaming state and the first section. Then, in that situation, related processing related to the interests of the player may be executed. As a result, the player pays attention to whether or not the end condition of the second section is satisfied in the middle of the predetermined game state, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature A14. The second section ending means (the main MPU 72 in the seventh embodiment) for ending the second section based on the number of games continuously executed in the second section reaching the upper limit number of games. A function to execute the process of step S3010) is provided.
Any of the features A1 to A13, wherein the predetermined condition is satisfied based on the number of games continuously executed in the second section reaching the upper limit number of games in the predetermined gaming state. The gaming machine described in 1.

According to the feature A14, since the second section ends based on the number of games continuously executed in the situation of the second section reaching the upper limit number of games, the second section continues excessively. On the other hand, it is unfortunate for the player who wants to continue the second section that the number of games reaches the upper limit. On the other hand, when the number of games continuously executed in the situation of the second section reaches the upper limit number of games in the predetermined gaming state, the situation is that the predetermined gaming state is in the first section. In the case of, the related processing related to the interest of the player can be executed. As a result, even if the number of continuous games approaches the upper limit number of games in the situation of the second section, it is possible to prevent the degree of attention to the game from decreasing.

Feature A15. The state transition means is configured to shift the gaming state from the other gaming state to the predetermined gaming state when a predetermined transition trigger (establishment of the second promotion replay winning) occurs in the other gaming state.
One of the features A11 to A14, which is characterized in that it is possible to stay in the other gaming state while preventing the occurrence of the predetermined transition trigger based on the operation of the player in the other gaming state. The described gaming machine.

According to the feature A15, it is possible to delay the transition timing to the predetermined gaming state by the operation of the player. Then, the configuration of any one of the above features A11 to A14 is provided, and a predetermined condition is satisfied in relation to the number of games executed in the second section, and when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the game is in a predetermined gaming state. The situation is one section. As a result, it is possible to generate a situation in which the game is in a predetermined game state and is in the first section by the player's own operation.

Feature A16. A pattern display means (reel unit 31) that displays a variable pattern, and
The start operation means (start lever 41) operated to start the variable display of the pattern in the pattern display means, and
A combination lottery means (a function of executing a combination lottery process in the main MPU 72) that executes a combination lottery process based on the operation of the start operation means, and
The stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop the variable display of the pattern in the pattern display means, and the stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44).
The pattern variation display is started based on the operation of the start operation means and the predetermined start condition is satisfied, and the pattern variation display is stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means. A picture display control means (a function for executing reel control processing in the main MPU 72) for controlling the display means, and
When the stop result corresponding to the winning combination in the lottery process of the winning combination is displayed after the variation display of the pattern, the corresponding execution is executed to control the winning combination as the winning combination is established. Means (a function to execute a winning determination process, a medium grant process, and a corresponding process at the end of a game in the main MPU 72),
Equipped with
In the corresponding execution means, a predetermined corresponding combination (in the first to seventh embodiments, the index value IV in which the first promotion replay winning data is set and the second promotion replay winning data are set in the lottery process of the combination. Index value IV, in the eighth embodiment, the index value IV in which the bell winning data is set, the index value IV in which the first promotion replay winning data is set, and the index value IV in which the second promotion replay winning data is set). A function of executing the processing of the predetermined corresponding execution means (step S905 and step S1005 in the main MPU 72) that executes the control corresponding to the winning operation mode based on the predetermined mode of the stop operation mode of the variation display of the pattern. )
This gaming machine corresponds to any one of the predetermined mode and the mode for preventing the predetermined mode from being obtained when the predetermined corresponding combination is won in the lottery process of the combination in the second section. Features A1 to A15 characterized by being provided with a notification control means (a function of executing a notification control process in the main MPU 72 and a function of executing a notification process in the effect side MPU 92) for executing a predetermined notification. The gaming machine according to any one of.

According to the feature A16, in the second section, when the predetermined corresponding combination is won in the combination lottery process, the predetermined notification is executed. Therefore, the profit corresponding to the stop operation is performed in the mode corresponding to the predetermined notification. Can be obtained. In this case, the configuration of the above-mentioned feature A1 is provided, and the related processing can be executed by the situation where the predetermined gaming state is the first section, so that the player's attention to the first section can be increased. It will be possible.

It should be noted that, with respect to the configuration of the features A1 to A16, any one of the features A1 to A16, the features B1 to B13, the features C1 to C21, the features D1 to D13, the features E1 to E9, the features F1 to F12, and the features G1 to G12. One or more configurations may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic B group>
Feature B1. Predetermined benefits (in the first to seventh embodiments, the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enable the establishment of the first promotion replay prize and the reels 32L that enable the establishment of the second promotion replay prize. Notification of stop order of 32M, 32R, notification of stop order of reels 32L, 32M, 32R which enables establishment of bell winning in the eighth embodiment, reel 32L, 32M which enables establishment of first promotion replay winning , 32R stop order notification and reels 32L, 32M, 32R stop order notification that enables the establishment of the second promotion replay prize) are set in the advantageous section given to the player (first advantageous section setting means). In the embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S1404, step S1411, and step S1414 in the main MPU 72, and in the sixth embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S2804 in the main MPU 72).
An advantageous section ending means (a function of executing the ending processing of the advantageous section in the main MPU 72) that executes the ending processing of the advantageous section based on the occurrence of the ending opportunity in the situation of the advantageous section.
When the predetermined gaming state (RT state ST6) is started, the end processing is executed or the predetermined gaming state (first BB state, post-bonus state ST3, first preparation state ST4, second preparation state ST5 and RT state). The end process is performed in the predetermined gaming state and in the advantageous section, provided that the end process is executed in the middle of the advantageous section in any of ST6). Related process execution means (RT using tables for various states in the main MPU 72) that enables related processes related to the interests of the player to be executed, unlike the case where the predetermined game state ends without being executed. A function to execute the transition lottery process to the state ST6, a function to execute the transition lottery process to the RT state ST6 using the table for the RT state in the main MPU 72), and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature B1, the end processing of the advantageous section is executed when the predetermined gaming state is started, or the end processing of the advantageous section is executed in the middle of the situation where the predetermined gaming state is the advantageous section. The related processing related to the interests of the player may be executed under at least one condition. As a result, even if the predetermined gaming state is started or the end processing of the advantageous section is executed in the middle of the predetermined gaming state, the player's feeling of loss due to the end of the advantageous section is compensated by executing the related processing. Is possible. In addition, the player who expects the related processing to be executed expects that the end processing of the advantageous section is executed when the predetermined gaming state is started or in the middle of the predetermined gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature B2. The gaming machine according to feature B1, wherein the termination trigger is generated on condition that the number of games continuously executed in the advantageous section reaches a predetermined number of games.

According to the feature B2, the end processing of the advantageous section is executed on the condition that the number of games executed in the situation of the advantageous section reaches a predetermined number of games. Then, the related processing related to the interest of the player may be executed on the condition that the end processing of the advantageous section is executed when the predetermined gaming state is started or in the middle of the predetermined gaming state. This makes it possible to increase the player's attention to the number of games played in the advantageous section.

Feature B3. The advantageous section ending means is
As the end trigger, the means for executing the end process based on the number of games continuously executed in the advantageous section reaching the upper limit number of games (in the first embodiment, in the main MPU 72). A function of making an affirmative determination in step S1910 and executing the process of step S1911, and a function of making an affirmative determination in step S2610 of the main MPU 72 and executing the process of step S2611 in the fourth embodiment).
Based on the transition to the predetermined gaming state occurs in the situation where the number of games continuously executed in the advantageous section is within the range of the predetermined number of games to the upper limit number of games as the end trigger. A means for executing the termination process (a function of making an affirmative determination in step S1913 in the main MPU 72 in the first embodiment and executing the process in step S1911 in the first embodiment, and step S2613 in the main MPU 72 in the fourth embodiment). (Function to make an affirmative judgment and execute the process of step S2611),
The gaming machine according to the feature B1 or B2, which comprises the above-mentioned feature B1 or B2.

According to feature B3, the advantageous section ends based on the number of games continuously executed in the advantageous section reaching the upper limit number of games, so that the advantageous section does not continue excessively. On the other hand, it is unfortunate for the player who wants to continue the advantageous section that the number of games reaches the upper limit. On the other hand, if the number of games continuously executed in the advantageous section is within the range of the predetermined number of games to the upper limit number of games and the transition to the predetermined gaming state occurs, the advantageous section By executing the termination process, related processing related to the interests of the player may be executed. As a result, even if the number of continuous games approaches the upper limit of the number of games in the advantageous section, it is possible to prevent the degree of attention to the game from decreasing.

Feature B4. A state transition means (mainly) for shifting the gaming state from the other gaming state to the predetermined gaming state when a predetermined transition trigger (establishment of the second promotion replay winning) occurs in another gaming state (second preparation state ST5). A function of executing the process of step S1005 in the side MPU 72) is provided.
The gaming machine according to feature B2 or B3, which is characterized in that it is possible to stay in the other gaming state while preventing the occurrence of the predetermined transition opportunity based on the operation of the player in the other gaming state. ..

According to the feature B4, it is possible to delay the transition timing to the predetermined gaming state by the operation of the player. Then, when the predetermined gaming state is started in relation to the number of games executed in the advantageous section, or the end processing of the advantageous section is executed in the middle of the predetermined gaming state, the player has the configuration of the above features B2 or B3. Related processing related to the interests of can be performed. As a result, it is possible to generate a situation in which the related processing can be executed by the player's own operation.

Feature B5. When a specific event (the end of the first BB state and the setting of SB winning data) occurs in a situation in which the related processing execution means is in the predetermined gaming state and not in the advantageous section, the predetermined processing execution means. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B4, which is characterized in that the related processing can be executed, unlike the case where the specific event occurs in the gaming state and the advantageous section. ..

According to the feature B5, if the situation is in the predetermined gaming state and not in the advantageous section, the related processing is not surely executed, but the specific event occurs in the situation in which the predetermined gaming state is not in the advantageous section. The related processing is executed in. As a result, it becomes possible to gradually change the target to be noticed by the player who expects the execution of the related processing, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature B6. The advantageous section ending means is characterized in that the ending process is executed when the predetermined gaming state is started, based on the occurrence of the ending opportunity when the predetermined gaming state is started. The gaming machine described in B5.

According to the feature B6, if the end trigger occurs when the predetermined game state is started, the predetermined game state is in the predetermined game state from the start of the predetermined game state and the section is not advantageous. It is possible to increase the probability that a specific event will occur in the situation.

Feature B7. The gaming machine according to feature B5 or B6, wherein the advantageous section setting means sets the gaming section to the advantageous section when the specific event occurs in a situation where the advantageous section is a non-advantageous section (normal section). ..

According to the feature B7, when a specific event occurs in the predetermined gaming state and the non-advantageous section, the predetermined gaming state and the advantageous section are set and the related processing is executed. This makes it possible to increase the degree of attention to the occurrence of a specific event in a situation in which the game is in a predetermined gaming state and is in a non-advantageous section.

Feature B8. The game according to any one of features B5 to B7, wherein the occurrence of the specific event includes winning a specific combination (index value IV in which SB winning data is set) in a combination lottery process. Machine.

According to the feature B8, the player who expects the execution of the related processing is expected to win the specific combination in the combination lottery process in the situation where the predetermined gaming state is not the advantageous section. This makes it easy for the player who expects to execute the related processing to understand the object to be noted.

Feature B9. It is possible to generate a situation in which a transition to the predetermined gaming state or the predetermined gaming state is likely to occur based on the occurrence of the specific event in a situation other than the advantageous section, which is not the advantageous section. Means for executing the process (a function of executing the transition lottery process to the RT state ST6 by using the first table for the normal state, the second table for the normal state, or the table for the first BB state in the main MPU 72). The gaming machine according to any one of features B5 to B8, characterized in that it is provided.

According to the feature B9, it is possible to generate a situation in which a transition to a predetermined gaming state or a predetermined gaming state is likely to occur based on the occurrence of a specific event in a situation other than the gaming state that is not an advantageous section. Processing is executed. Further, the related processing can be executed based on the occurrence of a specific event in a situation in which the above-mentioned feature B5 is provided and the game is in a predetermined gaming state and is not an advantageous section. This makes it possible to give the player the recognition that there is some advantage by the occurrence of a specific event in a situation that is not an advantageous section, and the player's attention to the occurrence of a specific event in a situation that is not an advantageous section. Can be increased.

Feature B10. The gaming machine according to any one of features B5 to B9, wherein the specific event is the termination of the predetermined gaming state.

According to the feature B10, the related processing is executed when the situation in which the predetermined gaming state is not the advantageous section ends. As a result, the conditions for executing the related processing become easy for the player to understand.

Feature B11. In the situation of the predetermined gaming state and the advantageous section, the generated lottery process (the process of shifting to the RT state ST6 executed by using the table for the first BB state in the main MPU 72) causes the winning. As a result, a profit is given to the player, and when the predetermined gaming state is reached and the situation is not the advantageous section, the related process is subsequently executed to give the player a profit. The gaming machine according to any one of the features B1 to B10.

According to the feature B11, in the situation where the section is advantageous in the predetermined gaming state, the profit is not given to the player unless the generated winning is won in the generated lottery process, whereas the situation is not the advantageous section in the predetermined gaming state. In that case, the player is given a profit by executing the related processing after that. As a result, it is possible to give a profit regardless of whether the section is not an advantageous section or the advantageous section in the predetermined gaming state, and the advantage of the situation that the section is not the advantageous section in the predetermined gaming state. It will be possible to increase.

Feature B12. The state transition means is configured to shift the gaming state from the other gaming state to the predetermined gaming state when a predetermined transition trigger (establishment of the second promotion replay winning) occurs in another gaming state.
The predetermined transition trigger occurs when the other gaming state is in the advantageous section, and the predetermined transition trigger does not occur when the other gaming state is not in the advantageous section, or the other Any of the features B1 to B11 characterized in that the predetermined transition trigger is more likely to occur in the case of the gaming state and the advantageous section than in the case of the other gaming state and not the advantageous section. The gaming machine according to 1.

According to the feature B12, when the other gaming state is not the advantageous section, the transition to the predetermined gaming state does not occur or is difficult to occur, so that the player can determine that the section is advantageous in the other gaming state. You will expect it. On the other hand, when the predetermined gaming state is not an advantageous section, the related processing related to the profit of the player can be executed. As a result, it is possible to make the type of the gaming section that the player expects to occur different according to the type of the gaming state, and it is possible to draw the player's attention to both the non-advantageous section and the advantageous section. ..

Feature B13. A pattern display means (reel unit 31) that displays a variable pattern, and
The start operation means (start lever 41) operated to start the variable display of the pattern in the pattern display means, and
A combination lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process in the main MPU 72) that executes a combination lottery process based on the operation of the start operation means, and
The stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop the variable display of the pattern in the pattern display means, and the stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44).
The pattern variation display is started based on the operation of the start operation means and the predetermined start condition is satisfied, and the pattern variation display is stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means. A picture display control means (a function for executing reel control processing in the main MPU 72) for controlling the display means, and
When the stop result corresponding to the winning combination in the lottery process of the winning combination is displayed after the variation display of the pattern, the corresponding execution is executed to control the winning combination as the winning combination is established. Means (a function to execute a winning determination process, a medium grant process, and a corresponding process at the end of a game in the main MPU 72),
Equipped with
In the corresponding execution means, a predetermined corresponding combination (in the first to seventh embodiments, the index value IV in which the first promotion replay winning data is set and the second promotion replay winning data are set in the lottery process of the combination. Index value IV, in the eighth embodiment, the index value IV in which the bell winning data is set, the index value IV in which the first promotion replay winning data is set, and the index value IV in which the second promotion replay winning data is set). A function of executing the processing of the predetermined corresponding execution means (step S905 and step S1005 in the main MPU 72) that executes the control corresponding to the winning operation mode based on the predetermined mode of the stop operation mode of the variation display of the pattern. )
This gaming machine corresponds to any one of the predetermined mode and the mode for preventing the predetermined mode from becoming the predetermined mode when the predetermined corresponding combination is won in the lottery process of the combination in the advantageous section. 2. The gaming machine according to any one.

According to the feature B13, in the advantageous section, when the predetermined corresponding combination is won in the lottery process of the combination, the predetermined notification is executed. Therefore, by performing the stop operation in the manner corresponding to the predetermined notification, the corresponding profit can be obtained. It will be possible to obtain. In this case, the configuration of the above-mentioned feature B1 is provided, and the related processing can be executed by the situation where the predetermined gaming state is not the advantageous section, so that the player's attention to the section which is not the advantageous section is increased. Is possible.

It should be noted that, with respect to the configuration of the features B1 to B13, any one of the features A1 to A16, the features B1 to B13, the features C1 to C21, the features D1 to D13, the features E1 to E9, the features F1 to F12, and the features G1 to G12. One or more configurations may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic C group>
Features C1. Transition to a state in which the gaming state is shifted between a plurality of types of gaming states having different advantages (normal state ST1, BB state ST2, post-bonus state ST3, first preparation state ST4, second preparation state ST5, RT state ST6). Means (in the first embodiment, a function of executing the processes of step S704, step S803, step S902, step S905, step S906, step S1002, step S1005, step S1007, step S1307, step S1602 and step S1605 in the main MPU 72. , A function of executing the processes of steps S2402, S2405 and S2408 in the main MPU 72 in the second embodiment).
Second section setting means (first implementation) that sets the game section to the second section (advantageous section) based on the occurrence of a specific event (SB winning data is set) in the first section (normal section). In the embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S1411 in the main MPU 72, and in the sixth embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S2804 in the main MPU 72).
Equipped with
It is a configuration that can stay in the second section in a plurality of types of gaming states.
The gaming machine executes a profit-giving process in a predetermined opportunity game included in the second section, which is a game after the game in which the specific event has occurred, in a manner corresponding to the gaming state at that time. A gaming machine characterized by having a processing execution means (a function of executing a transition lottery process to the RT state ST6 in the main MPU 72).

According to the feature C1, it is possible to diversify the progress of the game by the existence of a plurality of types of game states and the existence of a plurality of types of game sections separately. In this case, when a specific event occurs in the first section, not only is it set in the second section, but also the profit-giving process is executed. This makes it possible to increase the player's attention to the occurrence of a specific event in the first section. Further, the profit-giving process is executed in a predetermined opportunity game included in the second section, which is a game after the game in which the specific event has occurred. As a result, the difference between the first section and the second section is clarified, such that the first section is a section in which the profit-giving process is not executed and the second section is a section in which the profit-giving process can be executed. It becomes possible to do. Further, the profit-giving process is executed in a mode corresponding to the game state at that time in a predetermined opportunity game included in the second section, which is a game after the game in which the specific event has occurred. As a result, the player pays attention not only to the occurrence of a specific event in the first section but also to the type of gaming state in the subsequent second section. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature C2. The gaming machine according to feature C1, wherein the processing executing means makes the probability that the profit grant is determined in the profit granting process different according to the gaming state in the predetermined trigger game.

According to the feature C2, the probability that the profit grant is determined in the profit granting process differs depending on the type of the game state in the predetermined opportunity game, so that the player who expects the profit grant is in the first section. Attention will be paid to the type of gaming state in the second section after the occurrence of a specific event.

Feature C3. It can be determined that the gaming state at the time when the specific event occurs in the first section and the gaming state at the time of the predetermined trigger game in the second section set based on the occurrence of the specific event can be different. The gaming machine according to the feature C1 or C2.

According to the feature C3, the player pays attention not only to the gaming state in the first section but also to the gaming state in the second section after the occurrence of the specific event in the first section.

Feature C4. The process executing means determines whether or not to shift to an advantageous gaming state (RT state ST6) advantageous to the player or to shift to a state in which it is easy to shift to the advantageous gaming state as the profit-giving process. To execute the decision processing to be done
The state transition means is characterized in that it shifts to the advantageous gaming state or a state in which it is easy to shift to the advantageous gaming state based on the transition decision made in the determination process. The gaming machine according to any one of C3.

According to the feature C4, there is a possibility that the advantageous gaming state is set and the second section is set when a specific event occurs in the first section. This makes it possible to increase the player's attention to the occurrence of a specific event in the first section.

Feature C5. The process executing means is to prevent the profit grant from being determined in the profit granting process, provided that the gaming state in the predetermined opportunity game is the specific gaming state (normal state ST1) at least one condition. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C4.

According to the feature C5, when the gaming state in the predetermined opportunity game is the specific gaming state, the profit is not determined, so that even if the specific event occurs in the first section and is set in the second section. It is possible to create a situation where no profit is granted.

Feature C6. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C5, wherein the predetermined trigger game is the first game started in the second section set for the occurrence of the specific event.

According to the feature C6, when it is set in the second section, it is possible to execute the profit-giving process at an early stage.

Feature C7. Means for differentiating the end conditions of the second section according to the result of the profit-giving process executed in response to the setting of the second section (step S1901, step S1901 in the main MPU 72 in the first embodiment). A function of executing the processing of S1904, step S1905, step S1910 and step S1913, a function of executing the processing of step S2601, step S2604, step S2605, step S2610 and step S2613 in the main MPU 72 in the fourth embodiment, seventh. In the eighth embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S3001, step S3004, step S3005 and step S3009 in the main MPU 72, and in the eighth embodiment, the processing of step S3201, step S3206, step S3207 and step S3213 in the main MPU 72. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C6, characterized in that it has a function to execute).

According to the feature C7, the second section can be terminated in a mode corresponding to the result of the profit-giving process, and the result of the profit-giving process can be associated with the continuation mode of the second section.

Feature C8. When the result of the profit-giving process executed for the setting of the second section does not correspond to the profit grant, the profit-giving process executed for the setting of the second section A means for making the number of games executed in the second section smaller or easier to be smaller than when the result corresponds to the grant of profit (step in the main MPU 72 in the first embodiment). The function of executing the process of S1904 to step S1906, the function of executing the process of steps S2604 to S2606 in the main MPU 72 in the fourth embodiment, and the process of steps S3206 to S3209 in the main MPU 72 in the eighth embodiment. The gaming machine according to any one of the features C1 to C7, which is characterized by having a function of executing the above.

According to the feature C8, it is possible to prevent the second section from continuing for a meaninglessly long time in a situation where no profit is given.

Feature C9. When the result of the profit-giving process executed in response to the setting of the second section is a result that does not correspond to the profit-giving, the gaming state in the predetermined opportunity game in which the profit-giving process is executed. Described in any one of features C1 to C8, which is characterized by having a means (a function of executing end processing of an advantageous section in the main MPU 72) for making the end condition of the second section different according to the type of the second section. Game machine.

According to the feature C9, even in a situation where no profit is given, it is possible to end the second section in a manner corresponding to the type of the gaming state at that time, and the result of the profit giving process and the profit giving process. It is possible to associate the continuation mode of the second section with the combination with the gaming state when is executed.

Feature C10. If the result of the profit-giving process executed in response to the setting of the second section is a result that does not correspond to the profit-giving, the means for allowing the second section to end in the shortest number of games. (In the first embodiment, the function of executing the processes of steps S1904 to S1906 in the main MPU 72, in the fourth embodiment, the function of executing the processes of steps S2604 to S2606 in the main MPU 72, the eighth embodiment. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C9, characterized in that the main MPU 72 has a function of executing the processes of steps S3206 to S3209).

According to the feature C10, it is possible to shorten the number of games in which the second section continues as much as possible in a situation where no profit is given. This makes it possible to prevent the total number of staying games in the second section from becoming unnecessarily long.

Feature C11. When the result of the profit-giving process executed in response to the setting of the second section is a result that does not correspond to the profit-giving, the said in the predetermined opportunity game in which the profit-giving process is executed. Means for terminating the second section (in the first embodiment, the function of executing the processes of steps S1904 to S1906 in the main MPU 72, and in the fourth embodiment, the processes of steps S2604 to S2606 in the main MPU 72 are executed. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C10, which comprises a function (a function of executing the processing of steps S3206 to S3209 in the main MPU 72 in the eighth embodiment).

According to the feature C11, it is possible to minimize the number of games in which the second section continues in a situation where no profit is given.

Feature C12. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C11, wherein the profit-giving process is not executed even if the specific event occurs in the second section.

According to the feature C12, the profit-giving process is executed when a specific event occurs in the first section, whereas the profit-giving process is not executed even if the specific event occurs in the second section. This makes it possible to clearly distinguish the roles of the first section and the second section.

Feature C13. The state transition means changes from the specific state to another game state (first preparation state ST4) on the condition that the specific event occurs in the situation where the game state is the specific state (post-bonus state ST3). It ’s a transition,
When the profit-giving process is executed when the specific event occurs in the specific state, the process executing means determines that the profit-giving process determines the grant of profit. The gaming machine according to any one of the features C1 to C12.

According to the feature C13, when a specific event occurs, the game does not shift to another gaming state unless a specific event occurs, and the profit-giving process is executed when the specific event occurs in the specific state. Is decided to give a profit. As a result, the probability that a profit will be given increases in the case of a specific state. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the specific state.

Feature C14. When the first special gaming state (second BB state) advantageous to the player is completed, the means for setting the subsequent situation to the specific state and the first section (process of step S1805 in the main MPU 72). The gaming machine according to feature C13, which is characterized by having a function to execute).

According to the feature C14, not only is it advantageous to the player when the first special gaming state is reached, but also the situation is that the specific state is the first section after the end of the first special gaming state. Therefore, the probability that a profit will be given increases. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the occurrence of the first special gaming state.

Feature C15. Even if the specific event occurs in the second section, the profit-giving process is not executed.
When the second special gaming state (first BB state) advantageous to the player is completed, the means for setting the subsequent situation to the specific state and the second section (process of step S1714 in the main MPU 72). The gaming machine according to feature C14, which is characterized by having a function to execute).

According to the feature C15, although it is advantageous to the player when the second special gaming state is reached, after the end of the second special gaming state, the situation becomes a specific state and the second section. , Even if a specific event occurs in the second section, the profit-giving process is not executed. As a result, it is possible to give a difference in the advantage in terms of the probability of granting a profit between the first special gaming state and the second special gaming state, which are both advantageous to the player.

Feature C16. The gaming machine according to feature C15, wherein the profit-giving process is not executed in the first special gaming state, and the profit-giving process can be executed in the second special gaming state.

According to the feature C16, since the profit-giving process is executed in the second special gaming state, it is possible to give an opportunity to give a profit even in the second special gaming state.

Feature C17. The game according to any one of features C1 to C16, wherein the occurrence of the specific event includes winning a specific combination (index value IV in which SB winning data is set) in a combination lottery process. Machine.

According to the feature C17, the player who expects to execute the profit-giving process is expected to win the specific combination in the combination lottery process in the situation of the first section. This makes it easy for the player who expects to execute the profit-giving process to understand the object to be noted.

Feature C18. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C17, wherein the probability that the specific event occurs is constant among set values of a plurality of stages that give a difference in the advantage of the gaming machine.

According to the feature C18, the probability of transition from the first section to the second section can be made constant among the set values of a plurality of stages.

Feature C19. One of the first section and the second section may be granted a privilege that does not occur in the other, or one of the first section and the second section is granted a privilege to the player more than the other. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C18, which is characterized by an easy configuration.

According to the feature C19, the player plays the game while expecting that the game section is advantageous.

Feature C20. In the second section, a privilege that does not occur in the first section can be given to the player, or in the second section, the privilege is more easily given to the player than in the first section. C1 The gaming machine according to any one of A19.

According to the feature C20, the second section is more advantageous than the first section when comparing only the game sections. In this case, by providing the configuration of the above-mentioned feature C1, the profit-giving process is executed when a specific event occurs in the situation of the first section. This makes it possible to increase the player's attention to the situation in the first section.

Feature C21. A pattern display means (reel unit 31) that displays a variable pattern, and
The start operation means (start lever 41) operated to start the variable display of the pattern in the pattern display means, and
A combination lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process in the main MPU 72) that executes a combination lottery process based on the operation of the start operation means, and
The stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop the variable display of the pattern in the pattern display means, and the stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44).
The pattern variation display is started based on the operation of the start operation means and the predetermined start condition is satisfied, and the pattern variation display is stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means. A picture display control means (a function for executing reel control processing in the main MPU 72) for controlling the display means, and
When the stop result corresponding to the winning combination in the lottery process of the winning combination is displayed after the variation display of the pattern, the corresponding execution is executed to control the winning combination as the winning combination is established. Means (a function to execute a winning determination process, a medium grant process, and a corresponding process at the end of a game in the main MPU 72),
Equipped with
In the corresponding execution means, a predetermined corresponding combination (in the first to seventh embodiments, the index value IV in which the first promotion replay winning data is set and the second promotion replay winning data are set in the lottery process of the combination. Index value IV, in the eighth embodiment, the index value IV in which the bell winning data is set, the index value IV in which the first promotion replay winning data is set, and the index value IV in which the second promotion replay winning data is set). A function of executing the processing of the predetermined corresponding execution means (step S905 and step S1005 in the main MPU 72) that executes the control corresponding to the winning operation mode based on the predetermined mode of the stop operation mode of the variation display of the pattern. )
This gaming machine corresponds to any one of the predetermined mode and the mode for preventing the predetermined mode from being obtained when the predetermined corresponding combination is won in the lottery process of the combination in the second section. Features C1 to C20 characterized by being provided with a notification control means (a function of executing a notification control process in the main MPU 72 and a function of executing a notification process in the effect side MPU 92) for executing a predetermined notification. The gaming machine according to any one of.

According to the feature C21, in the second section, when the predetermined corresponding combination is won in the combination lottery process, the predetermined notification is executed. Therefore, the profit corresponding to the stop operation is performed in the mode corresponding to the predetermined notification. Can be obtained. In this case, the configuration of the above feature C1 is provided, and the profit-giving process can be executed when a specific event occurs in the first section, so that the player's attention to the first section can be increased. ..

It should be noted that, with respect to the configuration of the features C1 to C21, any one of the features A1 to A16, the features B1 to B13, the features C1 to C21, the features D1 to D13, the features E1 to E9, the features F1 to F12, and the features G1 to G12. One or more configurations may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic D group>
Feature D1. Advantageous section setting means for setting the game section to the advantageous section (in the first embodiment, the function of executing the processes of step S1404, step S1411, and step S1414 in the main MPU 72, and in the sixth embodiment, step S2804 in the main MPU 72). Function to execute the processing of) and
An advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player in the advantageous section (RT state ST6) or a state in which it is easy to shift to the advantageous gaming state (a state in which the second preparation state ST5 and the transition condition to the RT state ST6 is satisfied). (Function to execute the process of step S905 and step S1005 in the main MPU 72) and the state transition means to shift to
An advantageous section ending means (a function of executing the ending processing of the advantageous section in the main MPU 72) that executes the ending processing of the advantageous section based on the occurrence of the ending opportunity in the situation of the advantageous section.
Equipped with
A gaming machine characterized in that there are a plurality of types of termination triggers.

According to the feature D1, since the transition to the advantageous gaming state or the state in which the transition to the advantageous gaming state is easy occurs in the advantageous section, whether or not the player who expects the transition to the advantageous gaming state is set in the advantageous section. Will pay attention to. In this case, since there are a plurality of types of end triggers for executing the end process of the advantageous section, it is possible to diversify the end mode of the advantageous section. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature D2. The state transition means according to feature D1, characterized in that, when the termination process is executed, the advantageous gaming state is terminated or a new transition to the advantageous gaming state is unlikely to occur. Pachinko machine.

According to the feature D2, when the advantageous section ends, the advantageous gaming state ends or the state shifts to a state in which a new transition to the advantageous gaming state is unlikely to occur. Therefore, the player pays attention to when the advantageous section ends. In this case, since there are multiple types of opportunities for ending the advantageous section, it is possible to diversify the ending mode of the advantageous section that the player is paying attention to, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Become.

Feature D3. The gaming machine according to feature D1 or D2, wherein the termination trigger includes the fact that the number of games executed in the advantageous section has reached the upper limit number of games.

According to the feature D3, the advantageous section ends based on the number of games continuously executed in the advantageous section reaching the upper limit number of games, so that the advantageous section does not continue excessively. can do.

Feature D4. The advantageous section ending means is
First termination means for terminating the advantageous section based on the number of games executed in the advantageous section reaching the upper limit number of games (in the first embodiment, affirmative determination in step S1910 in the main MPU 72). And the function of executing the process of step S1911, and in the fourth embodiment, the function of making an affirmative determination in step S2610 of the main MPU 72 and executing the process of step S2611).
A second ending means (first implementation) for terminating the advantageous section based on the occurrence of a transition of the gaming state in a situation where the number of games executed in the advantageous section is included in the predetermined number of games range. In the embodiment, the function of making an affirmative determination in step S1913 in the main MPU 72 and executing the process of step S1911, and in the fourth embodiment, making an affirmative determination in step S2613 in the main MPU 72 and executing the process of step S2611. Function), and the gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D3, characterized in that it is provided with.

According to the feature D4, it is possible to diversify the end opportunity of the advantageous section in relation to the number of games executed in the situation of the advantageous section. This makes it possible to increase the player's attention to the number of games played in the advantageous section.

Feature D5. The second ending means terminates the advantageous section based on the occurrence of the transition of the advantageous gaming state in the situation where the number of games executed in the situation of the advantageous section is included in the predetermined number of games range. The gaming machine according to the feature D4.

According to the feature D5, when the transition of the advantageous gaming state occurs in the situation where the number of games executed in the advantageous section is included in the predetermined number of games range, the game is executed in the advantageous section. The advantageous section ends even if the number of games has not reached the upper limit. This makes it possible to draw the player's attention to the timing of transition to the advantageous gaming state with respect to the number of games executed in the advantageous section.

Feature D6. The advantageous gaming state is the advantageous gaming state, and the advantageous gaming state is the advantageous gaming state, although the advantageous gaming state and the advantageous section situation occurs, provided that the situation in the advantageous gaming state is not the advantageous section occurs. Unlike the case where a situation other than the section does not occur, the related process execution means (to the RT state ST6 using the table for various states in the main MPU 72) so that the related process related to the interest of the player can be executed. The gaming machine according to feature D5, which is provided with a function of executing a transition lottery process of the above, and a function of executing a transition lottery process to the RT state ST6 using a table for the RT state in the main MPU 72). ..

According to the feature D6, although the number of games executed in the advantageous section has not reached the upper limit of the number of games, the advantageous section has ended in relation to the timing of transition to the advantageous gaming state. Even so, since the related processing related to the profit of the player can be executed for it, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling disadvantageous for the occurrence of such an event.

Feature D7. A processing execution means (a function of executing a transition lottery process to the RT state ST6 in the main MPU 72) for executing a profit granting process based on the setting in the advantageous section, and
Means for differentiating the end trigger of the advantageous section according to the result of the profit-giving process executed for the setting of the advantageous section (step S1901, step S1904, in the main MPU 72 in the first embodiment). A function of executing the processing of step S1905, step S1910 and step S1913, a function of executing the processing of step S2601, step S2604, step S2605, step S2610 and step S2613 in the main MPU 72 in the fourth embodiment, the seventh execution. In the embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S3001, step S3004, step S3005 and step S3009 in the main MPU 72 is executed, and in the eighth embodiment, the processing of step S3201, step S3206, step S3207 and step S3213 in the main MPU 72 is executed. Function) and
The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D6.

According to the feature D7, the advantageous section can be terminated in a mode corresponding to the result of the profit-giving process, and the result of the profit-giving process can be associated with the end mode of the advantageous section.

Feature D8. The process executing means executes a determination process for determining whether or not to shift to the advantageous gaming state or to shift to a state where it is easy to shift to the advantageous gaming state as the profit-giving process. ,
The feature D7 is characterized in that the state transition means shifts to the advantageous gaming state or a state in which the transition to the advantageous gaming state is easy to occur based on the transition decision made in the determination process. The described gaming machine.

According to the feature D8, the end trigger of the advantageous section changes depending on the presence or absence of the transition to the advantageous gaming state or the state in which the transition to the advantageous gaming state is easy. This makes it possible to end the advantageous section in a manner suitable for each situation.

Feature D9. The result of the profit-giving process executed for the setting of the advantageous section corresponds to the granting of profit (notification of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enables the establishment of the first promotion replay winning). If this is the case, the means for continuing the advantageous section at least until the profit is granted (in the first embodiment, the function of making a negative determination in step S1905 in the main MPU 72, the fourth implementation). In the embodiment, the function of making a negative determination in step S2605 in the main MPU 72, in the seventh embodiment, the function of making a negative determination in step S3005 in the main MPU 72, and in the eighth embodiment, in step S3207 in the main MPU 72. The gaming machine according to feature D7 or D8, which is characterized by having a function of making a negative determination).

According to the feature D9, it is possible to prevent the advantageous section from ending in the middle of the decision even though the profit is decided to be given.

Feature D10. When the result of the profit-giving process executed for the setting of the advantageous section is a result that does not correspond to the grant of profit, the result of the profit-giving process executed for the setting of the advantageous section is A means for making the number of games executed in the advantageous section smaller or easier to be smaller than in the case where the result corresponds to the grant of profit (the function of making an affirmative judgment in step S1905 in the main MPU 72). In the fourth embodiment, the function of making an affirmative judgment in step S2605 in the main MPU 72, in the seventh embodiment, the function of making an affirmative judgment in step S2605 in the main MPU 72, and in the eighth embodiment, in the main MPU 72. The gaming machine according to any one of features D7 to D9, which comprises a function of making an affirmative determination in step S3207).

According to the feature D10, it is possible to prevent the advantageous section from continuing for a meaninglessly long time in a situation where no profit is given.

Feature D11. When the result of the profit-giving process executed in response to the setting of the advantageous section is a result that does not correspond to the profit-giving process, the game state in the game in which the profit-giving process is executed depends on the type of gaming state. Means for differentiating the end trigger of the advantageous section (a function of executing the processing of steps S1901 to S1907 in the main MPU 72 in the first embodiment, and steps S2601 to S2607 in the main MPU 72 in the fourth embodiment). A function to execute the process, a function to execute the process of steps S3001 to S3007 in the main MPU 72 in the seventh embodiment, and a function to execute the process of steps S3201 to S3211 in the main MPU 72 in the eighth embodiment). The gaming machine according to any one of features D7 to D10.

According to the feature D11, even in a situation where no profit is given, it is possible to end the advantageous section in a manner corresponding to the type of the gaming state at that time, and the result of the profit giving process and the profit giving process can be obtained. It is possible to associate the end mode of the advantageous section with the combination with the gaming state when it is executed.

Feature D12. When the result of the profit-giving process executed in response to the setting of the advantageous section is a result that does not correspond to the grant of profit, the means for allowing the advantageous section to be completed in the shortest number of games (mainly). The function of making an affirmative judgment in step S1905 in the side MPU 72, the function of making an affirmative judgment in step S2605 in the main side MPU 72 in the fourth embodiment, and the function of making an affirmative judgment in step S2605 in the main side MPU 72 in the seventh embodiment. The gaming machine according to any one of features D7 to D11, characterized in that it has a function of performing a positive determination in step S3207 in the main MPU 72 in the eighth embodiment).

According to the feature D12, it is possible to shorten the number of games in which the advantageous section continues in a situation where no profit is given. This makes it possible to prevent the total number of staying games in the advantageous section from becoming unnecessarily long.

Feature D13. If the result of the profit-giving process executed in response to the setting of the advantageous section is a result that does not correspond to the grant of profit, the advantageous section is terminated in the game in which the profit-giving process is executed. Means (a function of making an affirmative determination in step S1905 in the main MPU 72, a function of making an affirmative determination in step S2605 in the main MPU 72 in the fourth embodiment, and a function of making an affirmative determination in step S2605 in the main MPU 72 in the seventh embodiment. The gaming machine according to any one of features D7 to D12, characterized in that it has a function of making an affirmative determination).

According to the feature D13, it is possible to minimize the number of games in which the advantageous section continues in a situation where no profit is given.

It should be noted that, with respect to the configuration of the features D1 to D13, any one of the features A1 to A16, the features B1 to B13, the features C1 to C21, the features D1 to D13, the features E1 to E9, the features F1 to F12, and the features G1 to G12. One or more configurations may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic E group>
Features E1. A pattern display means (reel unit 31) that displays a variable pattern, and
The start operation means (start lever 41) operated to start the variable display of the pattern in the pattern display means, and
A combination lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process in the main MPU 72) that executes a combination lottery process based on the operation of the start operation means, and
The stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop the variable display of the pattern in the pattern display means, and the stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44).
The pattern variation display is started based on the operation of the start operation means and the predetermined start condition is satisfied, and the pattern variation display is stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means. A picture display control means (a function for executing reel control processing in the main MPU 72) for controlling the display means, and
When the stop result corresponding to the winning combination in the lottery process of the winning combination is displayed after the variation display of the pattern, the corresponding execution is executed to control the winning combination as the winning combination is established. Means (a function to execute a winning determination process, a medium grant process, and a corresponding process at the end of a game in the main MPU 72),
Equipped with
In the corresponding execution means, a predetermined corresponding combination (in the first to seventh embodiments, the index value IV in which the first promotion replay winning data is set and the second promotion replay winning data are set in the lottery process of the combination. Index value IV, in the eighth embodiment, the index value IV in which the bell winning data is set, the index value IV in which the first promotion replay winning data is set, and the index value IV in which the second promotion replay winning data is set). A function of executing the processing of the predetermined correspondence execution means (step S905 and step S1005 in the main MPU 72) that executes the control corresponding to the winning operation mode based on the predetermined mode of the stop operation mode of the variation display of the pattern. ) In a gaming machine equipped with
When the game section is an advantageous section, a predetermined mode corresponding to any one of the predetermined mode and the mode for preventing the predetermined mode from becoming the predetermined mode when the predetermined corresponding combination is won in the lottery process of the combination. Notification control means for executing notification (a function for executing notification control processing in the main MPU 72, a function for executing notification processing in the effect side MPU 92), and
The restriction setting means for setting the restriction status in the advantageous section (the function of executing the processes of steps S1306 and S1506 in the main MPU 72 in the first embodiment, and the process of step S2511 in the main MPU 72 in the third embodiment). A function to execute, a function to execute the process of step S2707 in the main MPU 72 in the fifth embodiment, and a function to execute the process of step S2906 in the main MPU 72 in the sixth embodiment) are provided.
The notification control means is characterized in that when the restricted situation is set even in the advantageous section, the predetermined notification is not executed even if the predetermined corresponding combination is won in the lottery process of the combination. Gaming machine.

According to the feature E1, when the game section becomes an advantageous section and the predetermined corresponding combination is won in the combination lottery process, the predetermined notification is executed, so that the player operates the stop operation in a manner corresponding to the predetermined notification. Can be done. As a result, the player expects that the game section becomes an advantageous section, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game. In this case, when the restricted situation is set, the predetermined notification is not executed even in the advantageous section. As a result, it is possible to generate a situation in which the predetermined notification is not executed even in the advantageous section, and it is possible to suitably control the game section.

Feature E2. It is provided with a processing execution means (a function of executing a transition lottery process to the RT state ST6 in the main MPU 72) for executing a profit granting process based on the setting in the advantageous section.
The gaming machine according to feature E1, wherein the restriction setting means is set to the restriction situation when the result of the profit granting process does not correspond to the profit grant.

According to the feature E2, since the profit-giving process is executed based on the fact that the advantageous section is set, it is possible to increase the player's expectation that the game section becomes the advantageous section. In this case, if the result of the profit granting process does not correspond to the profit grant, it is possible to prevent the predetermined notification from being executed by setting the restriction status, so that the profit is granted. Even if the result does not correspond to the above, it is possible to create a situation in which the game section is maintained in the advantageous section.

Feature E3. Advantageous section setting means for setting the game section to the advantageous section when the transition to the special gaming state (first BB state) occurs (in the first embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S1414 in the main MPU 72). Prepare,
The processing execution means is configured to execute the profit-giving process when the execution is triggered in the special gaming state.
When the profit-giving process that results in the profit granting is not executed in the special gaming state, the gaming state after the end of the special gaming state is the advantageous section. The gaming machine according to feature E2, wherein the restricted state is set.

According to the feature E3, when the transition to the special gaming state occurs, the gaming section is set as an advantageous section, and the profit-giving process is executed by triggering the execution in the special gaming state. This makes it possible to raise the player's expectation that the transition to the special gaming state will occur. In addition, when the profit granting process that results in the profit granting is not executed in the special gaming state, the gaming state after the end of the special gaming state is an advantageous section and the restricted status is set. It becomes a state. As a result, while the advantageous section is maintained even after the end of the special gaming state, if the profit-giving process that results in the granting of profit is not executed, the special gaming state ends. It is possible to prevent the predetermined notification from being executed in the later advantageous section.

Feature E4. Advantageous section setting means for setting the game section to the advantageous section based on the occurrence of a specific event (SB winning data is set) in the section where the game section is not the advantageous section (mainly in the first embodiment). It has a function of executing the process of step S1411 in the side MPU 72, and a function of executing the process of step S2804 in the main MPU 72 in the sixth embodiment).
The gaming machine according to feature E2 or E3, wherein the processing executing means does not execute the profit-giving process even if the specific event occurs in the advantageous section.

According to the feature E4, the game section is set to the advantageous section based on the occurrence of a specific event in the section where the game section is not the advantageous section. Then, the profit-giving process is executed based on the configuration of the above-mentioned feature E2 and the game section being set to the advantageous section. As a result, the player expects a specific event to occur in a section that is not an advantageous section. In addition, even if a specific event occurs in the advantageous section, the profit-giving process is not executed. As a result, by setting the situation to be an advantageous section and a restricted situation, it is possible to generate a situation in which the predetermined notification is not executed and the profit granting process is not executed even if a specific event occurs.

Feature E5. Another game state (first preparation state) from the specific state on condition that a specific event (SB winning data is set) occurs in a situation where the game state is a specific state (post-bonus state ST3). It is equipped with a means for shifting to ST4) (a function of executing the process of step S803 in the main MPU 72).
When the profit-giving process is executed when the specific event occurs in the specific state, the process executing means determines that the profit-giving process determines the grant of profit. The gaming machine according to any one of the features E2 to E4.

According to the feature E5, when a specific event occurs, the game does not shift to another gaming state unless a specific event occurs, and a profit-giving process is executed when the specific event occurs in the specific state. Is decided to give a profit. As a result, the probability that a profit will be given increases in the case of a specific state. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the specific state.

Feature E6. The gaming machine according to feature E4 or E5, wherein the occurrence of the specific event includes winning a specific combination (index value IV in which SB winning data is set) in a combination lottery process.

According to the feature E6, the player who expects to execute the profit-giving process is expected to win the specific role in the role lottery process. This makes it easy for the player who expects to execute the profit-giving process to understand the object to be noted.

Feature E7. In another gaming state (second preparation state ST5), when the predetermined corresponding combination is won in the lottery process of the combination and the stop operation mode becomes the predetermined mode, the gaming state is advantageous to the player. It is equipped with a state transition means (a function of executing the process of step S1005 in the main MPU 72) to shift to a favorable gaming state (RT state ST6).
The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E6, wherein the predetermined notification is a notification for making the stop operation mode the predetermined mode.

According to the feature E7, when the predetermined corresponding combination is won in the lottery process of the combination in the advantageous section, the predetermined notification is executed, and the game state is changed to the advantageous gaming state by performing the stop operation in the mode corresponding to the predetermined notification. Transition. As a result, it is possible to increase the player's expectation that the predetermined notification will be executed as an advantageous section.

Feature E8. The advantageous section is based on the fact that the stop operation mode does not become the predetermined mode even though the predetermined corresponding combination is won in the lottery process of the combination in the other gaming state and the advantageous section. (In the first embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S1902 in the main MPU 72, in the fourth embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S2602 in the main MPU 72, and in the seventh embodiment, the main The gaming machine according to feature E7, which comprises a function of executing the process of step S3002 in the side MPU 72, and a function of executing the process of step S3203 in the main MPU 72 in the eighth embodiment).

According to the feature E8, if the predetermined corresponding combination is won in the combination lottery process in the advantageous section but the stop operation mode does not become the predetermined mode, not only the transition to the advantageous gaming state does not occur but also the transition to the advantageous gaming state does not occur. The advantageous section ends. As a result, it is possible to increase the player's expectation that the predetermined notification will be executed as an advantageous section.

Feature E9. The feature E7 or E8, wherein when the gaming section is not the advantageous section, the predetermined notification is not executed even if the predetermined corresponding combination is won in the lottery process of the combination in the other gaming state. Gaming machine.

According to the feature E9, if the section is not advantageous, the predetermined notification is not executed even if the predetermined corresponding combination is won, so that it is possible to increase the player's expectation that the section will be advantageous.

It should be noted that, with respect to the configuration of the features E1 to E9, any one of the features A1 to A16, the features B1 to B13, the features C1 to C21, the features D1 to D13, the features E1 to E9, the features F1 to F12, and the features G1 to G12. One or more configurations may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic F group>
Features F1. Processing execution means for executing profit-giving processing based on the fact that the game section is set from the first section (normal section) to the second section (advantageous section) (execution of the transition lottery process to the RT state ST6 in the main MPU 72) Function to do) and
Section setting means (main side in the first embodiment) so that the game section is the second section after the predetermined profit (first BB state) is given in the situation where the game section is the first section. (Function to execute the process of step S1414 in MPU72) and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature F1, when a predetermined profit is given in the situation of the first section, the subsequent gaming section is set to be the second section and is set from the first section to the second section. Based on this, the profit-giving process is executed. As a result, when a predetermined profit is given, the profit giving process based on the setting in the first section to the second section can be further executed. Therefore, it is possible to raise the degree of attention of the player to the fact that a predetermined profit is given, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature F2. The section setting means is characterized in that the gaming section is the second section when a special gaming state (first BB state) advantageous to the player is started as the granting of the predetermined benefit. Feature The gaming machine described in F1.

According to the feature F2, when a special gaming state advantageous to the player occurs, not only that, but also the gaming section is set as the second section. Then, the profit-giving process is executed based on the setting in the second section. This makes it possible to increase the player's attention to the start of the special gaming state.

Feature F3. The processing executing means is characterized in that when the special gaming state is started in the first section and set in the second section, the profit-giving process is executed when the special gaming state is started. The gaming machine described in F2.

According to the feature F3, when the special gaming state occurs and the gaming section is set to the second section, the profit-giving process is executed at the start of the special gaming state. This makes it possible to increase the attention of the player at the timing when the special gaming state is started.

Features F4. The processing execution means grants the profit based on the occurrence of an execution trigger (winning with an index value IV = 2 or 3 in the BB state ST2) in the situation of the special gaming state and the second section. The gaming machine according to feature F3, which is characterized by executing a processing process.

According to the feature F4, the profit-giving process is executed not only at the timing when the special gaming state is started but also after the start of the special gaming state based on the occurrence of the execution trigger. As a result, it is possible to increase the attention of the player not only at the start of the special gaming state but also after the start.

Feature F5. The process executing means has the execution opportunity when the granting of extraordinary profit (winning to shift to the RT state ST6) is not determined in the profit granting process executed when the special gaming state is started. The gaming machine according to feature F4, wherein the profit-giving process is executed based on the occurrence.

According to the feature F5, the profit-giving process is executed in response to the subsequent occurrence of the execution opportunity, provided that the extra-profit grant is not determined in the profit-giving process at the start of the special gaming state. .. This makes it possible to prevent the granting of extraordinary benefits from occurring in duplicate.

Feature F6. The processing execution means is an execution trigger (index value IV in the BB state ST2) in the situation where the special gaming state is in the situation where the extraordinary profit is already determined by the profit granting process and the second section. Features F3 to F5 characterized by executing a process (a process of promoting the continuation rate in the main MPU 72) that enables the granting of a specific profit based on the occurrence of (winning in 2 or 3). The gaming machine according to any one.

According to the feature F6, when the special profit is determined by the profit-giving process at the start of the special gaming state, the specific profit can be given based on the execution opportunity after the start of the special profit-giving process. As a result, it is possible to increase the attention of the player not only at the start of the special gaming state but also after the start.

Feature F7. Any of the features F2 to F6, wherein the processing executing means does not execute the profit-giving process when the special gaming state is started in the second section. The gaming machine described in 1.

According to the feature F7, when the special gaming state is already started in the situation which is the second section, the profit-giving process is not executed. This makes it possible to increase the advantage of starting the special gaming state in the situation of the first section.

Feature F8. The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F7, wherein the probability that the predetermined benefit is given is constant among set values of a plurality of stages that give a difference in the advantage of the gaming machine.

According to the feature F8, the profit-giving process is executed triggered by the granting of a predetermined profit having a constant grant probability among the set values of a plurality of stages, so that the execution frequency of the profit-giving process is between the set values. It is possible to make it difficult for advantages or disadvantages to occur.

Features F9. Means for setting the gaming state after the predetermined profit is given to a specific state (post-bonus state ST3) (a function of executing the process of step S1714 in the main MPU 72) and
Shift from the specific state to another game state (first preparation state ST4) on the condition that a specific event (SB winning data is set) occurs in the situation where the game state is the specific state. Means (a function of executing the process of step S803 in the main MPU 72) and
Equipped with
The section setting means makes the game section the second section based on the occurrence of the specific event in the situation of the first section.
When the profit-giving process is executed when the specific event occurs in the specific state, the process executing means shall make it possible to determine the granting of extraordinary profit in the profit-giving process. The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F8.

According to the feature F9, when a specific state is reached after a predetermined profit is given, the game does not shift to another game state unless a specific event occurs, and a specific event occurs in the situation of the first section. It becomes the second section based on. Then, when a specific event occurs in a specific state and the game section changes from the first section to the second section and the profit granting process is executed, the granting of extraordinary profit is determined. That is, when the game section after the predetermined profit is given is the first section, the probability that the extraordinary profit is given is high. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the fact that the game section after the predetermined profit is given is the first section.

Feature F10. It is provided with a means (a function of making a negative determination in step S1413 in the main MPU 72) so that the game section after the profit different from the predetermined profit (second BB state) is given is the first section. The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F9.

According to the feature F10, when a predetermined profit is given, it becomes the second section, whereas the game section after the profit different from the predetermined profit is given is maintained in the first section. Further, even if the above-mentioned different profits are given, the transition of the game section from the first section to the second section does not occur. Therefore, the profit-giving process may be executed when the above-mentioned different profits are given. No. As a result, it is possible to make the setting mode of the game section different according to the type of profit to be given, and it is also possible to make the execution mode of the profit giving process different.

Features F11. The gaming machine according to feature F10, wherein the probability that the different benefits are given differs between the first set value and the second set value, which give a difference to the advantage of the gaming machine.

According to the feature F11, since the profit-giving process is not executed triggered by the granting of profits having different grant probabilities between the first set value and the second set value, there is an advantage between the set values regarding the execution frequency of the profit-giving process. Alternatively, it is possible to make it difficult for disadvantages to occur.

Feature F12. A means for setting the gaming state after the different benefits are granted to a specific state (post-bonus state ST3) (a function of executing the process of step S1805 in the main MPU 72), and
Shift from the specific state to another game state (first preparation state ST4) on the condition that a specific event (SB winning data is set) occurs in the situation where the game state is the specific state. Means (a function of executing the process of step S803 in the main MPU 72) and
Equipped with
The section setting means makes the game section the second section based on the occurrence of the specific event in the situation of the first section.
When the profit-giving process is executed when the specific event occurs in the specific state, the process executing means shall make it possible to determine the granting of extraordinary profit in the profit-giving process. The gaming machine according to the feature F10 or F11.

According to the feature F12, when the specific state is reached after the above different benefits are given, the game state does not shift to another game state unless the specific event occurs, and the specific event occurs in the situation of the first section. It becomes the second section based on. Then, when a specific event occurs in a specific state and the game section changes from the first section to the second section and the profit granting process is executed, the granting of extraordinary profit is determined. Further, the gaming section after the above-mentioned different benefits are given in the first section is maintained in the first section. As a result, when the above-mentioned different profits are given, the probability that the extraordinary profits are subsequently given increases. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the above-mentioned different benefits.

It should be noted that, with respect to the configuration of the features F1 to F12, any one of the features A1 to A16, the features B1 to B13, the features C1 to C21, the features D1 to D13, the features E1 to E9, the features F1 to F12, and the features G1 to G12. One or more configurations may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic G group>
Features G1. The game section is set as the second section (advantageous section) on the condition that a specific event (SB winning data is set) occurs in the situation where the game section is the first section (normal section). Section setting means (a function of executing the process of step S1411 in the main MPU 72 in the first embodiment, a function of executing the process of step S2804 in the main MPU 72 in the sixth embodiment), and
A processing execution means (a function of executing a transition lottery process to the RT state ST6 in the main MPU 72) for executing a profit-giving process based on the fact that the game section is set in the second section, and
A state transition means for shifting from the specific state to another game state (first preparation state ST4) on the condition that the specific event occurs in a situation where the game state is a specific state (post-bonus state ST3). (Function to execute the process of step S803 in the main MPU 72) and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature G1, the game section is set in the second section on the condition that a specific event has occurred in the situation of the first section. Then, the profit-giving process is executed based on the fact that the game section is set to the second section. As a result, the player plays the game while expecting that a specific event occurs in the first section. Further, the gaming state shifts from the specific state to another gaming state on the condition that a specific event occurs in the situation where the gaming state is the specific state. That is, the condition that the gaming section shifts from the first section to the second section and the condition that the gaming state shifts from the specific state to another gaming state overlap as the occurrence of the specific event. This makes it possible to create a situation in which the gaming section shifts from the first section to the second section and the gaming state shifts from the specific state to another gaming state based on the occurrence of a specific event, which improves the interest of the game. It becomes possible to plan.

Feature G2. The condition for the game section to be set from the first section to the second section by the section setting means, and the state transition means for shifting the gaming state from the specific state to another gaming state. The gaming machine according to the feature G1, wherein the condition is common in that the specific event needs to occur, but is different in other points.

According to the feature G2, when a specific event occurs, both the setting from the first section to the second section and the transition from the specific state to another gaming state occur, and only one of these occurs. It is possible to cause the case of doing so. This makes it possible to diversify the setting status of the combination of the game section and the game state.

Feature G3. The section setting means sets the gaming section from the first section to the second section, and the state transition means shifts the gaming state from the specific state to another gaming state. Described in the feature G1 or G2, wherein one occurs when the specific event occurs and the other occurs when the specific event occurs and another event (SB winning is not established) also occurs. Gaming machine.

According to the feature G3, when only a specific event occurs, only one of the setting from the first section to the second section and the transition from the specific state to another gaming state occurs, and the specific event and another event occur. When both occur, both the setting from the first section to the second section and the transition from the specific state to another gaming state occur. This makes it possible to diversify the setting status of the combination of the game section and the game state.

Features G4. When the profit-giving process is executed when the specific event occurs in the specific state, the process executing means determines that the profit-giving process determines the grant of profit. Characteristic Feature The gaming machine according to any one of G1 to G3.

According to the feature G4, when a specific event occurs, the game does not shift to another gaming state unless a specific event occurs, and when a profit-giving process is executed when a specific event occurs in the specific state. Is decided to give a profit. As a result, the probability that a profit will be given increases in the case of a specific state. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the specific state.

Feature G5. The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G4, wherein the state transition means sets the gaming state after the predetermined benefit (BB state ST2) is given to the specific state.

According to the feature G5, the gaming state after the predetermined profit is given becomes a specific state, and in the specific state, the game state shifts to another gaming state on the condition that a specific event occurs. Further, the game section is set from the first section to the second section on the condition that a specific event has occurred, and the profit-giving process is executed based on the setting in the second section. As a result, a specific state exists as a gaming state in which the game section is set in the second section and stays until the profit granting process is executed after the predetermined profit is given, and the game state and the game section It is possible to relate the two in the configuration in which each exists.

Feature G6. The section setting means is
A first setting means (a function of making a negative determination in step S1413 in the main MPU 72) so that the game section after the predetermined benefit is given is the first section.
A second setting means (a function of executing the process of step S1414 in the main MPU 72) for making the game section after the predetermined benefit is given the second section, and
The gaming machine according to the feature G5, which is characterized by having.

According to the feature G6, in the configuration in which the gaming state after the predetermined benefit is given is the specific state, the gaming section after the predetermined benefit is given is the first section and the second section. And exist. As a result, when a specific event occurs in a specific state, the game section is set from the first section to the second section and the profit-giving process is executed, and the game section is maintained in the second section and the profit is given. It is possible to create a situation where the processing is not executed.

Feature G7. The gaming machine according to feature G5 or G6, wherein the predetermined benefit is a special gaming state (BB state ST2) that is advantageous to the player.

According to the feature G7, after the special gaming state advantageous to the player is completed, the gaming state becomes a specific state, a specific event occurs in the specific state, and the gaming section is set from the first section to the second section. In that case, the profit-giving process is executed. This makes it possible to consolidate favorable situations for the player in a short period of time.

Features G8. As the predetermined profit, there are a first predetermined profit (second BB state) and a second predetermined profit (first BB state).
The first setting means makes the game section after the first predetermined benefit is given to be the first section.
The gaming machine according to feature G6 or G7, wherein the second setting means is such that the gaming section after the second predetermined benefit is given is the second section.

According to the feature G8, there are cases where the game section after the predetermined profit is given is the first section and the case where the game section is the second section according to the type of the profit given as the predetermined profit. As a result, it becomes possible to generate a situation in which the specific state is the first section and a situation in which the specific state is the second section as the situation after the predetermined profit is given. It is possible to associate each of these situations with the type of profit given as a predetermined profit. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the game situation, and even if the game situation is diversified, it is possible to make the setting contents of each situation easy for the player to understand.

Feature G9. The second setting means sets the game section from the first section to the second section when the second predetermined benefit is given in the first section.
The processing executing means executes the profit-giving process based on the fact that the gaming section is set from the first section to the second section when the second predetermined profit is given. The gaming machine according to the feature G8.

According to the feature G9, when the second predetermined profit is given in the first section, it is set in the second section and the profit is set as a trigger of the grant of the second predetermined profit even if a specific event does not occur. The grant process is executed. As a result, it is possible to secure an opportunity for the profit-giving process to be executed even if the situation of the first section does not occur in the specific state when the second predetermined profit is given.

Feature G10. The probability that the first predetermined benefit is given differs between the first set value and the second set value that give a difference in the advantage of the gaming machine.
The gaming machine according to feature G9, wherein the probability that the second predetermined benefit is given is constant among set values of a plurality of stages that give a difference in the advantage of the gaming machine.

According to the feature G10, the granting probability is different between the first set value and the second set value. By executing the profit-giving process triggered by the provision of the second predetermined profit, which is constant, it is possible to make it difficult for an advantage or a disadvantage between the set values to occur with respect to the execution frequency of the profit-giving process.

Feature G11. The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G10, wherein the probability that the specific event occurs is constant among a plurality of types of set values that give a difference in the advantage of the gaming machine.

According to the feature G11, the profit-giving process is executed triggered by the occurrence of a specific event having a constant occurrence probability among the set values of a plurality of stages, so that the profit-giving process is executed frequently, which is advantageous among the set values. Alternatively, it is possible to make it difficult for disadvantages to occur.

Feature G12. The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G11, wherein the specific event includes winning a specific combination in a combination lottery process.

According to the feature G12, the player who expects to execute the profit-giving process is expected to win the specific combination in the combination lottery process in the situation of the first section. This makes it easy for the player who expects to execute the profit-giving process to understand the object to be noted.

It should be noted that, with respect to the configuration of the features G1 to G12, any one of the features A1 to A16, the features B1 to B13, the features C1 to C21, the features D1 to D13, the features E1 to E9, the features F1 to F12, and the features G1 to G12. One or more configurations may be applied. This makes it possible to produce a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

According to the inventions relating to the feature A group, the feature B group, the feature C group, the feature D group, the feature E group, the feature F group and the feature G group, the following problems can be solved. Is.

There is a slot machine as a kind of gaming machine. The slot machine is provided with a plurality of reels, and a part of the plurality of symbols given to the outer peripheral portion of each reel can be visually recognized through a display window. Then, when the player bets a game medium such as a medal and operates the start lever, each reel starts rotating, and after each reel starts rotating, each reel is sequentially stopped by operating the stop button.

In addition, a lottery is performed inside the slot machine on the condition that the bet of the game medium and the operation of the start lever are performed, and the symbol that the result of the lottery is won and the player is won on the preset valid line is displayed. A predetermined number of game media may be paid out on condition that the game is stopped.

Here, in a gaming machine such as the above example, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The above problem is not limited to slot machines, but also applies to, for example, a game machine that uses a game ball as a game medium.

The basic configuration of the gaming machine to which each of the above features can be applied is shown below.

Pachinko gaming machine: An operating means operated by a player, a game ball launching means for launching a game ball based on the operation of the operating means, a ball passage for guiding the launched game ball to a predetermined game area, and a game. A gaming machine that includes each gaming component arranged in an area and grants a privilege to a player when a gaming ball passes through a predetermined passing portion of each gaming component.

Rotating machine such as a slot machine: A player starts the rotation of the orbiting body based on the operation of the starting operation means, stops the rotation of the orbiting body based on the operation of the stopping operation means, and responds to the pattern after the stop. A gaming machine that gives special benefits to pachinko machines.

10 ... slot machine, 31 ... reel unit, 41 ... start lever, 42-44 ... stop button, 72 ... main side MPU, 92 ... directing side MPU, ST1 ... normal state, ST2 ... BB state, ST3 ... after bonus state, ST4 ... 1st preparation state, ST5 ... 2nd preparation state, ST6 ... RT state.

Claims (1)

A pattern display means that displays the pattern in a variable manner,
The start operation means operated to start the variable display of the pattern in the pattern display means, and the start operation means.
A combination lottery means for executing a combination lottery process based on the operation of the start operation means, and a combination lottery means.
The stop operation means operated to stop the variable display of the picture in the picture display means, and the stop operation means.
The pattern variation display is started based on the operation of the start operation means and the predetermined start condition is satisfied, and the pattern variation display is stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means. The pattern display control means that controls the display means,
When the stop result corresponding to the winning combination in the lottery process of the winning combination is displayed after the variation display of the pattern, the corresponding execution is executed to control the winning combination as the winning combination is established. Means and
Equipped with
The corresponding execution means wins a predetermined corresponding combination in the lottery process of the combination, and based on the stop operation mode of the variation display of the pattern becoming the predetermined mode, the predetermined response execution means executes the corresponding control. In a gaming machine equipped with means
When the game section is an advantageous section, a predetermined mode corresponding to any one of the predetermined mode and the mode for preventing the predetermined mode from becoming the predetermined mode when the predetermined corresponding combination is won in the lottery process of the combination. Notification control means for executing notification and
The restriction setting means for setting the restriction situation in the advantageous section and
Equipped with
The notification control means is characterized in that when the restricted situation is set even in the advantageous section, the predetermined notification is not executed even if the predetermined corresponding combination is won in the lottery process of the combination. Gaming machine.

Images